SVM7500 - EnglishUG - NIHON KOHDEN

Download as pdf or txt
Download as pdf or txt
You are on page 1of 316

User’s Guide

Bedside Monitor
SVM-7501
SVM-7521
SVM-7503
SVM-7523

SVM-7500 Series

0614-907644B
About This Manual
In order to use this product safely and fully understand all its functions, read this manual before using the
product. Keep this manual near the instrument or in the reach of the operator and refer to it whenever the
operation is unclear.

Accompanying Documentation
The product comes with the following manuals. Refer to the manual depending on your needs.

Operator’s Manual
Describes the operation and settings of the product. Read this manual before use.

Administrator’s Guide
For administrators. Describes how to install the product. Read the Operator’s Manual together with this
guide.

Service Manual
For qualified service personnel. Describes information on servicing the product. Only qualified service
personnel can service the bedside monitor.

User’s Guide
Gives supplemental information on the operation of the product.

Copyright Notice
The entire contents of this manual are copyrighted by Shanghai Kohden Medical Electronic Instrument
Corp., hereinafter referred to as “Shanghai Kohden” or “SKC”. All rights are reserved. No part of this
document may be reproduced, stored, or transmitted in any form or by any means (electronic, mechanical,
photocopied, recorded, or otherwise) without the prior written permission of Shanghai Kohden.

This product stores personal patient information. Manage the information appropriately.

Patient names on the screen shots and recording examples in this manual are fictional and any resemblance to
any person living or dead is purely coincidental.

The contents of this manual are subject to change without notice. If you have any comments or suggestions
on this manual, please contact us at: https://www.nihonkohden.com/
1
Contents
2
GENERAL HANDLING PRECAUTIONS...................... I
WARRANTY POLICY.................................................. II 5 Alarm Function 3
EMC RELATED CAUTION......................................... III Overview of Alarms.................................................. 5-4
Conventions Used in this Manual and Device.............V Alarm Types.............................................................. 5-8 4
Explanations of Symbols............................................VI Alarm Indications.................................................... 5-13
Related Documentation............................................VIII Silencing/Suspending/Resetting Alarms................. 5-22 5
Safety Standards......................................................VIII Turing Automatic Alarm Recording On/Off............. 5-28
Safety Information....................................................VIII Setting Alarms........................................................ 5-29 6
Interbed Alarm........................................................ 5-37

1 General 7
Introduction............................................................... 1-2 6 Review Window
Features................................................................... 1-3 General..................................................................... 6-3 8
Composition............................................................. 1-4 Time Bar................................................................... 6-4
Panel Description..................................................... 1-5 TREND GRAPH Window.......................................... 6-5 9
Basic Operating Concepts ....................................... 1-8 TREND TABLE Window......................................... 6-11
Guide Window........................................................ 1-16 NIBP TABLE Window............................................. 6-15 10
HL7......................................................................... 1-17 RECALL Window.................................................... 6-18
Alarm History Window............................................ 6-23 11
2 Preparation OCRG Window....................................................... 6-26
Full Disclosure Window.......................................... 6-30
Preparation Flowchart.............................................. 2-2
12
Installation Conditions.............................................. 2-3
Installing the Battery Pack........................................ 2-5 7 Interbed Window 13
Preparing the Optional Recorder............................ 2-10 Registering Interbed Beds........................................ 7-3
Power..................................................................... 2-15 Displaying the Numeric Data of All Interbed Beds.... 7-4 14
Displaying the Interbed Bed Data............................. 7-5

3 Necessary Settings before


Monitoring
Interbed Alarm.......................................................... 7-6 15

Changing Date and Time.......................................... 3-2 8 Recording 16


Changing Sound Volume Settings............................ 3-3 Overview of Recording............................................. 8-2
17
Changing the Screen Brightness.............................. 3-5 Changing the Recording Speed............................... 8-9
Changing Waveform Sweep Speed......................... 3-6 Changing the Recording Pattern............................ 8-10
Admitting.................................................................. 3-8 Manually Recording Waveforms............................. 8-11
Discharging............................................................ 3-14 Setting Periodic Recording..................................... 8-12
Recording on NIBP Measurement.......................... 8-14

4 Home Screen
Safety Precautions for Monitoring............................ 4-3 9 ECG Monitoring
Overview.................................................................. 4-4 General..................................................................... 9-3
Home Screen........................................................... 4-5 Preparing for ECG Monitoring.................................. 9-4
Freezing Waveforms................................................ 4-9 Monitoring ECG........................................................ 9-9
Using Sleep Mode.................................................. 4-10 Monitoring Arrhythmia............................................ 9-13
Displaying the LARGE NUMERICS Screen........... 4-12 Changing ECG Settings......................................... 9-20

Uer’s Guide SVM-7500 Series Contents  1


Use with an Electrosurgical Unit............................. 9-34
ECG 7-lead Display................................................ 9-36 16 Drug
General................................................................... 16-2

10 Respiration Monitoring Preparation............................................................. 16-3


Displaying the DRUG Window............................... 16-6
General................................................................... 10-2
Selecting the Drug.................................................. 16-8
Preparing for Respiration Monitoring in
Assigning a Drug Name and Dosage Unit to
Impedance Method............................................... 10-3
DRUG A to D........................................................ 16-9
Monitoring Respiration........................................... 10-5
Changing the Settings.......................................... 16-11
Changing Respiration Settings............................... 10-6

11 CO2 Monitoring 17 Reference


Clock Accuracy....................................................... 17-2
General................................................................... 11-2
Periodic Replacement Schedule............................ 17-3
Preparing for CO2 Monitoring................................. 11-5
Repair Parts Availability Policy............................... 17-3
Monitoring CO2.................................................... 11-14
Changing CO2 Settings......................................... 11-16
Inspection of Measuring Accuracy........................ 11-21

12 SpO 2 Monitoring
General................................................................... 12-2
Preparing for SpO2 Monitoring................................ 12-5
Monitoring SpO2.................................................... 12-7
Changing SpO2 Settings......................................... 12-8

13 NIBP Monitoring
General................................................................... 13-2
Preparing for NIBP Measurement.......................... 13-3
Measuring and Monitoring NIBP............................. 13-8
Changing NIBP Settings....................................... 13-19
Using Venous Puncture Mode.............................. 13-22

14 IBP Monitoring
General................................................................... 14-2
Preparing for Blood Pressure Monitoring............... 14-2
Monitoring IBP........................................................ 14-8
Changing IBP Settings........................................... 14-9

15 Temperature Monitoring
General................................................................... 15-2
Preparing for Temperature Monitoring.................... 15-3
Monitoring Temperature.......................................... 15-6
Changing Temperature Settings............................. 15-7

2  Contents Uer’s Guide SVM-7500 Series


GENERAL HANDLING PRECAUTIONS
This device is intended for use only by qualified medical personnel.
Use only Shanghai Kohden approved products with this device. Use of non-approved products
or in a non-approved manner may affect the performance specifications of the device. This
includes, but is not limited to, batteries, recording paper, pens, extension cables, electrode
leads, input boxes and AC power.

Please read these precautions thoroughly before attempting to operate the instrument.

1. To safely and effectively use the instrument, its operation must be fully understood.

2. When installing or storing the instrument, take the following precautions:


(1) Avoid moisture or contact with water, extreme atmospheric pressure, excessive humidity and temperatures, poorly
ventilated areas, and dust, saline or sulphuric air.
(2) Place the instrument on an even, level floor. Avoid vibration and mechanical shock, even during transport.
(3) Avoid placing in an area where chemicals are stored or where there is danger of gas leakage.
(4) The power line source to be applied to the instrument must correspond in frequency and voltage to product
specifications, and have sufficient current capacity.
(5) Choose a room where a proper grounding facility is available.

3. Before Operation
(1) Check that the instrument is in perfect operating order.
(2) Check that the instrument is grounded properly.
(3) Check that all cords are connected properly.
(4) Pay extra attention when the instrument is combined with other instruments to avoid misdiagnosis or other
problems.
(5) All circuitry used for direct patient connection must be doubly checked.
(6) Check that battery level is acceptable and battery condition is good when using battery-operated models.

4. During Operation
(1) Both the instrument and the patient must receive continual, careful attention.
(2) Turn power off or remove electrodes and/or transducers when necessary to assure the patient's safety.
(3) Avoid direct contact between the instrument housing and the patient.
(4) The operator must not touch patients and the input/output interface of the equipment simultaneously, this may
cause electric shock.

5. To Shutdown After Use


(1) Turn power off with all controls returned to their original positions.
(2) Remove the cords gently; do not use force to remove them.
(3) The mains plug or appliance coupler is intended to be used as an isolation device from the supply mains. Always
make sure that the mains plug or appliance coupler is easy to operate.
(4) Clean the instrument together with all accessories for their next use.

6. The instrument must receive expert, professional attention for maintenance and repairs. When the instrument is
not functioning properly, it should be clearly marked to avoid operation while it is out of order.

7. The instrument must not be altered or modified in any way.

User's Guide SVM-7500 Series I


8. Maintenance and Inspection
(1) The instrument and parts must undergo regular maintenance inspection at least every 6 months.
(2) I f stored for extended periods without being used, make sure prior to operation that the instrument is in perfect
operating condition.
(3) Technical information such as parts list, descriptions, calibration instructions or other information is available for
qualified user technical personnel upon request from your Nihon Kohden representative.

9. When the instrument is used with an electrosurgical instrument, pay careful attention to the application and/or
location of electrodes and/or transducers to avoid possible burn to the patient.

10. When the instrument is used with a defibrillator, make sure that the instrument is protected against defibrillator
discharge. If not, remove patient cables and/or transducers from the instrument to avoid possible damage.

11. Contraindications: None.

12. The electrodes cannot be applied directly on the heart.

WARRANTY POLICY
Shanghai Kohden Corparation (SKC) shall warrant its products against all defects in materials and workmanship for one
year from the date of delivery. However, consumable materials such as recording paper, ink, stylus and battery are excluded
from the warranty.

SKC or its authorized agents will repair or replace any products which prove to be defective during the warranty period,
provided these products are used as prescribed by the operating instructions given in the operator's and service manuals.

No other party is authorized to make any warranty or assume liability for SKC's products. SKC will not recognize any other
warranty, either implied or in writing. In addition, service, technical modification or any other product change performed by
someone other than SKC or its authorized agents without prior consent of SKC may be cause for voiding this warranty.

Defective products or parts must be returned to SKC or its authorized agents, along with an explanation of the failure.
Shipping costs must be pre-paid.

This warranty does not apply to products that have been modified, disassembled, reinstalled or repaired without Shanghai
Kohden approval or which have been subjected to neglect or accident, damage due to accident, fire, lightning, vandalism,
water or other casualty, improper installation or application, or on which the original identification marks have been
removed.

II User's Guide SVM-7500 Series


EMC RELATED CAUTION
This equipment and/or system complies with IEC 60601-1-2 International Standard for electromagnetic
compatibility for medical electrical equipment and/or system. However, an electromagnetic environment
that exceeds the limits or levels stipulated in IEC 60601-1-2, can cause harmful interference to the
equipment and/or system or cause the equipment and/or system to fail to perform its intended function
or degrade its intended performance. Therefore, during the operation of the equipment and/or system, if
there is any undesired deviation from its intended operational performance, you must avoid, identify and
resolve the adverse electromagnetic effect before continuing to use the equipment and/or system.

The following describes some common interference sources and remedial actions:

1. Strong electromagnetic interference from a nearby emitter source such as an authorized radio station
or cellular phone:

Install the equipment and/or system at another location. Keep the emitter source such as cellular
phone away from the equipment and/or system, or turn off the cellular phone.

2. Radio-frequency interference from other equipment through the AC power supply of the equipment
and/or system:

Identify the cause of this interference and if possible remove this interference source. If this is not
possible, use a different power supply.

3. Effect of direct or indirect electrostatic discharge:

Make sure all users and patients in contact with the equipment and/or system are free from direct or
indirect electrostatic energy before using it. A humid room can help lessen this problem.

4. Electromagnetic interference with any radio wave receiver such as radio or television:

If the equipment and/or system interferes with any radio wave receiver, locate the equipment and/or
system as far as possible from the radio wave receiver.

5. Interference of lightning:

When lightning occurs near the location where the equipment and/or system is installed, it may induce
an excessive voltage in the equipment and/or system. In such a case, disconnect the AC power cord
from the equipment and/or system and operate the equipment and/or system by battery power, or use
an uninterruptible power supply.

6. Use with other equipment:

When the equipment and/or system is adjacent to or stacked with other equipment, the equipment
and/or system may affect the other equipment. Before use, check that the equipment and/or system
operates normally with the other equipment.

7. Use of unspecified accessory, transducer and/or cable:

When an unspecified accessory, transducer and/or cable is connected to this equipment and/or
system, it may cause increased electromagnetic emission or decreased electromagnetic immunity.
The specified configuration of this equipment and/or system complies with the electromagnetic
requirements with the specified configuration. Only use this equipment and/or system with the
specified configuration.

User's Guide SVM-7500 Series III


Caution - continued

8. Use of unspecified configuration:

When the equipment and/or system is used with the unspecified system configuration different than
the configuration of EMC testing, it may cause increased electromagnetic emission or decreased
electromagnetic immunity. Only use this equipment and/or system with the specified configuration.

9. Measurement with excessive sensitivity:

The equipment and/or system is designed to measure bioelectrical signals with a specified sensitivity. If
the equipment and/or system is used with excessive sensitivity, artifact may appear by electromagnetic
interference and this may cause mis-diagnosis. When unexpected artifact appears, inspect the
surrounding electromagnetic conditions and remove this artifact source.

If the above suggested remedial actions do not solve the problem, consult your Nihon Kohden
representative for additional suggestions.

For EMC compliance, refer to "Specification - Electromagnetic Compatibility" in the Reference section.

NOTE about Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE) Directive 2002/96/EC
For the member states of the European Union only:
The purpose of WEEE directive 2002/96/EC is, as a first priority, the prevention of waste electrical and
electronic equipment (WEEE), and in addition, the reuse, recycling and other forms of recovery of such
wastes so as to reduce the disposal of waste.
Contact your Nihon Kohden representative for disposal.

In IEC 60601-1-2 Medical Electronic Equipment, Part 1: General Requirements of Safety, 2. Collateral
Standard: Electromagnetic compatibility-Requirements and test. Section 6.2.3 Radiated radio-frequency
electromagnetic fields, PATIENT COUPLED EQUIPMENT and/or SYSTEMS applicable IMMUNITY test
methods are under consideration at SC62A/WG13. The 3 V/m IMMUNITY level may be inappropriate
especially when measuring SpO2 because physiological signals can be much smaller than those induced
by a 3 V/m electromagnetic field.
When measuring SpO2, various interference may produce false waveforms which look like pulse
waveforms. SpO2 value and pulse rate may be measured from these waveforms, causing the alarm to
function improperly.
When installing the monitor, avoid locations where the monitor may receive strong electromagnetic
interference such as radio or TV stations, cellular phone or mobile two-way radios.

WARNING
Interaction between Minute Ventilation Rate-Adaptive Pacemakers and Cardiac Monitoring and Diagnostic
Equipment*
The bioelectric impedance measurement sensor of a minute ventilation rate-adaptive implantable pacemaker
may be affected by cardiac monitoring and diagnostic equipment which is connected to the same patient. If
this occurs, the pacemaker may pace at its maximum rate and give incorrect data to the monitor or
diagnostic equipment. If this occurs, disconnect the monitor or diagnostic equipment from the patient or
change the setting on the pacemaker by referring to the pacemaker’s manual. For more details, contact your
pacemaker representative or Nihon Kohden representative.

IV User's Guide SVM-7500 Series


*Minute ventilation is sensed in rate-adaptive pacemakers by a technology known as bioelectric impedance measurement
(BIM). Many medical devices in addition to pacemakers use this technology. When one of these devices is used on a patient
with an active, minute ventilation rate-adaptive pacemaker, the pacemaker may erroneously interpret the mixture of BIM
signals created in the patient, resulting in an elevated pacing rate.

Conventions Used in this Manual and Instrument


Warnings, Cautions and Notes

WARNING: A warning alerts the user to possible injury or death associated with the use or misuse of the instrument.

CAUTION: A caution alerts the user to possible injury or problems with the instrument associated with its use or misuse
such as instrument malfunction, instrument failure, damage to the instrument, or damage to other property.

Note: A note provides specific information, in the form of recommendations, prerequirements, alternative methods
or supplemental information.

Text Conventions in this Manual

• Names of keys on the monitor are enclosed in square brackets: [MENU]


• Messages that are displayed on the screen are enclosed in quotation marks: “CHECK ELECTRODES”
• Names of items that are displayed on the screen are enclosed in angle brackets: <SENSITIVITY>

User's Guide SVM-7500 Series V


Explanations of Symbols
On panel or inside casing

Symbol Description Symbol Description

“On” only for a part of instrument Alternating current

“Off” only for a part of instrument Battery charge

Manufacturer Date of manufacture

Network socket Attention, consult operator’s manual

Defibrillation-proof type CF applied part The CE mark is a protected conformity mark of


the European Community. The four digits after
USB memory the CE mark indicate the identification number
of the Notified Body involved in assessing the
Equipotential terminal product's conformity as a medical device.

Serial number Products marked with this symbol comply with


the European WEEE directive 2012/19/EU and
Follow instructions for use require separate waste collection. For Shanghai
background color:
blue
Kohden products marked with this symbol,
contact your Nihon Kohden representative for
Protected against vertically dripping water disposal.

On screen

Symbol Description Symbol Description

Alarm silence (Audio off) Battery status

Alarm silence with remaining time (Audio


Recorder door open
paused)

Alarm suspended (Alarm paused) USB memory is connecting

All alarms off (Alarm off) USB memory failure

Alarm reset NIBP

Checking data Data failure

Out of paper NIBP interval

Record NIBP start

Menu NIBP stop

Home Adjust setting/Scroll data

Pacing detection off Zoom in/Zoom out

QRS/pulse sync mark @ Touch panel calibration

VI User's Guide SVM-7500 Series


Respiration sync mark Guide menu

WS-752P Recorder Module

Symbol Description Symbol Description

Attention, consult operator’s manual


The CE mark is a protected conformity mark of
the European Community.
Serial number

Products marked with this symbol comply with the


Date of manufacture
European WEEE directive 2012/19/EU and require
separate waste collection. For Shanghai Kohden
Environmental protection (10 years) products marked with this symbol, contact your
color: orange Nihon Kohden representative for disposal.

SB-752P Battery Pack

Symbol Description Symbol Description

Recycle mark Environmental protection

Manufacturer Attention, consult operator’s manual

The CE mark is a protected conformity mark of the Products marked with this symbol comply with the
European Community. European WEEE directive 2012/19/EU and require
separate waste collection. For Shanghai Kohden
products marked with this symbol, contact your
Date of manufacture
Nihon Kohden representative for disposal.

Lot number Follow instructions for use


background color:
blue

User's Guide SVM-7500 Series VII


Related Documentation
The SVM-7500 series come with the following manuals in addition to the Operator’s Manual.
Administrator’s Guide
Describes how to install the bedside monitor. It also explains about the password protected settings on the SYSTEM
SETUP window and SYSTEM CONFIGURATION screens which only an administrator can change.
User’s Guide
Gives supplemental information on the operation of the bedside monitor and describes the features and settings of the
monitoring parameters.
Service Manual
Describes information on servicing the bedside monitor. Only qualified service personnel can service the bedside monitor.

Safety Standards
The safety standard of this bedside monitor is classified as follows:

Type of protection against electrical shock: CLASS I EQUIPMENT (AC Powered)


Internally Powered EQUIPMENT (BATTERY Powered)
Degree of protection against electrical shock: Defibrillator-proof type CF applied part
Degree of protection against harmful ingress of water: IPX1 (Protected against vertically dripping water)
Degree of safety of application in the presence of Equipment not suitable for use in the presence of
FLAMMABLE ANAESTHETIC MIXTURE WITH FLAMMABLE ANAESTHETIC MIXTURE WITH AIR, OR
AIR, OR WITH OXYGEN OR NITROUS OXIDE: WITH OXYGEN OR NITROUS OXIDE
Mode of operation: CONTINUOUS OPERATION

Safety Information
This User’s Guide only contains safety information related to operation. Full information is in the SVM-7500 Series
Bedside Monitor Operator’s Manual (code number: 0614-907564*).

VIII User's Guide SVM-7500 Series


1
1

General

Introduction......................................................................1-2

Features..........................................................................1-3

Composition....................................................................1-4

Panel Description............................................................1-5
Front Panel.....................................................................................1-5
Left Side Panel...............................................................................1-6
Right Side Panel.............................................................................1-7
Rear Panel.....................................................................................1-7

Basic Operating Concepts ..............................................1-8


Screen Displays.............................................................................1-8
Home Screen.................................................................................1-8
MENU Window...............................................................................1-9
Other Windows for Monitoring......................................................1-10
Review Windows..........................................................................1-11
ADMIT Window............................................................................1-12
ALARM Setting Window...............................................................1-12
Parameter Setting Window...........................................................1-13
Interbed Window..........................................................................1-13
Setup Windows............................................................................1-13
Using Touch Screen Keys............................................................1-14
Keys on the Bedside Monitor.......................................................1-15
Using MENU Window...................................................................1-15

Guide Window...............................................................1-16

HL7................................................................................1-17
1. GENERAL

Introduction
SVM-7501/7521 hardwired bedside monitors have several connectors for ECG,
impedance method respiration, SpO2, NIBP and temperature monitoring. SVM-
7503/7523 bedside monitors can also monitor CO2 and IBP. Its easy operation
and compact lightweight design let you use this bedside monitor in the OR,
recovery room, general ward, ICU, CCU, HCU, NICU and ER. For portability, it
can operate on battery power as well as AC power.
NOTE: Only use Shanghai Kohden parts and accessories to assure
maximum performance from your instrument.

1-2 User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series


1. GENERAL

1
Features

1 Hardwired system
With the dedicated sockets on the monitor, ECG, impedance method
respiration, SpO2, NIBP and temperature can be monitored. On SVM-
7503/7523, CO2 and IBP can also be monitored.

2 AC or battery operation
The monitor can operate on AC power or battery.

3 Color data display


Detailed information is displayed on the wide angle, 10.4-inch and 12.1-inch
TFT color displays. The monitor shows up to 6 waveforms on the screen.
Monitoring parameters are automatically recognized.

4 Easy operation by touch screen keys


The monitor can be operated using the touch keys on the screen.

5 Highly reliable ECG monitoring


Arrhythmia can be analyzed and ST level can be measured. The dominant
QRS can be changed any time for template-matching analysis of arrhythmia.

6 Review windows for viewing saved data


Saved data can be displayed on the trend window, recall window and full
disclosure window. The alarm history window is also available for saving
numeric data at an alarm occurrence.

7 Function keys
There are three function keys at the upper left corner of the screen. A
function can be assigned to each key, for example, freezing waveforms or
displaying the MENU window.

8 Thermal array recorder with 50 mm width paper (option)


Waveforms, numeric data, trendgraphs, and vital signs tables can be recorded
manually or automatically on the optional WS-752P recorder module. Up to
three channels can be recorded.

User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series 1-3


1. GENERAL

Composition

SVM-7500 Series Bedside Monitor

PVM-2701/PVM-2703 Bedside
PVM-2701/PVM-2703 Monitor
Bedside Monitor

Battery Pack
Battery Pack Recorder
Recorder Module Module Interface
Interface

SB-201P SB-201P
WS-201PWS-201P QI-201PQI-201P

InterfaceInterface Transmitter
Transmitter Other Other

ZS-900PG/PK
ZS-900PG/PK DI-270PDI-270P
Adapter Adapter
KC-600PKC-
Ca
QI-202P QI-202P

DH-270P Adapter
DH-270P Adapter KC-013PKC
C

1-4 User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series


1. GENERAL

1
Panel Description

Front Panel
1 Touch screen 2 Alarm indicator

3 Power key 4 Power lamp

5 AC power lamp 6 Battery lamp

1 Touch screen
Display monitoring data. Touching a key or data on the screen changes the
displayed screen and setting.
2 Alarm indicator
Red or yellow lamp blinks, or yellow lamp lights according to the alarm
settings. Green lamp blinks in synchronization with the patient’s QRS or
pulse.
3 Power key
Press to turn the monitor power on. When turning the monitor power off, press
and hold for more than one second.
4 Power lamp
Lights when the monitor power is turned on.
5 AC power lamp
Lights when the power cord is connected between the AC SOURCE socket
and AC outlet.
6 Battery lamp
Indicate the status of the battery pack.

User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series 1-5


1. GENERAL

Left Side Panel


2 ECG/RESP socket

1 Handle

3 TEMP sockets

4 CO2 socket* 6 PRESS sockets*

5 NIBP socket
7 SpO2 socket*

1 Handle
For carrying the monitor.
2 ECG/RESP socket
Connects to the ECG PATIENT CABLE.
3 TEMP sockets
Connects to the temperature probe cables.
4 CO2 socket*
For SVM-7503 and SVM-7523. Connects to the CO2 connection cord.
5 NIBP socket
Connects to the air hose.
6 PRESS sockets*
For SVM-7503 and SVM-7523. Connects to the IBP connection cord.
7 SpO2 socket*
Connects to the SpO2 connection cord.
* NOTE: When inserting the CO2, PRESS or SpO2 connector, make
sure the color of the connector sleeve is the same color as the
socket.

1-6 User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series


1. GENERAL

Right Side Panel 1

1 Recorder module holder

1 Recorder module holder


For mounting a recorder module.

Rear Panel

5 Battery
1 Network socket pack
holder

4 AC power source socket


3 Equipotential grounding terminal

2 USB socket

1 Network socket
Connects to monitor network system by a network cable.
2 USB socket
For USB memory.
3 Equipotential grounding terminal
For an equipotential grounding lead.
4 AC POWER SOURCE socket
For the AC power cord.
5 Battery pack holder
For installing a battery pack.

User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series 1-7


1. GENERAL

Basic Operating Concepts

Screen Displays
The followings are the screens and windows available on the bedside monitor.
For details about the individual screens and windows, see the appropriate section.
The shadow of the previous screen may remain for a few minutes after changing
the screen.
Normally, the home screen is displayed. All screens, except for the LARGE
NUMERICS screen and SYSTEM CONFIGURATION screen, return to the
home screen when there is no key operation for about 3 minutes.

Home Screen

1 The home screen can be displayed anytime by touching the [HOME] key on
the screen.

2 Display waveforms and data of the monitoring parameters.

3 Touch the patient name to display the ADMIT window for entering patient
name.

4 Touch the parameter data to display the parameter setting window.

1-8 User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series


1. GENERAL

MENU Window 1

The MENU window can be displayed anytime by touching the [MENU] key on
the screen. From the MENU window, you can display any window except the
home screen.

User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series 1-9


1. GENERAL

Other Windows for Monitoring


LARGE NUMERICS window displays large numeric data.

SLEEP window is for turning sleep mode on. The SLEEP window is only
available when the bedside monitor is connected to the central monitor network.

Guide window displays the guide menu.

ECG 7-lead window displays the 7-lead screen.

DRUG window lets you calcaulate drugs.

1-10 User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series


1. GENERAL

Review Windows 1

TREND TABLE window displays parameter data.

NIBP TABLE window displays vital signs data with NIBP measurements.

TREND GRAPH window displays 120 h trendgraphs of up to 2 selected


parameters.

RECALL window displays arrhythmia recall data.

FULL DISC window displays full disclosure waves.

User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series 1-11


1. GENERAL

ALARM HISTORY window displays vital sign data at past alarm occurrences.

OCRG window displays OCRG trendgraph. Only available when the patient type
is NEONATE.

ADMIT Window
ADMIT window is for entering a patient’s information.

ALARM Setting Window


ALARM LIMITS window is for setting vital signs alarm and ARRHYTH
ALARMS window for confirming arrhythmia alarm settings.

1-12 User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series


1. GENERAL

Parameter Setting Window 1

For changing parameter monitoring settings. Example is ECG window.

Interbed Window
Displays interbed beds when the monitor is connected to a network.

Setup Windows
1 DATE window
DATE window is for changing date and time.

2 DISPLAY/SOUND window
DISPLAY/SOUND window is for changing alarm and sync sound volume,
waveform sweep speed, and respiration waveform sweep speed.

3 RECORD window
RECORD window is for setting recording parameters.

4 SYSTEM window
SYSTEM window is for checking assigned functions.

User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series 1-13


1. GENERAL

Using Touch Screen Keys


Any window can be displayed and settings can be changed by touching the keys
and items on the screen with your finger. Touching the key on the screen displays
the window.

Tabs for changing


displaying window

Selected items Setting bar


are highlighted Touch or drag the sliders
to the desired level on
the setting bar.
Upper limit slider
Lower limit slider

Scroll key

Scroll bar

Scroll key

Cursor

1-14 User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series


1. GENERAL

Keys on the Bedside Monitor 1

Turn the monitor power on or off.

Using MENU Window


The MENU window can be displayed anytime by touching the [MENU] key on
the screen. From the MENU window, you can display any window except for the
home screen and SYSTEM CONFIGURATION screen.
For details on each window, refer to the section specified below.

Section 10, 11 Section 12


Section 9

Section 6*1 Section 13

Section 14*2
Section 15
Section 5
Section 4
Section 3 Section 4
Section 9
Section 7

Administrator's
Section 5 Guide Section 1

Section 8 Section 16

*1 OCRG key is available when the patient type is NEONATE.


*2 PRESS key is only available for SVM-7503 and SVM-7523.

User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series 1-15


1. GENERAL

Guide Window
The guide window explains how to attach electrodes or cuff with illustration. The
window also shows the countermeasure for the technical alarms.
When a technical alarm occurs during monitoring, the [GUIDE] key appears at
the top of the screen. Touch the [GUIDE] key to display the guide window for
that alarm.
Guide key

The guide menu shows the possible problem and solutions.


CO2 and PRESS
are for SVM-7503
and SVM-7523.

Touch this key


to see more
information.

You can open the Guide window by touching the [GUIDE] key on the MENU
window.

GUIDE key

Abbreviations
The ITEMS tab in the Guide window shows abbreviations for parameters,
arrhythmias and icons.

1-16 User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series


1. GENERAL

1
HL7
You can set LS-NET or HL7 on SYSTEM CONFIG window.
Setting Item Setting Range (Default) Description
Use ORU ON, OFF Selects whether or not to output the ORU (current numeric) data.

Sets the port number to use for ORU data output. Touch [ ]
ORU Port No. 1024 to 65535 of the port number and enter the number.
ORU (ORU/ACK-R01) (Default: 7998) After entering the port number, touch [OK] to close the
window.
1 min, 5 min, 10 min, 30 Sets the interval to output the ORU data. Touch [ORU
ORU SAMPLING
min, 60 min SAMPLING] and select the time.
Use ORF ON, OFF Selects whether or not to output the ORF (old numeric) data.

Sets the port number to use for ORF data output. Touch [ ]
ORF ORF Port No. 1024 to 65535 of the port number and enter the number.
(QRY^R02/
ORF^R04) (Default: 9004) After entering the port number, touch [OK] to close the
window.
Use QRY ON, OFF Selects whether or not to request patient information.

Sets the IP address of the HIS server. Touch [ ] of the each


Set depending on the number and enter the IP address.
HIS SERVER IP hospital network.
ADDRESS After entering the IP number, touch [OK] to close the
(Default: 0.0.0.0)
window.
QRY
Sets the port number that is used by HIS server for receiving
HIS SERVER patient information. Touch [ ] of the port number and enter
1024 to 65535 the number.
PORT No. (QRY/
ADR-A19) (Default: 7997)
After entering the port number, touch [OK] to close the
window.
Use ADT ON, OFF
ADT PATIENT Selects whether or not to output the admit and discharge, patient
1024 to 65535 information update and presence check information.
INFO PORT No.
(ADT-A04/A02) (Default: 9005)
• Admit/Discharge Port
ADT Sets the port number for admitting or discharging a
MONITORING 1024 to 65535 patient from an external system.
PORT No. (Default: 9006)
• Patient Info Update Port
(ADT^A08)
ADT Sets the port number for entering the patient information
including patient ID from an external system.
• Patient List QRY Port
PATIENT LIST 1024 to 65535 Sets the port number for requesting the admit condition
PORT No. of a patient from an external system.
(QRY^R02) (Default: 9007)
After entering the port number, touch [OK] to close the
window.

User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series 1-17


1. GENERAL

Setting Item Setting Range (Default) Description


HL7 Version 2.4 (Display only) Displays the HL7 version.
Sets the character code type. Touch the character code key and
Character Set ASCII
select the character code.
Sending Application Up to 180 characters Sets the names in the HL7 message.
(Default: Touch [ ] of the each item and enter the name.
• Send Application Name
After entering the name, touch [OK] to close the window.
MSH NIHON KOHDEN
Segment Sending Facility • Send Facility Name
NIHON KOHDEN
• Receive Application
Name
Receiving
Application CLIENT APP
• Receive Facility Name
Receiving Facility
CLIENT FACILITY)

1-18 User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series


2
2

Preparation

Preparation Flowchart.....................................................2-2

Installation Conditions.....................................................2-3

Installing the Battery Pack...............................................2-5


Battery Handling and Operation.....................................................2-5
Safety Information..................................................................... 2-5
Battery Handling Precautions................................................... 2-6
When Not Using the Monitor or Battery.....................................2-7
Installing the Battery Pack..............................................................2-7

Preparing the Optional Recorder...................................2-10


Install the Recorder Module.........................................................2-10
Loading Recording Paper.............................................................2-13

Power............................................................................2-15
Connecting the Power Cord and Grounding the Monitor.............2-15
Connecting the Power Cord..................................................... 2-15
Grounding the Monitor.............................................................2-16
Turning the Power On..................................................................2-16
Check Before Turning On the Power.......................................2-16
Turning the Power On.............................................................. 2-17
ADMIT MODE Setting.............................................................. 2-18
Check After Turning On the Power and During Monitoring...... 2-19
Power and Battery Status Indications..........................................2-20
When the “BATTERY WEAK” Message Appears....................2-20
Charging the Battery................................................................2-21
Charging...................................................................................2-21
Monitor Status on Power Interruption...........................................2-22
Turning the Power Off..................................................................2-22
Check When Turning the Power Off........................................2-22
2. PREPARATION

Preparation Flowchart
You may not need to do all of these.

1 Install the monitor.


Refer to the Administrator’s Guide.

2 Prepare the battery and recorder.


Refer to Section 2 in this manual.

3 Check or change any initial settings on the SYSTEM


CONFIGURATION screen.
Changing these settings during monitoring interrupts monitoring. Refer to
the Administrator’s Guide, Section 2.

4 Check or change any initial settings on the SYSTEM SETUP


window.
These settings are the password protected settings which only an
administrator can change. Refer to the Administrator’s Guide, Section 3.

5 Check or change the necessary settings before monitoring in


Section 3 in this manual.
• Date and time
• Sound volume
• Screen brightness
• Waveform sweep speed

6 Enter the name of the new patient.


Refer to “Entering Patient’s Information” in Section 3 in this manual.

7 Check or change all alarm items for the patient.


When <ADMIT MODE> is set to AUTO, the alarm settings return to the
default settings 30 minutes after the monitor is turned off. Refer to Section 5
in this manual.

8 Check or change settings for the review windows, such as


trendgraph, trend table and recall files.
Refer to Section 6 in this manual.

9 Check or change recording settings.


Refer to Section 8 in this manual.

10 Prepare electrodes, probes, etc. for monitoring individual


parameters and check or change the settings for each
parameter.
Refer to Sections 9 to 15 in this manual.

2-2 User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series


2. PREPARATIONl

Installation Conditions
2
Put the monitor on a stable and flat stand where the screen is easy to see and does
not reflect light. Follow the cautions below.
The monitor must be installed by qualified personnel. Details are in the
Administrator’s Guide.

WARNING
Never use the monitor in the presence of any flammable anesthetic
gas or high concentration oxygen atmosphere. Failure to follow this
warning may cause explosion or fire.

WARNING
Connect only the specified instrument to the monitor and follow the
specified procedure. Failure to follow this warning may result in
electrical shock or injury to the patient and operator, and cause fire
or instrument malfunction.

CAUTION
The display screen is made of glass. Strong impact may damage it.

CAUTION
Avoid a location where the monitor is sprinkled with liquids. Avoid
direct sprinkling, spray or moist air from a nebulizer or a humidifier.

CAUTION
Avoid collision when moving the monitor. Strong impact may damage
the monitor.

CAUTION
Avoid locations where the monitor may receive strong
electromagnetic interference such as radio or TV stations, cellular
phones or mobile two-way radios.

CAUTION
If fluids are accidentally spilled on the monitor, take the monitor out
of service and check for damage.

CAUTION
Avoid exposing the monitor to direct sunlight.

CAUTION
Do not place the monitor in a dusty area.

User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series 2-3


2. PREPARATION

CAUTION
Do not place blankets or cloth over the monitor. It may affect
monitoring.

CAUTION
Do not use the monitor in an ambulance. The monitor may not
function properly in a moving vehicle.

CAUTION
Do not place the monitor in an MRI examination room. The monitor
may not function properly, or noise from the monitor may interfere
with the MRI.

CAUTION
Connect the power cord to an AC outlet which can supply enough
AC current to the monitor. The monitor cannot function properly with
low current.

CAUTION
Do not use an electrical blanket. It may affect monitoring.

CAUTION
Avoid placing the monitor near a heater or humidifier.

CAUTION
When there is any problem on the monitor, turn off the power
immediately and disconnect the power cord from the AC outlet. Take
the monitor out of service and check for damage.

CAUTION
Make sure that there is more than 5 cm of space between the
monitor and the wall for adequate ventilation. When the monitor is
surrounded, make sure that there is about 10 cm of space above the
monitor for ventilation so that the operating temperature does not
exceed 40 °C (104 °F).

10 cm

↕ 5 cm Rear

↔ ↔
5 cm 5 cm 5 cm 5 cm
↔ ↔
Side

2-4 User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series


2. PREPARATIONl

Installing the Battery Pack


2

Battery Handling and Operation

Safety Information

WARNING
If the battery pack is damaged and the substance inside the battery
contacts the eyes, skin or clothes, wash immediately and thoroughly
with water and see a physician. Never rub your eyes, because you
may lose your eyesight.

WARNING
• Do not immerse the battery pack in water. The battery may heat
up and rust and the substance inside the battery may leak.
• Do not leave the battery unused for more than about two years.
The battery may leak.

WARNING
Do not do the following to the battery pack. It may cause leakage,
overheating, explosion and fire.
• Short-circuit the + and - terminals on the battery.
• Put the battery pack into fire or heat the battery.
• Disassemble or alter the battery.
• Give strong impact to or deform the battery.
• Use the battery on unspecified instruments.
• Charge the battery on unspecified instruments.
• Install the battery with the wrong polarity.
• Leave the battery in the reach of patients.
• Connect the wire or cable in a wrong way.

WARNING
Do not use a deformed battery. It may cause overheating, rupture or
fire.

CAUTION
Do not leave the battery pack near the patient or in reach of children.

CAUTION
Use the battery pack between 10°C (50°F) and 40°C (104°F).
Temperatures out of this range affect the working of the battery.

User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series 2-5


2. PREPARATION

CAUTION
Do not expose the battery pack to direct sunlight or leave in a high
temperature place. The lifetime of the battery pack may be
shortened, the performance of the battery pack may be degraded
and the battery may leak.

CAUTION
Do not subject the battery pack to a strong mechanical impact.

CAUTION
Before disposing of the battery, check with your local solid waste
officials for details in your area for recycling options or proper
disposal. The battery is recyclable. At the end of its useful life, under
various state and local laws, it may be illegal to dispose of this
battery into the municipal waste stream.

CAUTION
Do not use a battery which is past the expiration date written on the
label.

CAUTION
Do not use a battery pack with a damaged cover because this may
cause electric hazard and malfunction.

CAUTION
Be careful when handling the fully charged battery pack. The battery
pack heats up to about 60ºC (140°F). The operator may be surprised
and drop the battery pack, causing injury to the operator.

Battery Handling Precautions


• Always place a battery pack in the monitor. This charges it so that you will
always have a fully charged battery ready.
• Fully recharge the battery pack before using it for the first time or after storing
it for over a month. When the battery pack is not used, it self-discharges.
• Replace the battery pack with a new one every year. This is because the battery
is a chemical product which gradually deteriorates whether or not it is used.
• Remove the battery before the device is discarded.
• Store the battery pack under the following conditions.
Temperature: Less than 1 month with 80 % recoverable capacity: –20 ºC to +45 ºC
(–4 ºF to +113 ºF)
Less than 6 months with 80 % recoverable capacity: –20 ºC to +40 ºC
(–4 ºF to +104 ºF)
Less than 1 year with 80 % recoverable capacity: –20 ºC to +35 ºC
(–4 ºF to +95 ºF)
Humidity: 10 % to 95 % RH (noncondensing)

2-6 User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series


2. PREPARATIONl

When Not Using the Monitor or Battery


• When the monitor will not be used for a long time, remove the battery. If a
charged or discharged battery is left inside the monitor with the power cord 2
unplugged, the battery self-discharges and deteriorates.
• When a battery is not used, fully charge it before storage. When a battery is not
used for over one month, fully charge it.

Installing the Battery Pack


Insert the battery pack into the battery pack holder.

Battery pack holder

NOTE: Only use the SB-752P battery pack.

1 Remove the screw on the battery cover with a screwdriver.

2 Remove the battery cover by holding the tape which sticks to the cover.

User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series 2-7


2. PREPARATION

3 Pull out the battery connector in the monitor.

CAUTION
Do not pull out the battery connector forcibly. Otherwise, the battery
connector may break and the battery pack cannot be used.

4 Insert the battery connection cable into the connector until it is locked. Insert
the battery pack into the battery pack holder by following the instructions as
shown in the picture.

CAUTION
The battery connection cable must be on the right side. Do not insert
the battery pack in the wrong direction.

2-8 User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series


2. PREPARATIONl

5 Push the battery pack into the holder by pressing the sponge pad until the
battery pack is inserted into the bottom of the holder.
2

6 Tear off the tape and close the battery cover with a screwdriver.

User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series 2-9


2. PREPARATION

Preparing the Optional Recorder

Install the Recorder Module


When using the WS-752P recorder module, install the recorder as follows.

1 Open the recorder cover with a flat blade screwdriver.

2 Remove the recorder cover.

3 Insert the connection cable of the recorder into the connector inside the
monitor as shown in the picture.

2-10 User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series


2. PREPARATIONl

CAUTION
When connecting the connection cable to a socket, insert it straightly
2
without bending or tilting it and connect it slowly and firmly without
too much force. If you tilt the connector when inserting it, the
connector pin may break and units cannot communicate with each
other.

4 Put the recorder into the recorder magazine as shown in the picture.

5 Make sure the recorder is parallel to the monitor case.

6 Push the recorder into the recorder magazine by pressing the two tabs in the
top of the recorder.

User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series 2-11


2. PREPARATION

NOTE: Press the two tabs slightly downward, then push the recorder into
the recorder magazine.

7 Slightly lift up the tabs at the bottom of the recorder and push it into the
recorder magazine.

8 Push the recorder into the recorder magazine by pressing the lower part.
When a click sound is heard, the installation is complete.

NOTE: If the recorder is not parallel to the monitor case, the recorder
may get stuck in the recorder magazine. If it gets stuck, press
the release lever of recorder with a strong force as shown in the
picture to take out the recorder, and then reinstall it.

2-12 User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series


2. PREPARATIONl

Loading Recording Paper


2
CAUTION for Handling the Recording Paper
• Do not allow paper to contact pastes, adhesive agents, oil-based
felt pen tips or diazo process (ditto/spirit) copying paper. These
discolor the paper surface.
• Do not allow paper to contact any materials made of vinyl chloride,
plastic eraser, adhesive tape, fluorescent felt tip pen, or cinnabar
seal ink because these discolor the recorded waveforms and data.
• Do not apply strong pressure to the paper. Rubbing or scratching
discolors the paper surface.
• Do not allow paper to contact saline solution. The paper discolors
and if the saline solution gets on the thermal head, there will be
dots missing from the recorded data.
• Avoid high humidity, high temperature, direct sunlight and direct
fluorescent light when storing recording paper. Otherwise the
paper may discolor. Store the recording paper in a dry, cool place.
• When using glue on the recording paper, use glue which consists
of starch, polyvinyl alcohol, gum arabic, or carboxymethyl.

CAUTION for Loading the Recording Paper


• Correctly load the recording paper as specified. Otherwise,
recording may not be performed properly.
• Do not touch the recording head with any hard material. When the
head is tapped with hard material, the head may crack and the
heater element wire may short-circuit.
• Clean the head surface with the provided head cleaning pen
before loading new paper. After a period of usage, paper dust may
accumulate between the paper and the head surface, and good
printing cannot be obtained.

NOTE: Only use the specified recording paper, RQW50-2SK.


The out of paper icon appears at the upper right of the screen and the “INSERT
REC PAPER” message appears on the screen when there is no paper.

CAUTION
Do not touch the thermal head inside the recorder module. The
thermal head may be damaged by static electricity or become dirty
and cause printing failure.

User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series 2-13


2. PREPARATION

1 Move the door release lever in the direction of the arrow ( ) to release the
lock.

2 Open the recorder door and set the recording paper (RQW50-2SK) according
to the picture as shown on the recorder cover.
Set the recording paper as
shown in the picture.

3 Draw out 2 or 3 cm of paper toward you.

4 Close the recorder door by pressing the middle of the door. If the “CLOSE
PAPER MAGAZINE” message and icon are still displayed, the recorder
door is not closed properly.
The middle part. Press
this part to close the
recorder door.

2-14 User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series


2. PREPARATIONl

Power
2
The monitor can operate on either battery or AC power.
When the power cord is plugged into an AC outlet and the power switch on the
front panel is turned on, the monitor operates on AC power.
When a SB-752P battery pack is installed in the monitor and the power cord
is disconnected or there is a sudden power failure, the monitor automatically
switches to battery power.
When there is no battery pack in the monitor and there is a sudden power failure,
the stored data remains in memory for about 30 minutes after the power is shut
down.
The battery is charged when the power cord is plugged into an AC outlet and
the AC current is supplied to the monitor. The battery is also charged during
monitoring.
When the monitor is operated on battery power, the brightness of the screen can
be reduced to save battery power.
The monitor can operate for about 6 hours with a new fully charged battery pack
when:
• Used in normal temperature.
• Optional recorder module is not installed.
• No alarm occurs.
• Only monitoring ECG.
• <POWER SAVING MODE> on the SYSTEM SETUP window is set to ON.
• NIBP is not measured.

Connecting the Power Cord and Grounding the Monitor

Connecting the Power Cord

WARNING
Only use the provided power cord. Using other power cords may
result in electrical shock or injury to the patient and operator.

Connect the provided power cord to the AC SOURCE socket on the rear panel of
the monitor and plug the cord into a 3-prong AC outlet.
When the AC power is supplied to the monitor, the AC power lamp on the front
panel lights.
NOTE: If the AC power lamp does not light, check the power cord
connection.

User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series 2-15


2. PREPARATION

Grounding the Monitor

WARNING
When several medical instruments are used together, ground all
instruments to the same one-point ground. Any potential difference
between instruments may cause electrical shock to the patient and
operator.

When more than one electrical instrument is used, there may be electrical
potential difference between the instruments. Potential difference between
instruments may cause current to flow to the patient connected to the
instruments, resulting in electrical shock (micro shock). Never use any medical
equipment in patient treatment without proper grounding.
Always perform equipotential grounding when required. It can be used in the
OR, recovery room, general ward, ICU, CCU, HCU, NICU and ER. Consult
with a biomedical engineer to determine if equipotential grounding is required.
When equipotential grounding is required, connect the equipotential ground
terminal on the instrument to the equipotential ground terminal on the wall
(equipotential grounding system) with the equipotential grounding lead (potential
equalization conductor).

Turning the Power On

Check Before Turning On the Power


Check the following items before turning on the power.
• Enough electrodes and electrode leads are ready.
• Cleaned and sterilized sensors are ready.
• Power cord is connected properly.
• Equipotential grounding lead is connected properly when equipotential
grounding is required.
• All cables are connected properly.
• Enough recording paper in the recorder (when using the optional recorder
module).
• Fully charged battery pack is installed in the monitor in case of a sudden power
failure.
• No scratches, damage or dirt on the monitor.
• No damage to the keys and panels.
• No damage to the power cord.
• No damage to the electrode leads, sensors, probes and cables.
• The monitor is not in a wet place.

2-16 User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series


2. PREPARATIONl

Turning the Power On

CAUTION 2
When the monitor is turned on, check that one “bong” sounds and
the red, yellow and green alarm indicator lamps blink once to show
that the alarm functions properly.

NOTE • It takes a few minutes for the LCD screen to reach full
brightness.
• The shadow of the previous screen may remain for a few
minutes after changing screens.
• There may be some dots on the LCD screen which are always
on or always off, but it does not affect monitoring. This is normal
for all LCD screens.
• The patient data and settings are deleted when the monitor
power is off for more than 30 minutes and <SHOW ADMIT
CONFIRMATION WINDOW> is not checked in the SYSTEM
SETUP screen. When <SHOW ADMIT CONFIRMATION
WINDOW> is checked, the message appears asking whether
monitoring a new patient or not.

When <ADMIT MODE> is set to AUTO When <ADMIT MODE> is set to MANUAL

Press the [POWER] key on the front panel to turn the power on. The power lamp
and the AC power lamp light and self check starts. When the check is complete,
the home screen appears.

Power lamp lights


Power lamp lights

If the power lamp does not light, check the power cord connection.
When the monitor power is turned on, alarms are suspended while the monitor is
waiting for the electrodes and probe to be attached to the patient. The monitoring
starts when the connection cord is connected to the socket on the monitor and the
electrodes or probe are attached to the patient. The alarm activates when one of
the following occurs:

User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series 2-17


2. PREPARATION

• ECG or SpO2 is monitored or NIBP is measured and a value is displayed


(when AUTO is selected for <ALARM ACTIVATION DELAY> on the
ALARM window of the SYSTEM SETUP window)
• ECG or SpO2 is continuously monitored for the selected time (when 1 min, 2
min or 3 min is selected for <ALARM ACTIVATION DELAY>)
• NIBP is measured (when 1 min, 2 min or 3 min is selected for <ALARM
ACTIVATION DELAY>)
If the monitor power is turned off and on again within 60 seconds, the
monitoring continues.

ADMIT MODE Setting


When the <ADMIT MODE> on the DISPLAY window of the SYSTEM
SETUP window is set to AUTO and the monitor power is turned on after at
least 30 minutes passed since the power was last turned off, the stored data of
the previous patient (patient information, trend table, NIBP table, arrhythmia
recall, full disclosure, trendgraph and alarm history) in the monitor is deleted.
When <ADMIT MODE> in the SYSTEM SETUP window is set to MANUAL,
a message asks whether you are monitoring a new patient. Even if <ADMIT
MODE> is set to MANUAL, data is deleted if the monitor power is off for more
than 24 hours. The factory default setting of <ADMIT MODE> is AUTO.

When <ADMIT MODE> is set to AUTO When <ADMIT MODE> is set to MANUAL

For setting admit mode, refer to the Administrator’s Guide, Section 3.

2-18 User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series


2. PREPARATIONl

Check After Turning On the Power and During Monitoring


To start monitoring safely and properly, check the following items after turning
on the power. If any problem is detected, take the proper countermeasure 2
according to the troubleshooting and maintenance sections.
• There is no fire, smoke or smell.
• The monitor is not too hot.
• The power lamp and other lamps light.
• The red, yellow and green alarm indicator limps blink once and a “bong”
sounds.
• The startup screen appears and the home screen appears.
• No error message is displayed on the screen.
• The time on the screen is correct.
• The monitor does not affect surrounding equipment.
• The data and waveforms are displayed properly.
• Power key operate properly.
• The touch keys function properly and the key clicking sound is generated.
• Alarm functions properly.
• Alarm sound can be heard and volume setting is appropriate.
• There is no trouble in recording (when using the optional recorder module).
NOTE: After turning the monitor on and when admitting a patient, make
sure that the time at the upper right of the screen is correct. When
the date or time is changed during monitoring, the date and time
of all stored data is also changed and may not match the date
and time on the printout.

User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series 2-19


2. PREPARATION

Power and Battery Status Indications


Battery operation Remaining battery power
Operating on battery Much

Battery is being charged

Less

Power and battery status are indicated by three lamps on the bedside monitor. A
discharged battery is also indicated by battery marks, screen message and alarm.
NOTE: When charging the battery pack with the monitor power turned off,
check that the power lamp and battery lamp light. If the lamps do
not light even when the power cord is connected and the battery
pack is inserted, turn the power key on, check that the battery
lamp is blinking or lit, then turn the power key off.

• Operating on AC power and battery is fully charged or there is no battery


Power lamp: Lit
AC power lamp: Lit
Battery lamp: Lit when battery is fully charged or off when there is no battery

• Operating on AC power and battery is being charged


Power lamp: Lit
AC power lamp: Lit
Battery lamp: Slow blinking (once every 2 seconds)

• Operating on AC power when battery is damaged


Power lamp: Lit
AC power lamp: Lit
Battery lamp: Rapid blinking (4 times per second)
Screen indication: “BATTERY ERROR” message
Alarm indication: Continuous “bing bong” sound and blinking yellow alarm

• Operating on battery power


Power lamp: Lit
AC power lamp: Off
Battery lamp: Off

• Operating on battery power and battery is damaged


Power lamp: Lit
AC power lamp: Off
Battery lamp: Rapid blinking (4 times per second)
Screen indication: “BATTERY ERROR” message
Alarm indication: Continuous “bing bong” sound and blinking yellow alarm

• No monitoring and charging battery


Power lamp: Off
AC power lamp: Lit
Battery lamp: Slow blinking (once every 2 seconds)

When the “BATTERY WEAK” Message Appears


Operate the monitor on AC power and/or replace the battery pack when the
“BATTERY WEAK” message appears.
When the “BATTERY WEAK” message appears, the remaining battery power is
weak. The yellow alarm lamp lights with a continuous “bing bong” sound.
If no AC or battery power is supplied to the monitor, there is no measurement
and patient data such as trend data may be lost.

2-20 User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series


2. PREPARATIONl

Charging the Battery


The battery pack can be charged by the monitor. It takes about 4 hours to charge
one battery pack. Charging time may be longer at high temperatures. 2
NOTE: New battery packs are not charged. Charge a new battery pack
before use.
The monitor can operate for about 6 hours with a new fully charged battery pack
and the monitor satisfies all the following conditions and monitors only ECG
without installing options such as a recorder module.
• Used in normal temperature.
• Optional recorder module is not installed.
• No alarm occurs.
• Only monitoring ECG.
• <POWER SAVING MODE> on the SYSTEM SETUP window is set to ON.
• NIBP is not measured.

CAUTION
When charging the battery pack, keep the ambient temperature at
approximately 20 °C to maintain the optimal battery operation time. If
the battery pack is charged at less than 10 °C (50 °F) or more than
30 °C (86 °F), the maximum battery operation time will be 20 % to
30 % less than the optimal operation time.

Charging
During AC operation, the battery pack is automatically charged without
interrupting monitoring. It takes approximately 4 hours of continuous charging to
fully charge a battery pack.
After continuous charging to full charge, charging stops and the battery voltage
is continuously checked. The monitor controls charging to keep the battery pack
fully charged.
NOTE: Do not disconnect the power cord from the monitor during battery
charging.

User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series 2-21


2. PREPARATION

Monitor Status on Power Interruption


When there is a power failure or sudden power interruption during AC operation,
the monitor operates as follows.
• When a battery pack is installed, the monitor operates for about 6 hours on
battery power.
• When no battery pack is installed or the battery is discharged, the monitor
turns off. The patient data and settings are stored for about 30 minutes after
power off. If the monitor power is turned off and on within 30 seconds,
monitoring continues.
If there is a power failure or sudden power interruption, immediately connect
the monitor to an emergency power source. It is recommended to always keep a
battery in the monitor.

Turning the Power Off

CAUTION
Follow the specified procedure to turn off the bedside monitor.
Otherwise, patient data will be deleted and the storage device and
data in the storage device may be damaged.

Press the [POWER] key on the front panel for more than 1 second to turn the
power off. The screen becomes dark and the power lamp on the front panel turns
off.
NOTE • Press and hold the [POWER] key for more than 1 second to
turn the power off.
• Do not disconnect the power cord while the monitor power is
on. The data may be lost.

Check When Turning the Power Off


Check the following items for the next use.
• Previous patient data is deleted.
• Temporarily changed settings are changed back to the previous settings.
• There is no dirt, damage or scratches on the monitor.
• The sensors, probes, cuffs, and cables are cleaned and sterilized.
• Accessories are cleaned and stored properly.
• There are enough consumables, such as recording paper and disposable
electrodes for the next use.
• The battery pack is fully charged.
• The power key on the monitor is turned off and the power cord is disconnected
from the monitor.
• The monitor is not in a wet place.
• Dead batteries are disposed of properly.
• Medical waste is disposed of properly.
• The monitor is stored properly.

2-22 User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series


3 Necessary Settings
before Monitoring

Changing Date and Time.................................................3-2


3

Changing Sound Volume Settings...................................3-3

Changing the Screen Brightness.....................................3-5

Changing Waveform Sweep Speed................................3-6

Admitting.........................................................................3-8
Displaying the ADMIT Window.......................................................3-8
Closing the ADMIT Window............................................................3-9
Entering the Patient Name.............................................................3-9
Entering the Patient Name by Using the Keyboard................... 3-9
Entering the Patient Name by Using Free Function.................3-10
Entering the Patient ID.................................................................3-11
Changing the Patient Type...........................................................3-12
Enter the HEIGHT/WEIGHT.........................................................3-13
Set the Gender.............................................................................3-13

Discharging...................................................................3-14
Suspended Alarms...................................................................3-15
Save Data.................................................................................3-15
3. NECESSARY SETTINGS BEFORE MONITORING

Changing Date and Time


When the power is on, the current time is displayed in the upper right corner of
the screen.
NOTE: When the date or time is changed during monitoring, the date and
time of all stored data is also changed and may not match the
date and time on the printout.

1 Display the DATE window.


Touch the [MENU] key → [DATE] key.

Or,
Touch the date and time at the upper right corner on the home screen.

2 Touch the [YEAR], [MONTH], [DAY], [HOUR] or [MINUTE] key.

3 Touch the desired number(s) using the numeric keypad.

4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 to enter other items.

5 Touch the [SET] key. The [SET] key must be touched to save the settings,
otherwise the settings change back to the previous settings.
When the set date is incorrect, the “OUT OF RANGE” message appears on
the screen. Enter the correct date.

6 Touch the [HOME] key to return to the home screen.

3-2 User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series


3. NECESSARY SETTINGS BEFORE MONITORING

Changing Sound Volume Settings


On the DISPLAY/SOUND window, you can select sync sound on or off and
adjust the sync sound volume and alarm sound volume.
3
The following settings can be changed on the SYSTEM SETUP window. Refer
to “VOLUME Page” in Section 3 of the Administrator’s Guide.
• NIBP completion sound volume on or off
• NIBP completion sound volume
• Alarm minimum volume
• Key click sound volume
• Interbed alarm volume

1 Display the DISPLAY/SOUND window.


Touch the [MENU] key → [DISPLAY/SOUND] key.

2 Touch the [ALARM VOLUME] or [SYNC SOUND VOLUME] key. The


ALARM VOLUME or SYNC SOUND VOLUME window is displayed.

Slider

ALARM VOLUME window

User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series 3-3


3. NECESSARY SETTINGS BEFORE MONITORING

SYNC SOUND VOLUME window

3 Change settings.
• To change the alarm sound volume, touch the or key to adjust
the setting or drag the slider to the desired level on the setting bar in the
ALARM VOLUME window. You cannot set the volume to 1 which is no
sound.
• Select ON or OFF in the SYNC SOUND VOLUME window to set sync
sound on or off.
• To change the sync sound volume, touch the or key, or drag
the slider to the desired level on the setting bar in the SYNC SOUND
VOLUME window. At the lowest volume setting, the sync sound is not
audible.

4 After changing settings, touch the key to close the window.

5 Touch the [HOME] key to return to the home screen.

3-4 User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series


3. NECESSARY SETTINGS BEFORE MONITORING

Changing the Screen Brightness


When operating on battery power, the brightness is automatically set to
minimum.
3
1 Display the DISPLAY/SOUND window.
Touch the [MENU] key → [DISPLAY/SOUND] key.

2 Touch the [BRIGHTNESS] key. The BRIGHTNESS window is displayed.

Cursor

3 Touch the desired place on the setting bar in the BRIGHTNESS window.
Use the or key, or drag the slider to the desired level on the setting
bar to adjust the setting.

4 Touch the key to close the window.

5 Touch the [HOME] key to return to the home screen.

User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series 3-5


3. NECESSARY SETTINGS BEFORE MONITORING

Changing Waveform Sweep Speed


The waveform sweep speed can be changed for ECG, pulse and respiration
waveforms. SVM-7503 and SVM-7523 can also change CO2 waveform sweep
speed.

1 Display the DISPLAY/SOUND window.


Touch the [MENU] key → [DISPLAY/SOUND] key.

2 Touch the [SWEEP SPEED] key to change sweep speed for ECG and pulse
waveforms or [RESP SWEEP SPEED] or [RESP/CO2 SWEEP SPEED]
key to change sweep speed for respiration waveform. The SWEEP SPEED,
RESP SWEEP SPEED or RESP/CO2 SWEEP SPEED window opens.

SWEEP SPEED window

3-6 User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series


3. NECESSARY SETTINGS BEFORE MONITORING

RESP/CO2 SWEEP SPEED window

3 Select the sweep speed in the SWEEP SPEED window for waveforms other
than respiration waveform.
Select the sweep speed in the RESP SWEEP SPEED or RESP/CO2 SWEEP
SPEED window for the respiration waveform.

4 Touch the key to close the window.

5 Touch the [HOME] key to return to the home screen.

User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series 3-7


3. NECESSARY SETTINGS BEFORE MONITORING

Admitting
Before entering the name of a new patient, you must first delete all data of the
previous patient.

WARNING
When admitting a new patient, check the alarm settings. The alarm
settings return to the alarm master settings on the SYSTEM SETUP
window when either of the following occurs:
• A patient is discharged and all data is deleted on the ADMIT
window.
• <ADMIT MODE> in the SYSTEM SETUP window is set to AUTO
and 30 minutes elapse after monitor power off.
• “PATIENT TYPE” is changed on the ADMIT window.

CAUTION
When admitting a new patient, first delete all data of the previous
patient. Otherwise, the data of the previous patient and new patient
will be mixed together.

NOTE • After turning the monitor on and when admitting a patient on the
monitor, make sure that the time displayed at the upper right of
the screen is correct. When the date or time is changed during
monitoring, the date and time of all stored data is also changed
and may not match the date and time on the printout.
• When admitting a new patient, check the alarm settings.

Displaying the ADMIT Window


Display the ADMIT window.
Touch the [MENU] key → [ADMIT] key.
When MENU is assigned to one of the function keys at the upper left of the
screen, the MENU window can be displayed by touching the MENU function
key.

3-8 User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series


3. NECESSARY SETTINGS BEFORE MONITORING

The ADMIT window can also be displayed by touching the patient name area at
the upper part of the home screen.

Closing the ADMIT Window 3


Touch the [HOME] key.
You can also close the page by touching the waveform or current trendgraph
display area on the home screen.

Entering the Patient Name


There are two methods to enter the patient name. For selecting the method, refer
to the Administrator’s Guide, Section 3.
SCREEN KEYBOARD: Use the keyboard keys displayed on the window. Up to 15
alphanumeric characters can be entered.
FREE HAND: Any character or image you have drawn on the free writing
area appears as the patient name.

Entering the Patient Name by Using the Keyboard

1 Touch the [NAME] key on the ADMIT window, and then touch NAME tab,
the PATIENT NAME input window with keyboard appears.
Cursor

Enter the Delete the


patient name. character after
the cursor.
Delete the character
before the cursor.
Touch the
desired Touch to enter the
character(s). patient name. The
The cursor registered patient
moves to the name appears on
right. the patient name
Touch to enter Enter space. Moves the cursor area on the home
capital letters. one block (one screen.
character).

2 Enter the patient name by using the keyboard keys.

3 Touch the [ENT] key. The patient name appears in the patient name area on
the home screen.

4 Close the NAME window by touching the close button ( ).

User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series 3-9


3. NECESSARY SETTINGS BEFORE MONITORING

Entering the Patient Name by Using Free Function

1 Touch the [NAME] key on the ADMIT window, and then touch NAME
(FREE) tab, the NAME window with free writing area appears.

2 Write the patient name with your finger in the free writing area. You can
enter any character by drawing it.
Scroll the writing area left
or right. The displayed
writing area is 1/4 of the
total available writing area. Erase all characters.

When finished, touch


this key to set the
patient name. The
registered patient
name appears on the
patient name area on
the home screen.

Writing area. Touch


with your finger to
write the patient
Set the finger name. Your writing
Set the finger to
Set the finger erase instead of appears in the
to fill in a four
to fill in one patient name box.
block square. write.
block.

3 Touch the [SET] key. The patient name appears in the patient name area on
the home screen.

4 Close the NAME window by touching the close button ( ).

3-10 User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series


3. NECESSARY SETTINGS BEFORE MONITORING

Entering the Patient ID


Enter the patient ID by using the keyboard keys displayed on the window. Up to
16 alphanumeric characters can be entered.

1 Touch the [PATIENT ID] key on the ADMIT window. The PATIENT ID 3
window with keyboard appears.
Enter patient ID.

Cursor
Delete the
character after
the cursor.
Delete the character
before the cursor.
Touch the
desired Touch to enter the
character. patient name. The
The cursor registered patient
moves to name appears on
the right. the patient name
Touch to enter Enter space. Moves the cursor area on the home
capital letters. one block (one screen.
character).

2 Enter the patient ID by using the keyboard keys.

3 Touch the [ENT] key.

4 Close the PATIENT ID window by touching the close button ( ).

User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series 3-11


3. NECESSARY SETTINGS BEFORE MONITORING

Changing the Patient Type


You can change the patient type in this window.

1 Touch the [PATIENT TYPE] key on the ADMIT window to display


PATIENT TYPE window.

2 Change the patient type to Adult, Child or Neonate, a caution message of


“Settings will be changed according to patient type. Alarm master: Adult
(Child/Neonate). Change patient to Adult (Child/Neonate)?” is displayed
under the selection.

3 Touch [YES] key to change patient type. Touch [NO] key to cancel the
change.

4 Close the PATIENT TYPE window by touching the close button ( ).


NOTE • When the patient type is changed, alarm settings will be
changed to master value.
• When the patient type is changed, other parameter’s patient
type is also changed accordingly.

3-12 User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series


3. NECESSARY SETTINGS BEFORE MONITORING

Enter the HEIGHT/WEIGHT


Enter the patient’s height and weight by using the keyboard keys displayed
on the window. When the unit is set to "feet/inch" and "pound" in SYSTEM
CONFIG of DIAGNOSTIC CHECK window , the input range of height is 0 - 9
feet 0.1 - 11.9 inch and weight is 0.1 - 654.9. When the unit is set to "cm" and 3
"kg", the input range of height is 0.1 - 299.9 and weight is 0.1 - 449.9. When
the settings of height and weight are incorrect, the “OUT OF RANGE” message
appears on the screen. Enter the correct height and weight.

1 Touch the [HEIGHT/WEIGHT] key on the ADMIT window. The setting


window opens.

2 Enter the height and weight using the keyboard on the screen.

Touch the keys


to set height/ Delete the character
weight. before the cursor.

Touch to enter
height/weight. The
registered height/
weight appears
on the height and
weight box.

3 Touch the [ENT] key.

4 Close the Height/Weight window by touching the close key ( ).

Set the Gender


Set the patient gender on the window.

1 Touch the [GENDER] key on the ADMIT window. The setting window
opens.

2 Select the patient’s gender and touch the close key ( ).

User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series 3-13


3. NECESSARY SETTINGS BEFORE MONITORING

Discharging

CAUTION
When admitting a new patient, first delete all data of the previous
patient. Otherwise, the data of the previous patient and new patient
will be mixed together.

NOTE: If a patient is admitted during NIBP measurement, the


measurement stops.
When monitoring the patient is no longer required, delete the data on the ADMIT
window. The patient name and data on the review windows are deleted, and the
alarm settings, arrhythmia analysis on or off and patient type return to the alarm
master settings, and the NIBP measurement mode returns to the INTERVAL
MASTER setting on the SYSTEM SETUP window.

1 Display the ADMIT window.


Touch the [MENU] key → [ADMIT DISCHARGE] key.

2 Touch the [DISCHARGE] key on the bottom right of the window.


The message confirming the data deletion appears.

3-14 User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series


3. NECESSARY SETTINGS BEFORE MONITORING

3 Touch [YES] key to delete the data. Touch [NO] key to not to delete the data.

4 The home screen appears. Check the following items to confirm that all data
are deleted.
• Patient name on the home screen is deleted.
• “ALARMS SUSPENDED” message appears and alarms are suspended on
3
the monitor.
"ALARMS SUSPENDED" message appears.
Patient name is deleted.

• When <ADMIT MODE> is set to MANUAL, the STANDBY window


appears after discharging the patient.

Suspended Alarms
All alarms are suspended during discharging, admitting or when preparing for
monitoring. Alarm function resumes when the [SUSPEND ALARMS] key is
touched or the following monitoring conditions are continuously met.
Setting of <ALARM
ACTIVATION DELAY>
Condition
on the SYSTEM
SETUP Window
Alarm function activates when ECG or SpO2 is monitored
or NIBP* is measured and a value is displayed.
AUTO * When SYS, DIA or MAP value is measured.
The alarm function is also recovered when the heart rate is
0.
When one of the following requirements is met.
1 min ECG, SpO2 or IBP is continuously monitored for the
2 mins selected time.

3 mins NIBP is measured (SYS, DIA or MAP value is measured)


Heart rate becomes 0.

Save Data
The patient data can be saved to USB memory.
NOTE: This is for maintenance. Only the service personnel specified by
Shanghai Kohden or authorized agents are allowed to perform the
maintenance. Please contact your Nihon Kohden representative
for more details.

User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series 3-15


4 Home Screen

Safety Precautions for Monitoring...................................4-3


4

Using an Electrosurgical Unit.........................................................4-3


Using a Defibrillator........................................................................4-3

Overview.........................................................................4-4
Home Screen.................................................................................4-4
Review Windows............................................................................4-4
Sync Sound....................................................................................4-4
Adjusting the Sync and Alarm Sound Volume................................4-4
Changing Settings and Performing Other Tasks during
Monitoring.......................................................................................4-4
Recording on the Home Screen.....................................................4-4

Home Screen..................................................................4-5
Settings for the Home Screen........................................................4-7
Waveform Sweep Speed............................................................4-7
Parameter Colors.......................................................................4-7
Waveform Sensitivity..................................................................4-7
Numeric Parameter Display Area (On the DISPLAY Window of
the SYSTEM SETUP Window)...................................................4-7
Displaying Other Windows from the Home Screen........................4-8

Freezing Waveforms.......................................................4-9

Using Sleep Mode.........................................................4-10


Turning Sleep Mode On...............................................................4-10
Turning Sleep Mode Off...............................................................4-11

Displaying the LARGE NUMERICS Screen..................4-12


4. HOME SCREEN

This section explains how to monitor the patient’s waveforms and data.
Before monitoring the patient:
• Prepare the patient and equipment according to the Administrator’s Guide and
Sections 1, 2, 3, 5, 6, and 9 to 16 of this User’s Guide. When using the optional
recorder module, also see Section 8.
• Before monitoring a new patient, follow the flowchart in Section 2.
• Read the safety precautions in “Safety Precautions for Monitoring” in this
section.
In this section:
• “Overview” gives general information for all monitoring.
• “Freezing Waveforms” explains how to freeze waveforms.
• “Displaying LARGE NUMERICS Screen” explains about displaying large
numeric data.
• “Using Sleep Mode” explains how to use sleep mode.

4-2 User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series


4. HOME SCREEN

Safety Precautions for Monitoring


Before beginning monitoring, observe the following safety precautions and the
safety precautions for other parameters in Sections 9 to 16.

Using an Electrosurgical Unit 4

WARNING
Electrosurgical units (ESU) emit a lot of RF interference. If the
monitor is used with an ESU, RF interference may affect the monitor
operation.

WARNING
Locate the monitor as far as possible from the ESU. Locate them on
opposite sides of the operating table, if possible.

WARNING
Connect the monitor and ESU to different AC outlets located as far
as possible from each other.

WARNING
When the monitor is used with an ESU, firmly attach the entire area
of the ESU return plate. Otherwise, the current from the ESU flows
into the electrodes of the monitor, causing electrical burn where the
electrodes are attached. For details, refer to the ESU manual.

Using a Defibrillator

WARNING
Before defibrillation, all persons must keep clear of the bed and must
not touch the patient or any equipment connected to the patient.
Failure to follow this warning may cause electrical shock or injury.

If the ECG waveform on the screen is too unstable to synchronize with the
patient’s heart beat because of the following reason(s), remove the cause(s)
of an alarm, message, or unstable ECG, and then use a stable ECG lead for
synchronization.
• ECG electrode is detached or broken. Lead wire is detached or broken.
• Lead wire moves. AC interference, EMG noise or noise from ESU is
superimposed.
• Connection cable is broken or has a short circuit. Connector has poor contact.

User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series 4-3


4. HOME SCREEN

Overview

Home Screen
When you first begin monitoring, the home screen appears. The home screen
displays waveforms and numeric data for ECG and other parameters. Any time
you touch the [HOME] key, the home screen appears.
The parameters on the home screen depend on the measured parameters.
When the monitor power is turned on, alarms are suspended while the monitor is
waiting for the electrodes and probe to be attached to the patient. The monitoring
starts when the connection cord is connected to the socket on the monitor and
electrodes or probe is attached to the patient.
NOTE: When <ADMIT MODE> in the SYSTEM SETUP window is set to
AUTO and the monitor power is turned on more than 30 minutes
after turning power off, the stored data in the monitor is deleted.

Review Windows
The trend, arrhythmia recall, alarm history, full disclosure and OCRG windows
display the stored data. For details about the review windows, refer to Section 6.

Sync Sound
During monitoring, a continuous “pip” sounds in synchronization with either the
QRS or pulse. QRS is the default setting. Refer to “Changing the Sync Sound
Source” in the User’s Guide Section 9, 13 or 15 to change the source of the sync
sound.

Adjusting the Sync and Alarm Sound Volume


The sync sound volume and alarm sound volume can be adjusted on the
DISPLAY/SOUND window. At the lowest setting, the alarm sound is audible but
the sync sound is not audible. Refer to “Changing Sound Volume Settings” in
Section 3.

Changing Settings and Performing Other Tasks during Monitoring


Every screen except the SYSTEM CONFIGURATION screen always displays
at least one real-time ECG waveform and the numeric data of monitoring
parameters. This lets you monitor the patient continuously without interruption
while you do other tasks, such as changing settings, printing reports, or viewing
trendgraphs.
The screen returns to the home screen when there is no key operation for about 3
minutes.

Recording on the Home Screen


When the optional WS-752P recorder module is installed in the monitor, the
waveforms on the home screen can be recorded. ECG and up to two parameters
selected on the RECORD window is recorded when the Record key is
touched.
For details, refer to Section 8 “Recording”.

4-4 User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series


4. HOME SCREEN

Home Screen
When you first begin monitoring, the home screen appears. To return to the home
screen from another window or screen, touch the [HOME] key.
When a window is displayed and there is no operation for about 3 minutes, the
screen automatically returns to the home screen.
4
The home screen is automatically laid out according to the measured parameters.
The layout changes when a measuring parameter changes.
The settings for monitoring parameters can be changed individually on the
parameter window. For details about individual parameters, see Sections 9 to 16.
33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26
25
24
1
23
22
2
3 21
4
5 20
6

19

7
18
17
16
8

10 11 12 13 14 15

1 Heart rate
When SpO2 is selected for the <SYNC SOURCE>, the pulse rate can be
displayed to the left of the heart rate on the screen.
2 ST level

3 VPC

4 Cuff type

5 NIBP values
Systolic, diastolic (MAP)
6 NIBP measurement mode

7 PRESS values
PRESS1 and PRESS2 (for SVM-7503 and SVM-7523)
8 Temperature values
TEMP1 and TEMP2
9 Respiration rate

10 Alarm limit settings

11 End-tidal CO2 Value

User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series 4-5


4. HOME SCREEN

12 SQI (Signal Quality Index)


Indicates the SpO2 signal quality. There are four levels of SQI:
1 level (red): Invalid
2 level (yellow): Bad
3 level (green): Middle
4 level (green): Standard
13 Respiration waveform

14 Respiration waveform sensitivity

15 Record key

16 Menu key

17 Pulse waveform

18 NIBP Start/Stop key

19 NIBP Interval key

20 PRESS waveforms

21 Silence alarm key

22 ECG cascade mark

23 ECG sensitivity

24 ECG lead

25 Current date and time

26 Battery status
It is displayed when SB-752P battery pack is installed.
27 ECG waveform

28 ECG filter mode

29 Patient type

30 Patient name

31 Bed ID

32 Function keys

33 QRS sync mark

You can “freeze” (stop sweeping) the waveforms on the home screen. By
freezing the waveforms, you can observe one part of a waveform in detail. The
numerical data on the screen are not frozen. For details, refer to the “Freezing
Waveforms” section.
You can use sleep mode when the monitor is connected to the central monitor
network. In sleep mode, the screen is darkened and sync sound is turned off to
prevent the monitor from disturbing the patient, such as during sleep. For details,
refer to “Using Sleep Mode” later in this section.

4-6 User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series


4. HOME SCREEN

Settings for the Home Screen

Waveform Sweep Speed


The sweep speed of waveforms other than respiration waveform on the home
screen can be selected from one of four speeds: 6.25 mm/s, 12.5 mm/s, 25 mm/s
or 50 mm/s at SWEEP SPEED window of the DISPLAY/SOUND window.
4
The respiration waveform sweep speed on the home screen can be selected
from one of four speeds: 1.56 mm/s, 6.25 mm/s, 12.5 mm/s or 25 mm/s at RESP
SWEEP SPEED or RESP/CO2 SWEEP SPEED window of the DISPLAY/
SOUND window.

Parameter Colors
The parameter colors are set on the COLOR window of the SYSTEM SETUP
window. Refer to “COLOR Window” in the Administrator’s Guide, Section 3.

Waveform Sensitivity
Waveform sensitivity can be changed on the parameter window. Refer to
Sections 10 to 16.

Numeric Parameter Display Area (On the DISPLAY Window of the SYSTEM
SETUP Window)
You can change the layout of the home screen. Refer to “LAYOUT Page” in
Section 3 of the Administrator’s Guide.

NUMERIC PARAMETER AREA – LEFT SIDE NUMBERIC PARAMETER AREA – SIDE + SMALL BOTTOM

NUMERIC PARAMETER AREA – BOTTOM

User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series 4-7


4. HOME SCREEN

Displaying Other Windows from the Home Screen


Touching the following items on the home screen displays the following
windows.
• Numeric value: Parameter setting window
• Patient name: ADMIT window
• Time: DATE window
• Function key: Window assigned to the function key

4-8 User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series


4. HOME SCREEN

Freezing Waveforms
Normally, the waveforms continuously sweep across the screen. You can also
“freeze” (stop sweeping) the waveforms. By freezing the waveforms, you can
observe one part of a waveform in detail. The numerical data on the screen are
not frozen.
To freeze waveforms, the freeze function must be assigned to one of the function 4
keys in the upper left corner of the screen. Refer to “KEYS Window” in the
Administrator’s Guide, Section 3.
When the freeze function is assigned to a function key, waveforms on the home
screen can be frozen any time by touching the [FREEZE] key. The waveforms
are frozen for 3 minutes or until they are unfrozen.
When the waveforms are frozen, the “FREEZE” message appears with the frozen
time.

To unfreeze the waveforms, touch any key or any place on the screen, or touch
the FREEZE function key again, or wait for 3 minutes until they are unfrozen.

User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series 4-9


4. HOME SCREEN

Using Sleep Mode


In sleep mode, the screen is darkened and sync sound is turned off. The sleep
mode is only available when the monitor is connected to a central monitor
network.
Use this mode when you want to prevent the monitor from disturbing the patient,
such as during sleep.
When <EXIT SLEEP MODE ON CRISIS ALARM> on the SLEEP window of
the SYSTEM SETUP window is set to:
YES: Sleep mode is turned off and the home screen appears when a CRISIS level alarm
occurs.
NO: Sleep mode continues even when an alarm occurs.

When the time is set in <SLEEP MODE WILL END AT> box on the SLEEP
window of the SYSTEM SETUP window, the monitor exits the sleep mode on
the set clock time.
Refer to the Administrator’s Guide, Section 3.

WARNING
When the <EXIT SLEEP MODE ON CRISIS ALARM> check box on
the ALARM page of the SYSTEM SETUP window is OFF, the
bedside monitor alarm cannot be seen or heard on the bedside
monitor during sleep mode. In this case, monitor the bedside monitor
alarms on the central monitor. Otherwise, the bedside monitor
alarms may be overlooked.

NOTE • After turning the monitor on and when admitting a patient on the
monitor, make sure that the time displayed at the upper right of
the screen is correct. When the date or time is changed during
monitoring, the date and time of all stored data is also changed
and may not match the date and time on the printout.
• When admitting a new patient, check the alarm settings.

Turning Sleep Mode On


1 Press the [MENU] key. The MENU window appears.

4-10 User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series


4. HOME SCREEN

2 Touch the [SLEEP] key to set the sleep mode.


During the sleep mode, the following screen is displayed.

Turning Sleep Mode Off


Touch the screen or wait until setting time ends.

User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series 4-11


4. HOME SCREEN

Displaying the LARGE NUMERICS Screen


The numeric data of all monitoring parameters are enlarged on the LARGE
NUMERICS screen. This window is useful for viewing at a distance.

1 Touch the [MENU] key. The MENU window appears.

2 Touch the [LARGE NUMERICS] key. The LARGE NUMERICS screen


appears.

PRESS1

Heart rate

SQI (Signal
Quality Index)
PRESS2
SpO2

SpO2 pulse bar


VPC

ST level NIBP Respiration Temperatures


SYS/DIA rate
(MAP)

Touch the numeric value to display the parameter setting window.

3 To return to the standard home screen, touch the [MENU] key, and then
touch the [HOME] key.

4-12 User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series


5 Alarm Function

Overview of Alarms.........................................................5-4
5

What is an Alarm............................................................................5-4
Alarm Level....................................................................................5-4
Alarm Priority..................................................................................5-5
Silencing/Suspending Alarms.........................................................5-5
Resetting Alarms............................................................................5-5
Alarm Master..................................................................................5-6
Automatic Recording......................................................................5-6
Alarm Setting..................................................................................5-6
Canceling the Technical Alarm.......................................................5-6
Adjusting Alarm Sound Volume......................................................5-6
Alarm Activation after Power On....................................................5-7
ALARM HISTORY Window............................................................5-7
Alarm Escalation............................................................................5-7

Alarm Types.....................................................................5-8
Vital Signs Alarms..........................................................................5-8
Arrhythmia Alarms..........................................................................5-8
Technical Alarms............................................................................5-9
ECG Related Alarms................................................................. 5-9
CO2 Related Alarms (SVM-7503 and SVM-7523)..................... 5-9
SpO2 Related Alarms................................................................ 5-9
NIBP Related Alarms................................................................ 5-9
IBP Related Alarms (SVM-7503 and SVM-7523).....................5-10
Temperature Related Alarms...................................................5-10
Other Alarms............................................................................5-10
Interbed Alarms........................................................................5-10
Messages.....................................................................................5-11
ECG Related Messages...........................................................5-11
Respiration Related Messages................................................5-11
CO2 Related Messages (SVM-7503 and SVM-7523)...............5-11
SpO2 Related Messages..........................................................5-11
NIBP Related Messages..........................................................5-12
IBP Related Messages (SVM-7503 and SVM-7523)...............5-12
Other Messages.......................................................................5-12

Alarm Indications...........................................................5-13
Overview......................................................................................5-13
Individual Alarm Indications..........................................................5-13
Vital Signs Alarms....................................................................5-14
Arrhythmia Alarms...................................................................5-16
Technical Alarms......................................................................5-17
Other Alarms........................................................................... 5-20
Alarm Control Marks.....................................................................5-20
Individual Vital Signs Alarm Off Marks.................................... 5-20
Flow of Alarm Function.................................................................5-21

Silencing/Suspending/Resetting Alarms........................5-22
Overview......................................................................................5-22
Silencing an Alarm.................................................................. 5-22
Suspending Alarms................................................................. 5-22
Silencing Alarms after Alarm Occurrence.....................................5-25
Silencing Alarms..................................................................... 5-25
Canceling Alarm Silence......................................................... 5-25
Suspending Alarms Before Alarm Occurrence.............................5-25
Suspending Alarms................................................................. 5-25
Suspending All Alarms Indefinitely.......................................... 5-26

Turing Automatic Alarm Recording On/Off....................5-28

Setting Alarms...............................................................5-29
Overview......................................................................................5-29
Alarm Limits Ranges....................................................................5-29
Vital Signs Alarms................................................................... 5-30
Arrhythmia Alarms.................................................................. 5-32
Setting Vital Signs Alarms Individually.........................................5-32
Automatically Setting All Upper and Lower Alarm Limits (Including
ST)................................................................................................5-33
Setting All Vital Signs Alarm Limits to a Preset Pattern (Alarm
Master).........................................................................................5-35
Checking Arrhythmia Alarm Settings............................................5-36

Interbed Alarm...............................................................5-37
5. ALARM FUNCTION

This section explains:


• An overview of alarms
• Alarm types
• Alarm indications
• Silencing an alarm
• Suspending all alarms before occurrence
• Setting individual alarms, turning automatic alarm recording on or off and all
other functions for alarms
5

User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series 5-3


5. ALARM FUNCTION

Overview of Alarms

What is an Alarm
When the monitor detects an abnormal patient condition, it can generate an alarm
sound, screen indication and alarm lamp indication. When the optional recorder
module is installed in the monitor, ECG waveforms and data can be recorded at
an alarm occurrence. You can set each individual alarm condition. There are four
types of alarms: vital signs, arrhythmias, technical alarms and interbed alarms,
and three levels of alarm: crisis, warning and advisory. The different alarm types
are fully explained in the “Alarm Types” section and different alarm levels are
explained in the “Alarm Indications” section.

WARNING
Check the alarm settings when admitting a new patient and
whenever the patient condition changes and change the alarm
settings if necessary. The alarm settings return to the alarm master
settings on the SYSTEM SETUP window when:
• A patient is discharged and all data is deleted on the ADMIT
window.
• “PATIENT TYPE” is changed on the ADMIT window.
• <ADMIT MODE> in the SYSTEM SETUP window is set to AUTO
and 30 mins elapse after monitor power off.

NOTE: When admitting a new patient, check the alarm settings.


Alarm indicator
Alarm message

Highlighted
numeric data

Alarm sound

Alarm Level
There are three alarm levels: CRISIS, WARNING and ADVISORY.

Potential result of failure to Onset of potential HARM*


respond to the cause of alarm Immediate action must Prompt action should Delayed action should
condition be taken be taken be taken
Death or irreversible injury CRISIS alarm condition CRISIS alarm condition WARNING alarm condition
Reversible injury CRISIS alarm condition WARNING alarm condition ADVISORY alarm condition
Discomfort or reversible minor injury WARNING alarm condition ADVISORY alarm condition ADVISORY alarm condition

* Onset of potential HARM refers to when an injury occurs and not to when it is
manifested.

5-4 User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series


5. ALARM FUNCTION

The priority and monitor action are different for each level.

Alarm Display on the Screen Alarm


Alarm Level Alarm Sound Alarm Recording
Message Numeric Data Indicator LED

NK1 (Continuous When ALARM* is selected:


pip sound), NK2 Highlighted red numeric data
Highlighted
CRISIS (Continuous ping When PARAMETER Blinking red
red message
sound) or IEC is selected: Highlighted Recorded at alarm
standard (ceg-gC) parameter color numeric data occurrence when
When ALARM* is selected: alarm recording on
NK1 (Continuous Highlighted yellow numeric the RECORD window
bing bong sound), Highlighted data is set to ON. 5
WARNING NK2 (Continuous yellow Blinking yellow
ding ding sound) or message When PARAMETER
IEC standard (ceg) is selected: Highlighted
parameter color numeric data
When ALARM* is selected:
NK1 and NK2 Highlighted yellow numeric Recorded at alarm
(Single beep Highlighted data occurrence when
ADVISORY every 20 s) or IEC yellow Lights in yellow alarm recording on
standard (ec every message When PARAMETER* the RECORD window
20 s) is selected: Highlighted is set to ON.
parameter color numeric data

Alarm Priority
When several alarms occur at the same time, the alarm with the highest alarm
level is indicated.

Silencing/Suspending Alarms
You can temporarily silence current alarm sounds and indications for a 1-minute,
2-minute or 3-minute period. See the “Silencing/Suspending/Resetting Alarms”
section.

WARNING
During alarm suspension (“SUSPEND ALARMS”, “ALL ALARMS
OFF” or “ALARM RESET” message displayed), all alarms are turned
off. Be careful when you suspend the alarm.

The [SUSPEND MONITORING], [SUSPEND ALARMS] or [ALL ALARMS


OFF] key is displayed on the MENU window. The key to be displayed on
the MENU window is set on the SYSTEM SETUP window. Refer to the
Administrator’s Guide, Section 3.
The [SUSPEND ALARMS], [SUSPEND MONITORING] and [ALARM
RESET] key can be assigned to one of the function keys. Refer to the
Administrator’s Guide, Section 3.

Resetting Alarms
When an alarm occurs, you can reset the alarm by touching the [ALARM
RESET] key. While the key is touched, the "ALARM RESET" message appears,
the alarm value is highlighted and the alarm sound is deactivated. The alarm
reoccurs when an alarm different from the reset one occurs, or cause of alarm
was eliminated temporarily.

User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series 5-5


5. ALARM FUNCTION

Alarm Master
For fast and easy alarm setup, a group of alarm items can be set all together
at one time. For example, there may be typical alarm settings at your hospital,
or you may have certain alarm settings for certain patients. There is one alarm
master for vital signs and one alarm master for arrhythmias. The alarm masters
are set by the administrator on the MASTER window of the SYSTEM SETUP
window.
Even when alarms are set by an alarm master, individual alarm settings can still
be changed on the ALARM LIMITS and ARRHYTH ALARMS windows or
the alarm setting window of each parameter window. See the “Setting Alarm”
section.

Automatic Recording
When the optional recorder module is installed in the monitor, you can set the
monitor to automatically record ECG waveforms and data when an alarm occurs.
See the “Turning Automatic Alarm Recording On/Off” section.
If a higher level alarm occurs during another alarm recording, the present alarm
recording is canceled and the higher level alarm is recorded.

Alarm Setting
Usually, alarms are set before monitoring, but alarms can be set or changed
anytime without interrupting monitoring.
If you turn the bedside monitor power off and 30 minutes elapses when <ADMIT
MODE> is set to AUTO or change the PATIENT TYPE setting, all alarm settings
return to the alarm master settings of the SYSTEM SETUP window.
To set a parameter alarm to off, set the upper and lower limits to OFF.

Canceling the Technical Alarm


When you remove a sensor cable or probe cable from the bedside monitor, a
technical alarm occurs. Touch the [Silence Alarms] key, the technical alarm can
be canceled. Touching the [SUSPEND MONITORING], [SUSPEND ALARMS]
and [ALL ALARMS OFF] keys also cancel the technical alarm.

Adjusting Alarm Sound Volume


The alarm sound volume can be adjusted on the DISPLAY/SOUND window.
Refer to “Changing Sound Volume Settings” in Section 3.

5-6 User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series


5. ALARM FUNCTION

Alarm Activation after Power On

CAUTION
After the monitor power is turned on, parameter-related alarms do
not function until the parameters are monitored.

When the monitor power is turned on, alarms are suspended while the monitor is
waiting for the electrodes and probe to be attached to the patient. The monitoring
starts when the connection cord is connected to the socket on the monitor and the 5
electrodes or probe are attached to the patient. The alarm activates when one of
the following occurs:
• ECG or SpO2 is monitored or NIBP is measured and a value is displayed
(when AUTO is selected for <ALARM ACTIVATION DELAY> on the
ALARM window of the SYSTEM SETUP window)
• ECG, SpO2 or IBP is continuously monitored for the selected time (when 1
min, 2 min or 3 min is selected for <ALARM ACTIVATION DELAY>)
• NIBP is measured (when 1 min, 2 min or 3 min is selected for <ALARM
ACTIVATION DELAY>)

ALARM HISTORY Window


The vital sign data is saved as a file on a vital sign or arrhythmia alarm
occurrence. These data can be viewed on the ALARM HISTORY window. Refer
to “Alarm History Window” in Section 6.

Alarm Escalation
If the APNEA, SpO2, CHECK ELECTRODES, ECG CANNOT ANALYZE or
SpO2 CHECK PROBE alarm occurs and no action is taken for a selected time,
the alarm level can be escalated. For details, refer to “ALARM Window” in
Section 3 of the Administrator’s Guide.

User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series 5-7


5. ALARM FUNCTION

Alarm Types
Alarms are divided into 4 categories: vital signs, arrhythmia, technical and
interbed alarms. The alarm name is displayed on the screen when an alarm
occurs. For the vital signs and arrhythmia alarms, waveforms and data can be
recorded in automatic alarm recording when the optional recorder module is
installed in the monitor.
For the alarm types which are not classified into alarm levels, only the message
is displayed.

Vital Signs Alarms


Vital sign alarm occurs when the parameter value exceeds the upper or lower
alarm limit.

Arrhythmia Alarms
Arrhythmia Name Description
ASYSTOLE Longer than 3 to 10 seconds (selectable) with no QRS complex.
VF Ventricular fibrillation longer than 4 seconds.
VT Ventricular tachycardia. 9 or more consecutive VPCs when
heart rate is exceeding 100 beats/min.
VPC RUN VPC short run. 3 to 8 (selectable) consecutive VPCs.
TACHYCARDIA Heart rate above the upper heart rate limit.
BRADYCARDIA Heart rate below the lower heart rate limit.
COUPLET VPC couplet (paired VPCs). 2 consecutive VPCs.
EARLY VPC Early VPC including R-on-T type. VPC with a time interval
from the preceding normal QRS complex of less than
approximately one-third of the normal R-R interval, at heart
rate dropping below 120* beats/min.
BIGEMINY Ventricular bigeminy. 3 or more consecutive pairs of VPC and
normal QRS. A dominant rhythm of N-V-N-V-N-V (N = normal
beat, V = ventricular beat)
FREQ VPC Frequent VPCs. VPC rate (VPCs/min) reaching or exceeding
the preset limit of 1 to 99 VPCs/min (selectable).
VPC Ventricular premature contraction.

* 120 beats/min when <PATIENT TYPE> is set to ADULT, 150 beats/min when
<PATIENT TYPE> is set to CHILD or NEONATE.

5-8 User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series


5. ALARM FUNCTION

Technical Alarms
You can see the detailed information of the technical alarms by touching the
[GUIDE] key on the upper right of the screen. For details, refer to “Guide
Window” in Section 1.

ECG Related Alarms


Alarm Name Description
CANNOT ANALYZE Noise interference for more than 30 seconds and heart
rate cannot be counted and arrhythmia cannot be 5
analyzed.
CHECK ELECTRODES Electrode loose or disconnected.
CHECK ELECTRODE Specified electrode (--) loose or disconnected.
MODULE ERROR ECG hardware malfunction.

CO2 Related Alarms (SVM-7503 and SVM-7523)


Alarm Name Description
CO2 CAL?? Asks whether to perform CO2 calibration or not.
CO2 APNEA Apnea exceeded the apnea alarm limit.
CO2 CHANGE ADAPTER The CO2 adapter is damaged.
CO2 CHECK SENSOR Insufficient sensor light.
CO2 CONNECTOR OFF CO2 connection cord is disconnected from the socket
during measurement.
CO2 SENSOR ERROR CO2 sensor is damaged.

SpO2 Related Alarms


Alarm Name Description
CANNOT DETECT PULSE Pulse cannot be detected.
CHANGE PROBE SpO2 probe or connection cord is damaged.
CHECK PROBE Finger probe is not attached to the patient firmly or the
amount of transmitted light is too small to measure.
CHECK PROBE SITE The probe is not attached at the appropriate site or the
probe is past its expiration date.
CONNECTOR OFF SpO2 connection cord is disconnected from the SpO2
socket during monitoring.
LIGHT INTERFERENCE Too much light on probe.
MODULE ERROR SpO2 hardware malfunction.

NIBP Related Alarms


Alarm Name Description
AIR LEAK Cuff pressure does not change after inflation.
CANNOT DETECT PULSE Measurement cannot be performed because the
patient’s pulse wave is small, the cuff or hose leaks
air, the cuff hose is obstructed or the cuff is not
connected.
CHECK INTERVAL SETTING NIBP is measured at 1-minute intervals for more
than 30 minutes.
CHECK PATIENT TYPE Patient type is adult, but cuff is for neonate.

User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series 5-9


5. ALARM FUNCTION

Alarm Name Description


CONNECTOR OFF NIBP hose is disconnected from the cuff socket
during monitoring.
CUFF OCCLUSION Cuff pressure does not decrease after measurement
has completed.
HIGH CUFF PRESS Enormous pressure was applied by the pressure of
the cuff.
MEAS TIME OUT The measuring time exceeded the specified time.
MODULE ERROR NIBP module malfunction.
SAFETY CIRCUIT RUNNING Monitor automatically stopped inflating.
SYSTOLIC OVER Systolic value is outside the measurable range.

IBP Related Alarms (SVM-7503 and SVM-7523)


Alarm Name Description
PRESS CHECK SENSOR Blood pressure transducer is disconnected from the
IBP connection cord or the IBP connection cord is
damaged.
PRESS CONNECTOR OFF IBP connection cord is disconnected from the socket
during measurement.
CATHETER DISCONNECT Pulse rate cannot be detected, and mean pressure is
lower than 10 mmHg.

Temperature Related Alarms


Alarm Name Description
TEMP CHECK SENSOR Temperature probe is disconnected from the extension
cable or the probe is damaged.
CONNECTOR OFF Temperature probe or extension cable is disconnected
from the TEMP socket.

Other Alarms
Alarm Name Description
– – – ALARM Alarm concerning the – – – (parameter name)
occurred.
BATTERY ERROR Battery problems.
BATTERY WEAK Battery pack is nearly discharged.
CLOCK IC FAILURE The clock IC is damaged.
MPU MODULE ERROR MPU circuit malfunction.
PARAMETER NOT AVAILABLE Connected cord or cable of the parameter is not
available on the monitor.
COMMUNICATION LOSS The network cable of the CNS is disconnected
from the monitor.

Interbed Alarms
When an alarm occurs on an interbed bed, the interbed alarm occurs on this
bedside monitor. For details, refer to “Interbed Alarm” later in this section.

5-10 User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series


5. ALARM FUNCTION

Messages
The following messages are monitoring information and are not considered
alarms.

ECG Related Messages


Message Description
ARRHYTHMIA ANALYSIS OFF Arrhythmia analysis is turned off.
AUTO LEAD CHANGE Monitoring lead is being changed by auto lead
change function. 5
LEARNING Learning QRS for arrhythmia analysis.
NOISE (During the first 30 s)
Too much noise preventing analysis.
PACING Paced QRS is detected. (This message appears
only when PACING DETECT is set to ON.)

Respiration Related Messages


Message Description
RESP OFF Respiration monitoring is turned off.

CO2 Related Messages (SVM-7503 and SVM-7523)


Message Description
CO2 CALIBRATION COMPLETE Calibration is complete.
CO2 CALIBRATION FAILURE Calibration failed when using a TG-971T4/TG-
981T4 CO2 sensor kit.
CO2 ZEROING Zeroing is performed when using a TG-971T4/
TG-981T4 CO2 sensor kit.

SpO2 Related Messages


Message Description
DETECTING PULSE* Searching for the correct pulse wave. Auto gain control is
being done. When the message is displayed for more than
20 seconds, the detected pulse is too small to measure.
LOW QUALITY SIGNAL Pulse waveform is not stable.
WEAK PULSE Poor peripheral circulation.

* When this message is displayed for more than 30 seconds, the message
changes to the “CANNOT DETECT PULSE” alarm.

User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series 5-11


5. ALARM FUNCTION

NIBP Related Messages


Message Description
INFLATION PRESS LOW Insufficient cuff inflation pressure.
INFLATION TIME PASSED Venous puncture cuff inflation time is passed.
PLEASE WAIT Measurement and cuff inflation started before the cuff
is deflated enough.
REMEASURING Remeasuring NIBP.
WEAK PULSE Patient’s pulse is small.
ZEROING NIBP zero balance adjustment is performed.

IBP Related Messages (SVM-7503 and SVM-7523)


Message Description
PRESS OUT OF RANGE The measured value is outside the measurable
range.
PRESS ZERO CALIBRATING Zero balance adjustment is performed.
PRESS ZERO IMBALANCE Zero balance is not adjusted.
PRESS ZERO OUT OF RANGE Cannot adjust zero balance.
PRESS ZERO UNSTABLE Unstable zero balance.
PRESS ZEROING COMPLETE Zero balance adjustment is complete.

Other Messages
Message Description
ALARM SILENCED Alarm is silenced.
ALARM SUSPENDED/ The [SUSPEND MONITORING] key was touched.
SUSPENDED MONITORING
ALARMS SUSPENDED: X min The [SUSPEND ALARMS] key was touched.
Remaining suspended time is indicated.
ALL ALARMS OFF The [ALL ALARMS OFF] key was touched to turn
all alarms OFF.
ALARM RESET The [ALARM RESET] key was touched to reset
all alarms.
CLOSE PAPER MAGAZINE Recorder door is open.
FREEZE Waveforms are frozen.
INSERT REC PAPER No recording paper.
Bed name INTERBED ALARM Alarm occurred on an interbed bed of the bed
name.
MONITOR OFF Monitor cannot access to interbed bed.
SIMULATED DATA The displayed data is simulated data.
UPDATING DATA Changing the parameter on the trend window.

5-12 User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series


5. ALARM FUNCTION

Alarm Indications

Overview
The monitor can indicate alarms both visually and audibly:
• Alarm sound
• Alarm message or highlighted numeric data on the screen
5
• Alarm indicator: red blinking, yellow blinking or yellow lit LED
Alarm control marks indicating that various alarm functions are turned off are
also displayed.
The same color is set for all parameters. When an alarm occurs, the alarmed
parameter color changes according to the alarm level set on the SYSTEM
SETUP window. Refer to the Administrator’s Guide, Section 3.
CRISIS: red
WARNING: yellow
ADVISORY: yellow

The alarm indicator on the monitor indicates three alarm levels: crisis, warning
and advisory. The lamp blinks or lights according to the alarm level. The colors
are set on the SYSTEM SETUP window.
CRISIS: Blinking red
WARNING: Blinking yellow
ADVISORY: Lights in yellow

Individual Alarm Indications


The alarm level for the HR/PR (upper and lower), VPC, ST, RR, APNEA, CO2
(E)*, CO2 (I)*, SpO2 (upper and lower), NIBP, PRESS*, TEMP, ECG CHECK
ELECTRODES, CANNOT ANALYZE, SpO2 CHECK PROBE, and arrhythmia
(ASYSTOLE, VF, VT, VPC RUN, TACHYCARDIA, BRADYCARDIA,
COUPLET, EARLY VPC, BIGEMINY, VPC) alarms can be selected on the
SYSTEM SETUP window. Refer to the Administrator’s Guide, Section 3.
* Only available for SVM-7503 and SVM-7523.

User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series 5-13


5. ALARM FUNCTION

Technical alarm and


ECG message display area message display area

Vital sign alarm display area

Vital Signs Alarms


Sound/Display Alarm
Alarm Alarm Level Alarm Sound Alarm Display
Duration Indicator LED
NK1 (Continuous pip sound), Highlighted numeric data
CRISIS NK2 (Continuous ping sound) or and “HR/PR ALARM” Blinking red
IEC standard (ceg-gC) message
NK1 (Continuous bing bong Highlighted numeric data
HR*/PR WARNING sound), NK2 (Continuous ding and “HR/PR ALARM” During detection Blinking yellow
ding sound) or IEC standard (ceg) message
NK1 and NK2 (Single beep every Highlighted numeric data
ADVISORY 20 s) or IEC standard (ec every and “HR/PR ALARM” Lights in yellow
20 s) message
NK1 (Continuous pip sound), Highlighted numeric data
CRISIS NK2 (Continuous ping sound) or and “VPC ALARM” Blinking red
IEC standard (ceg-gC) message
NK1 (Continuous bing bong Highlighted numeric data
VPC WARNING sound), NK2 (Continuous ding and “VPC ALARM” During detection Blinking yellow
ding sound) or IEC standard (ceg) message
NK1 and NK2 (Single beep every Highlighted numeric
ADVISORY 20 s) or IEC standard (ec every data and “ST ALARM” Lights in yellow
20 s) message
NK1 (Continuous pip sound), Highlighted numeric
CRISIS NK2 (Continuous ping sound) or data and “ST ALARM” Blinking red
IEC standard (ceg-gC) message
NK1 (Continuous bing bong Highlighted numeric
ST WARNING sound), NK2 (Continuous ding data and “ST ALARM” During detection Blinking yellow
ding sound) or IEC standard (ceg) message
NK1 and NK2 (Single beep every Highlighted numeric
ADVISORY 20 s) or IEC standard (ec every data and “ST ALARM” Lights in yellow
20 s) message

* When arrhythmia analysis is turned on, the “TACHYCARDIA” or


“BRADYCARDIA” message also appears.

5-14 User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series


5. ALARM FUNCTION

Sound/Display Alarm
Alarm Alarm Level Alarm Sound Alarm Display
Duration Indicator LED
NK1 (Continuous pip sound), Highlighted numeric
CRISIS NK2 (Continuous ping sound) or data and “RR Blinking red
IEC standard (ceg-gC) ALARM” message
NK1 (Continuous bing bong Highlighted numeric
RR WARNING sound), NK2 (Continuous ding data and “RR During detection Blinking yellow
ding sound) or IEC standard (ceg) ALARM” message
NK1 and NK2 (Single beep every Highlighted numeric
ADVISORY 20 s) or IEC standard (ec every data and “RR Lights in yellow
20 s) ALARM” message
NK1 (Continuous pip sound), Highlighted 5
CRISIS NK2 (Continuous ping sound) or “APNEA ALARM” Blinking red
IEC standard (ceg-gC) message
NK1 (Continuous bing bong Highlighted
APNEA WARNING sound), NK2 (Continuous ding “APNEA ALARM” During detection Blinking yellow
ding sound) or IEC standard (ceg) message
NK1 and NK2 (Single beep every Highlighted
ADVISORY 20 s) or IEC standard (ec every “APNEA ALARM” Lights in yellow
20 s) message
NK1 (Continuous pip sound), Highlighted numeric
CRISIS NK2 (Continuous ping sound) or data and “SpO2 Blinking red
IEC standard (ceg-gC) ALARM” message
SpO2 During detection
NK1 (Continuous bing bong Highlighted numeric
WARNING sound), NK2 (Continuous ding data and “SpO2 Blinking yellow
ding sound) or IEC standard (ceg) ALARM” message
NK1 (Continuous pip sound), Highlighted numeric
CRISIS NK2 (Continuous ping sound) or data and “NIBP Blinking red
IEC standard (ceg-gC) ALARM” message
NK1 (Continuous bing bong Highlighted numeric
NIBP WARNING sound), NK2 (Continuous ding data and “NIBP During detection Blinking yellow
ding sound) or IEC standard (ceg) ALARM” message
NK1 and NK2 (Single beep every Highlighted numeric
ADVISORY 20 s) or IEC standard (ec every data and “NIBP Lights in yellow
20 s) ALARM” message
NK1 (Continuous pip sound), Highlighted numeric
CRISIS NK2 (Continuous ping sound) or data and “PRESS Blinking red
IEC standard (ceg-gC) ALARM” message
NK1 (Continuous bing bong Highlighted numeric
PRESS* WARNING sound), NK2 (Continuous ding data and “PRESS During detection Blinking yellow
ding sound) or IEC standard (ceg) ALARM” message
NK1 and NK2 (Single beep every Highlighted numeric
ADVISORY 20 s) or IEC standard (ec every data and “PRESS Lights in yellow
20 s) ALARM” message

* Only available for SVM-7503 and SVM-7523.

User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series 5-15


5. ALARM FUNCTION

Sound/Display Alarm
Alarm Alarm Level Alarm Sound Alarm Display
Duration Indicator LED
NK1 (Continuous pip sound), Highlighted numeric
CRISIS NK2 (Continuous ping sound) or data and “TEMP Blinking red
IEC standard (ceg-gC) ALARM” message
NK1 (Continuous bing bong Highlighted numeric
TEMP WARNING sound), NK2 (Continuous ding data and “TEMP During detection Blinking yellow
ding sound) or IEC standard (ceg) ALARM” message
NK1 and NK2 (Single beep every Highlighted numeric
ADVISORY 20 s) or IEC standard (ec every data and “TEMP Lights in yellow
20 s) ALARM” message
NK1 (Continuous pip sound), Highlighted numeric
CRISIS NK2 (Continuous ping sound) or data and “CO2 (E) Blinking red
IEC standard (ceg-gC) ALARM” message
CO2(E)* During detection
NK1 (Continuous bing bong Highlighted numeric
WARNING sound), NK2 (Continuous ding data and “CO2 (E) Blinking yellow
ding sound) or IEC standard (ceg) ALARM” message
NK1 (Continuous pip sound), Highlighted numeric
CRISIS NK2 (Continuous ping sound) or data and “CO2 (I) Blinking red
IEC standard (ceg-gC) ALARM” message
CO2(I)* During detection
NK1 (Continuous bing bong Highlighted numeric
WARNING sound), NK2 (Continuous ding data and “CO2 (I) Blinking yellow
ding sound) or IEC standard (ceg) ALARM” message

* Only available for SVM-7503 and SVM-7523.

Arrhythmia Alarms
Sound/Display Alarm
Alarm Alarm Level Alarm Sound Alarm Display
Duration Indicator LED
ASYSTOLE
NK1 (Continuous pip sound),
VF CRISIS NK2 (Continuous ping sound) or Highlighted message During detection Blinking red
IEC standard (ceg-gC)
VT
NK1 (Continuous pip sound),
CRISIS NK2 (Continuous ping sound) or Highlighted message Blinking red
VPC RUN, IEC standard (ceg-gC)

COUPLET, NK1 (Continuous bing bong


WARNING sound), NK2 (Continuous ding Highlighted message During detection Blinking yellow
EARLY VPC, ding sound) or IEC standard (ceg)
FREQ VPC NK1 and NK2 (Single beep every
ADVISORY 20 s) or IEC standard (ec every Highlighted message Lights in yellow
20 s)
NK1 (Continuous pip sound),
CRISIS NK2 (Continuous ping sound) or Highlighted message Blinking red
IEC standard (ceg-gC)
NK1 (Continuous bing bong
BIGEMINY WARNING sound), NK2 (Continuous ding Highlighted message During detection Blinking yellow
ding sound) or IEC standard (ceg)
NK1 and NK2 (Single beep every
ADVISORY 20 s) or IEC standard (ec every Highlighted message Lights in yellow
20 s)

5-16 User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series


5. ALARM FUNCTION

Technical Alarms
ECG related alarms
Sound/Display Alarm
Alarm Alarm Level Alarm Sound Alarm Display
Duration Indicator LED
CHECK NK1 (Continuous bing bong Highlighted
ELECTRODES WARNING sound), NK2 (Continuous ding numeric data and Blinking yellow
ding sound) or IEC standard (ceg) message

CHECK
ELECTRODE
–– 5
(electrode lead
name) During detection
NK1 and NK2 (Single beep every
Highlighted
ADVISORY 20 s) or IEC standard (ec every Lights in yellow
message
20 s)
CANNOT
ANALYSIS

MODULE
ERROR

CO2 related alarms (SVM-7503 and SVM-7523)


Alarm Display
Sound/Display Alarm
Alarm Alarm Level Alarm Sound When a window
Home screen Duration Indicator LED
is open
CO2 CAL??

CO2 CHANGE
ADAPTER NK1 and NK2
(Single beep
ADVISORY every 20 s) or Highlighted message During detection Lights in yellow
CO2 CHECK IEC standard (ec
SENSOR every 20 s)

CO2 SENSOR
ERROR

SpO2 related alarms


Alarm Display Alarm
Sound/Display
Alarm Alarm Level Alarm Sound When a window Indicator
Home screen Duration
is open LED
NK1 (Continuous
bing bong sound),
CHANGE NK2 (Continuous Blinking
WARNING Highlighted message During detection
PROBE ding ding sound) yellow
or IEC standard
(ceg)

User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series 5-17


5. ALARM FUNCTION

Alarm Display Alarm


Sound/Display
Alarm Alarm Level Alarm Sound When a window Indicator
Home screen Duration
is open LED
CANNOT
DETECT PULSE

CHECK PROBE
SITE
NK1 and NK2
CONNECTOR (Single beep
OFF Lights in
ADVISORY every 20 s) or Highlighted message During detection
yellow
IEC standard (ec
every 20 s)
LIGHT
INTERFERENCE

MODULE
ERROR
NK1 (Continuous
bing bong sound),
NK2 (Continuous Blinking
WARNING
ding ding sound) yellow
or IEC standard
CHECK PROBE (ceg) Highlighted message During detection
NK1 and NK2
(Single beep
Lights in
ADVISORY every 20 s) or
yellow
IEC standard (ec
every 20 s)

NIBP related alarms


Alarm Display Alarm
Sound/Display
Alarm Alarm Level Alarm Sound Home When a window Indicator
Duration
screen is open LED
NK1 (Continuous
CUFF OCCLUSION
bing bong sound),
NK2 (Continuous
WARNING Highlighted message During detection Blinking yellow
ding ding sound)
SAFETY CIRCUIT
or IEC standard
RUNNING
(ceg)

5-18 User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series


5. ALARM FUNCTION

Alarm Display Alarm


Sound/Display
Alarm Alarm Level Alarm Sound Home When a window Indicator
Duration
screen is open LED
AIR LEAK

CANNOT DETECT
PULSE

CHECK INTERVAL
SETTING
5
CHECK PATIENT
NK1 and NK2
TYPE
(Single beep
Lights in
ADVISORY every 20 s) or Highlighted message During detection
yellow
IEC standard (ec
CONNECTOR OFF
every 20 s)

HIGH CUFF PRESS

MEAS TIME-OUT

MODULE ERROR

SYSTOLIC OVER

IBP related alarms (SVM-7503 and SVM-7523)


Alarm display
Sound/Display Alarm
Alarm Alarm Level Alarm Sound Home When a window Duration Indicator LED
screen is open
PRESS CHECK
NK1 and NK2
SENSOR
(Single beep
ADVISORY every 20 s) or Highlighted message During detection Lights in yellow
IEC standard (ec
PRESS
every 20 s)
CONNECTOR OFF

Temperature related alarms


Alarm display Sound/ Alarm
Alarm Alarm Level Alarm Sound Home When a window Display Indicator
screen is open Duration LED
TEMP CHECK SENSOR NK1 and NK2 (Single
beep every 20 s) or During Lights in
ADVISORY Highlighted message
CONNECTOR OFF IEC standard (ec detection yellow
every 20 s)

User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series 5-19


5. ALARM FUNCTION

Other Alarms
Alarm
Alarm Sound/Display
Alarm Alarm Sound Alarm Display Indicator
Level Duration
LED

BATTERY ERROR NK1 (Continuous bing bong


Blinking
WARNING sound), NK2 (Continuous ding Highlighted message During detection
BATTERY WEAK yellow
ding sound) or IEC standard (ceg)
CLOCK IC
FAILURE

MPU MODULE
ERROR

NK1 and NK2 (Single beep every


PARAMETER Lights in
ADVISORY 20 s) or IEC standard (ec every Highlighted message During detection
NOT AVAILABLE yellow
20 s)

TRANSMITTER
CONNECTOR OFF

CHECK ALARM
OUT CABLE

Alarm Control Marks


When certain alarm functions are turned off, an alarm control mark is displayed
in the upper right corner of the screen.
Alarm is silenced by touching the [Silence Alarms] key on the bedside monitor.
Remaining minutes appears.
Alarms are suspended (paused) for a certain period.

Alarms are suspended infinitely or vital sign alarm limit is set to off.

Alarm sound is suspended infinitely.

Alarm is reset when [ALARM RESET] key is touched.

Individual Vital Signs Alarm Off Marks


The vital sign alarm off mark can be displayed at every parameter which has
the vital signs alarm limit set to OFF. The upper/lower alarm limits can also be
displayed at each parameter.
Set this setting at <LIMIT DISPLAY> of the ALARM window on the SYSTEM
SETUP window. See the Administrator’s Guide, Section 3. The default setting is
VALUES.

LIMIT DISPLAY set to MARK BRIGHT LIMIT DISPLAY set to MARK DIM LIMIT DISPLAY set to VALUES

5-20 User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series


5. ALARM FUNCTION

Flow of Alarm Function

Startmonitoring
Start monitoring
Suspend all

Suspend
Suspend all alarms by touching the ALL ALARMS
ALARMS
OFF
OFF key
key on the MENU window
The “ALL ALARMS
The “ALL ALARMSOFF” OFF”message
message with
with all all alarms
alarms off
off mark
all alarms

appears
mark at the top
appears of the
at the topscreen.
of the screen. Suspend
Suspend all
all alarms
alarms by
by touching
touching the SUSPEND
alarms indefinitely

Suspend
No alarms
alarms are
aregenerated
generateduntil the alarm function is is MONITORING key
MONITORING key on
on the
the MENU
MENU window
window

Suspend all
No until the alarm function
re-activated.
re-activated. The
The “SUSPEND MONITORING” and “ALARMS SUSPENDED”
5
indefinitely

messagewith
message withalarm
alarm suspended
suspended mark
mark alternately
alternately appears
appears at top
at the the
topthe
of of screen.
the screen. No alarms
No alarms are generated
are generated untiluntil the system
the system resumes
resumes

all alarms for a period


monitoring or
monitoring or alarm
alarm function
function is
is re-activated.
re-activated.

Suspend alarms by
Suspend all alarms bytouching
touchingthe
theSUSPEND
SUSPEND
ALARMS key
ALARMS key onon the
theMENU
MENUwindow
window
The
The “ALARMS
“ALARMS SUSPEND
SUSPENDED -- min” message
--- min” appears
message at the
appears at top
the
top
of of screen.
the the screen. No alarms
No alarms are generated
are generated for afor
seta period.
set period.

Arrhythmia
Arrhythmia Technical
Technical Interbed
Interbed
Vital sign
Vital sign alarm
alarm
alarm
alarm alarm
alarm alarm
alarm

Set the upper/lower limits ARRHYTHMIA


ARRHYTHMIAANALYSIS
ANALYSIS on on or Connect
Connect the monitor to the
on the ALARM LIMIT off
or on
off the ECG
on the window
ECG of the
window of the central
central monitor network
window or parameter SYSTEM
SYSTEM SETUPSETUP window
window
Alarm setting

window
Not
Not connected
connected
Off
Arrhythmia is
Arrhythmia is No
No interbed
interbed
setting and

On not Connected
Connected operation
operation
not analyzed
analyzed
and alarm

Set
Set alarm
alarm on
on or
or off
off for
for each
each Set interbed alarm on or off
arrhythmia and
arrhythmia and alarm
alarm threshold
threshold
alarm behaviors

on the SETTINGS page of


Off
Off on the
on theARRHYTH
ARRHYTH page page ofof the
the the INTERBED window
No
No alarms
alarms SYSTEM SETUP
SYSTEM SETUP window
window
behaviors

generated
generated
On
On Off
Off Off
Off
No
No alarms
alarms generated
generated No
Noalarms
alarms
On even
even if arrhythmia
arrhythmia isis On
On generated
generated
detected
detected.

An
An alarm
alarm is
is generated
generated when
when An alarm is generated An
Analarm
alarmisisgenerated
generated AnAnalarm
alarmisisgenerated
generatedwhen
the
the alarm
alarm setting
setting value
value is when an arrhythmia is when
whena atechnical
technicalalarm
alarmis anwhen
alarmanisalarm
detected on an
is detected
exceeded.
is exceeded. detected. detected.
is detected. interbed bed.
on an interbed bed.

Silence
Silence Alarms
Alarms
Identify
Identifythe
thecause
causeofofthe
thegenerated
generatedalarm
alarmand
andsilence
silencethe
thealarm
alarm Identify
Identifythe
thecause
causeofofthe
the
Silence an alarm

by
bypressing
pressingthe
theSilence
[SilenceAlarms key
Alarms] key generated
generatedalarm
alarmand
and
silence
silencethe
thealarm
alarmbyby
The
The“ALARMS SILENCED -----min”
“ALARM SILENCED min”message
message and thethe
and period in which
period the
in which touching
alarm is silenced appearappear
at the top of the touchingthetheSILENCE
SILENCE
the alarm is silenced at the topscreen.
of the screen. ALARM
ALARMkey keyononthe
the
INTERBED
INTERBEDwindowwindow

User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series 5-21


5. ALARM FUNCTION

Silencing/Suspending/Resetting Alarms

Overview

Silencing an Alarm
When an alarm occurs, you can silence the alarm sound and indications for
1, 2 or 3 minutes by touching the [Silence Alarms] key on the screen. When a
vital signs alarm or arrhythmia alarm is silenced, the alarm resumes after the
alarm silence ends. When a technical alarm other than the following alarms is
silenced, the alarm indication does not resume after the alarm silence ends. If the
following alarms are silenced, the alarm resumes after the alarm silence ends.
• BATTERY ERROR
• BATTERY WEAK
• ECG CANNOT ANALYZE
• NIBP CUFF OCCLUSION
• NIBP SAFETY CIRCUIT RUNNING
• SpO2 CHANGE PROBE
When several alarms occur together and the [Silence Alarms] key is touched,
all alarms are silenced. To cancel vital sign or arrhythmia alarm silence, touch
the [Silence Alarms] key <SILENCE ALARMS TIME> is set on the ALARM
window of the SYSTEM SETUP window. Refer to the Administrator’s Guide,
Section 3.
When [Silence Alarms] key is touched, technical alarms can be reset, or alarms
can be silenced. You can select on <SILENCE KEY FUNCTION> of SYSTEM
SETUP window.
SILENCE KEY FUNCTION:
• RESET TECHNICAL ALARMS When this function is selected and a technical
alarm occurs, touch [Silence Alarms] key to reset
the technical alarm. When the key is touched, the
alarm sound is silenced and the alarm message is
disappeared.
• SILENCE ONLY When this function is selected and a technical alarm
occurs, touch [Silence Alarms] key to silence the
technical alarm. When the key is touched, the alarm
sound is silenced, but the alarm message is still
displayed on the screen.

Suspending Alarms
All alarms can also be suspended before they occur. During alarm suspension, all
alarms are off. This monitor has two types of alarm suspension according to the
settings of the SILENCE/SUSPEND page of the ALARM window.

5-22 User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series


5. ALARM FUNCTION

Example of How This How the Alarm Function


Monitor Operation Key to Touch
Function is Used Comes Back
When 1 min, 2 min or 3 min set on
the <SUSPEND ALARMS TIME>
Suspends all alarms for 1 [SUSPEND ALARMS] key elapse.
For electrode replacement.
min, 2 min or 3 min on the screen
When the [SUSPEND ALARMS]
key is touched again.
When the [SUSPEND
When the patient is being
MONITORING] key is touched
Suspends all alarms and examined.
[SUSPEND MONITORING] again.
NIBP STAT/SIM and auto
key on the screen
measurement indefinitely When the patient is connected When the condition set for the
5
to a heart-lung machine or <ALARM ACTIVATION DELAY>
being examined. is met. (See the table below)
When you want to turn off [ALL ALARMS OFF] key on When the [ALL ALARMS OFF]
an unnecessary alarm in such the screen key is touched again.
situations as when the patient’s
Suspends all alarms vital signs are obviously out of [ALARM RESET]* key on
indefinitely normal range and the medical the screen
staff are aware that the patient When a new alarm occurs.
* When the key is assigned to
is in an alarm condition and are
a function key.
currently treating the patient.

Setting of <ALARM ACTIVATION DELAY>


Condition
on the SYSTEM SETUP Window
Alarm function activates when ECG or SpO2 is monitored or NIBP* is
measured and a value is displayed.
AUTO
* When SYS, DIA or MAP value is measured.
The alarm function is also recovered when the heart rate is 0.
When any of the following requirements is met.
1 min
ECG, SpO2 or IBP is continuously monitored for the selected time.
2 min
NIBP is measured (SYS, DIA or MAP value is measured).
3 min
Heart rate becomes 0.

The [SUSPEND MONITORING], [SUSPEND ALARMS] or [ALL ALARMS


OFF] key is displayed on the MENU window. The key to be displayed on the
MENU window is set on the ALARM window of the SYSTEM SETUP window.
Refer to the Administrator’s Guide, Section 3.

User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series 5-23


5. ALARM FUNCTION

The [SUSPEND ALARMS], [SUSPEND MONITORING] and [ALARM


RESET] keys can be assigned to one of the function keys. Refer to the
Administrator’s Guide, Section 3.
The alarm off key on the MENU window

Alarm off keys

ALARM INACTIVATION Setting Displayed Keys

SUSPEND ALARMS

ALL ALARMS OFF

Alarm off function


SUSPEND MONITORING key
Use this key to temporarily stop patient monitoring for examination. When
this key is touched, all alarms and NIBP STAT/SIM and auto measurements
are suspended. Alarms resume when the [SUSPEND MONITORING] key is
touched again or when the <ALARM ACTIVATION DELAY> condition is met.
SUSPEND ALARMS key
Use this key to suspend all alarms for the time set in <SUSPEND ALARMS
TIME>.
ALARM RERET key
When an alarm occurs, you can reset the alarm by touching the [ALARM
RESET] key. While the key is touched, the "ALARM RESET" message appears,
the measuring value is highlighted and the alarm sound is deactivated. The alarm
reoccurs when an alarm different from the reset one occurs, or cause of alarm
was eliminated temporarily.
The [ALARM RESET] key can be assigned to a function key on the System
Setup window.
ALL ALARMS OFF key
Use this key to suspend all alarms indefinitely. Alarms resume when the [ALL
ALARMS OFF] key is touched again.

5-24 User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series


5. ALARM FUNCTION

Silencing Alarms after Alarm Occurrence


During alarm silence,
• the “ALARMS SILENCED” message, the silenced mark and the remaining
minutes are displayed
• the alarm sound is silenced
The alarm silence time can be set to 1 min, 2 min or 3 min at <SILENCE
ALARMS TIME> on the ALARM window of the SYSTEM SETUP window.
Refer to the Administrator’s Guide, Section 3. The default setting is 2 minutes.
If another alarm occurs during alarm silence, the alarm sound, indication and
5
recording occur as usual. The alarm silence does not affect alarms which occur
after the [Silence Alarms] key is touched. (A new occurrence of the silenced
alarm condition is treated as a different alarm.)

Silencing Alarms
Touch the [Silence Alarms] key. The “ALARMS SILENCED” message and the
time remaining in the alarm silence are displayed on the screen.

Canceling Alarm Silence


Vital sign and arrhythmia alarm silence can be cancelled by pressing the [Silence
Alarms] key. The alarm silence mark disappears and all silenced alarms are
resumed. Technical alarm silence cannot be canceled.

Suspending Alarms Before Alarm Occurrence

Suspending Alarms
By touching the [SUSPEND ALARMS] key, all alarms for the patient are
suspended for 1 min, 2 min or 3 min. The alarm suspend time can be set to 1
min, 2 min or 3 min at <SUSPEND ALARMS TIME> on the ALARM window
of the SYSTEM SETUP window. Refer to the Administrator’s Guide, Section 3.
The default setting is 2 minutes.

During alarm suspension, all alarms are suspended and


• the “ALARMS SUSPENDED” message is displayed
• the alarm sound is silenced
• all alarm recording is suspended
Resuming Alarms
Alarms resume when the set minutes elapses or when the [SUSPEND ALARMS]
key is touched again.

User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series 5-25


5. ALARM FUNCTION

Suspending All Alarms Indefinitely


You can suspend all alarms for an indefinite time by touching the [ALL
ALARMS OFF] key on the MENU window. When you start monitoring or
during monitoring, you can use these functions to turn all alarms off.
The [ALL ALARMS OFF] key is displayed on the MENU window when it
is selected at <ALARM INACTIVATION> on the ALARM window of the
SYSTEM SETUP window. Refer to the Administrator’s Guide, Section 3.
The [ALARM RESET] key is displayed on the function keys area when it is
selected on the KEY window of the SYSTEM SETUP window. Refer to the
Administrator’s Guide, Section 3.

WARNING
Do not turn all alarms off with the [ALL ALARMS OFF] key or
[ALARM RESET] key when there is no medical staff around the
patient or when the patient is connected to a ventilator.

1 Touch the [MENU] key. The MENU window appears.

2 Touch the [ALL ALARMS OFF] key. The following window appears for
confirmation.

3 Touch the [YES] key. If you wish to cancel, touch the [NO] key.
The “ALL ALARMS OFF” message appears on the screen.

5-26 User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series


5. ALARM FUNCTION

4 Or, touch the [ALARM RESET] key on the upper left.

5 The “ALARM RESET” message appears on the screen.

5
Resuming Alarms
To resume alarms, touch the [ALL ALARMS OFF] key again. Alarms can only
resume by touching the [ALL ALARMS OFF] key. Or, alarms resume when a
new alarm occurs.
Suspending All Alarms and NIBP STAT and Auto Measurement Indefinitely
You can suspend all alarms and NIBP STAT/SIM and auto measurements for an
indefinite time by touching the [SUSPEND MONITORING] key.
The [SUSPEND MONITORING] key is displayed on the MENU window when
the SUSPEND ALARMS is selected at <ALARM INACTIVATION> on the
ALARM window of the SYSTEM SETUP window. Refer to the Administrator’s
Guide, Section 3.

1 Touch the [MENU] key. The MENU window appears.

2 Touch the [SUSPEND MONITORING] key.


The “SUSPEND MONITORING” and “ALARMS SUSPENDED” messages
appear on the screen alternately.

Resuming Alarms
To resume alarms, touch the [SUSPEND MONITORING] key again. Alarms
also resume when the <ALARM ACTIVATION DELAY> condition is met.
To resume NIBP measurement in STAT or Auto mode, touch the [NIBP Start/
Stop] key. Refer to Section 15.

User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series 5-27


5. ALARM FUNCTION

Turing Automatic Alarm Recording On/Off


If ALARM RECORDING on the RECORD window is set to ON and a vital sign
or arrhythmia alarm occurs, waveforms beginning 8 seconds before and ending
12 seconds after the alarm are automatically recorded. If this setting is OFF, you
can still record waveforms manually.
Recording is only available when the optional recorder module is installed in the
monitor.
You can select which waveform(s) to record by changing the recording pattern.
See Section 8.
To cancel recording while an alarm is being recorded, touch the Record key .
NOTE: When an arrhythmia alarm is turned OFF on the ARRHYTH
ALARMS or ARRHYTH ALARMS window of the ECG window,
there will be no alarm recording for that arrhythmia type even
when <ALARM RECORDING> is set to ON on the RECORD
window.
To set automatic alarm recording on or off:

1 Display the RECORD window.


Touch the [MENU] key → [RECORD] key.

2 Touch the [ALARM RECORDING] key. The ALARM RECORDING


window appears.

3 Touch the [ON] or [OFF] key to set alarm recording on or off.

4 Touch the key to close the window.

5 Touch the [HOME] key to return to the home screen.

5-28 User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series


5. ALARM FUNCTION

Setting Alarms

Overview
There are three ways to set alarm limits and on/off settings:
• Set all alarm limits at the same time on one window.
• Set a group of alarm items all together to a preset pattern using an alarm
master. 5
• Set the alarms for individual parameters separately from the ECG, RESP/CO2,
SpO2, NIBP, PRESS and TEMP windows. See Sections 9 to 15.
Vital signs alarm limits can be set on two different windows: the ALARM
LIMITS window and the alarm setting page for the individual parameter
window. When you change an alarm setting on one window, the same setting on
the other window is also automatically changed.
Arrhythmia alarm limits can be set on MAIN tab - ECG page - PARAMETERS
window of the SYSTEM SETUP window.
When the ADMIT MODE in the SYSTEM SETUP window is set to AUTO, the
setting remains in memory even when the power is turned off. After 30 minutes,
the setting returns to the master settings. When the ADMIT MODE in the
SYSTEM SETUP window is set to MANUAL, you can select whether to save or
initialize the master settings.
To set NIBP alarm limits for neonate or child, the patient type on ADMIT
window must be changed to NEONATE or CHILD.

Alarm Limits Ranges


The following tables show the setting ranges for each alarm. Any upper and
lower limit can also be set to OFF.

CAUTION
When the alarm limit is set to OFF, there will be no alarm for that
limit. Be careful when you set the alarm limit to OFF.

User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series 5-29


5. ALARM FUNCTION

Vital Signs Alarms


If the upper limit is set to a value above the maximum, or the lower limit is set to
a value below the minimum, the alarm for that upper/lower limit is automatically
set to OFF.
Window Setting Items Settings Range Step Default Setting
ADULT: 140 beats/min
OFF, 16 to 300 beats/min
Upper CHILD: 170 beats/min
HR/PR (OFF, 31 to 300 beats/min)
NEONATE: 200 beats/min
(When SYNC SOURCE is set 1
ADULT: 50 beats/min
to SpO2) OFF, 15 to 299 beats/min
Lower CHILD: 75 beats/min
(OFF, 30 to 299 beats/min)
NEONATE: 100 beats/min
VPC* 1
Upper OFF, 1 to 99 beats/min 1 OFF
OFF, –1.99 to 2.00 mV 0.01
Upper OFF
OFF, –19.9 to 20.0 mm 0.1
ST-I to ST-V6
OFF, –2.00 to 1.99 mV 0.01
Lower OFF
OFF, –20.0 to 19.9 mm 0.1
ADULT, CHILD: OFF
Upper OFF, 51 to 100 %SpO2
NEONATE: 95 %SpO2
SpO2 1
ADULT, CHILD: 90 %SpO2
Lower OFF, 50 to 99 %SpO2
NEONATE: 85 %SpO2
Upper OFF, 2 to 150 counts/min
RR 2 OFF
Lower OFF, 0 to 148 counts/min
ALARM LIMITS

APNEA Upper OFF, 5 to 40 s 5 20 s


ADULT: 38.0 °C
OFF, 0.1 to 45.0 °C 0.1 CHILD: 38.5 °C
NEONATE: 39.0 °C
Upper
ADULT: 100.0 °F
TEMP1/TEMP2
OFF, 33.0 to 113.0 °F 1.0 CHILD: 101.0 °F
NEONATE: 102.0 °F
OFF, 0.0 to 44.9 °C 0.1
Lower OFF
OFF, 32.0 to 112.0 °F 1.0
ADULT: 180 mmHg
OFF, 15 to 260 mmHg 5 CHILD: 140 mmHg
NEONATE: 100 mmHg
Upper
ADULT: 24.0 kPa
OFF, 2.0 to 34.5 kPa 0.5 CHILD: 18.5 kPa
NEONATE: 13.5 kPa
NIBP-SYS
ADULT: 80 mmHg
OFF, 10 to 255 mmHg 5 CHILD: 65 mmHg
NEONATE: 50 mmHg
Lower
ADULT: 10.5 kPa
OFF, 1.5 to 34.0 kPa 0.5 CHILD: 8.5 kPa
NEONATE: 6.5 kPa

5-30 User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series


5. ALARM FUNCTION

Window Setting Items Settings Range Step Default Setting


OFF, 15 to 260 mmHg 5
Upper OFF
OFF, 2.0 to 34.5 kPa 0.5
NIBP-DIA
OFF, 10 to 255 mmHg 5
Lower OFF
OFF, 1.5 to 34.0 kPa 0.5
OFF, 15 to 260 mmHg 5
Upper OFF
OFF, 2.0 to 34.5 kPa 0.5
NIBP-MAP
OFF, 10 to 255 mmHg 5
Lower OFF
OFF, 1.5 to 34.0 kPa 0.5
OFF, 2 to 99 mmHg 1
5
Upper OFF
OFF, 0.2 to 13.0 kPa 0.1
CO2 (E)*2

OFF, 1 to 98 mmHg 1
Lower OFF
OFF, 0.1 to 12.9 kPa 0.1
ALARM LIMITS

ADULT, NEONATE: OFF


OFF, 1 to 99 mmHg 1
CHILD: 3
CO2 (I)*2 Upper
ADULT, NEONATE: OFF
OFF, 0.1 to 12.9 kPa 0.1
CHILD: 0.4
OFF, -48 to 300 mmHg 2
Upper OFF
OFF, -6.4 to 40.0 kPa 0.5
PRESS1-SYS/PRESS2-SYS* 2

OFF, -50 to 298 mmHg 2


Lower OFF
OFF, -6.5 to 39.5 kPa 0.5
OFF, -48 to 300 mmHg 2
Upper OFF
OFF, -6.0 to 40.0 kPa 0.5
PRESS1-DIA/PRESS2-DIA** 2

OFF, -50 to 298 mmHg 2


Lower OFF
OFF, -6.5 to 39.5 kPa 0.5
OFF, -48 to 300 mmHg 2
Upper OFF
PRESS1-MEAN/PRESS2- OFF, -6.0 to 40.0 kPa 0.5
MEAN*2 OFF, -50 to 298 mmHg 2
Lower OFF
OFF, -6.5 to 39.5 kPa 0.5

*1 Only when the <ARRHYTHMIA ANALYSIS> is set to ON.


*2 Only available for SVM-7503 and SVM-7523 bedside monitors.

User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series 5-31


5. ALARM FUNCTION

Arrhythmia Alarms
Window Setting Items Settings Range Step Default Setting
ON fixed
ASYSTOLE 1 ON (5 s)
3 to 10 s

ARRHYTH ALARMS
VF ON fixed – ON
VT ON fixed – ON
ON, OFF
VPC RUN 1 ON (3 beats)
3 to 8 beats
COUPLET ON, OFF – OFF
EARLY VPC ON, OFF – OFF
BIGEMINY ON, OFF – OFF

Setting Vital Signs Alarms Individually


1 Display the ALARM LIMITS window.
Touch the [MENU] key → [ALARM LIMITS] key.

Selected parameter

Parameter
keys
Upper limit

Upper limit slider

Current measured value Setting bar


Lower limit

Lower limit slider

2 Touch the parameter key for the limit you want to change.

3 Touch and drag the sliders to the desired level on the setting bar. Use the
or to adjust the setting.
If the upper limit is set to a value above the maximum or the lower limit is
set to a value below the minimum, the alarm is set to OFF.

4 Touch the key to close the window.

5 Repeat steps 2 to 4 to change alarm settings for other parameters.

6 Touch the [HOME] key to return to the home screen.

5-32 User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series


5. ALARM FUNCTION

Automatically Setting All Upper and Lower Alarm Limits (Including ST)
You can automatically set all upper and lower alarm limits (including ST) with
respect to the current measuring values. This function allows you to suitably set
alarm limits according to a patient.
NOTE: You cannot automatically set any parameters not currently
measured or assigned with invalid values.

Automatic Setting Range


Automatically set Automatically set
Alarm Item
upper limit value lower limit value
Unit 5
HR HR × 1.25 HR × 0.75 beat/min
PR PR × 1.25 PR × 0.75 count/min
ST + 0.5 ST - 0.5 mV
ST
ST + 5 ST - 5 mm
SpO2 —* SpO2 - 5 %SpO2
RR RR × 1.25 + 4 RR × 0.75 - 4 count/min
APNEA (60/RR) × 2 — s
TEMP + 0.5 TEMP - 0.5 °C
TEMP
TEMP + 0.4 TEMP - 0.4 °F

SYS, DIA, NIBP × 1.25 + 10 NIBP × 0.75 - 10 mmHg


NIBP
MAP NIBP × 1.25 + 1.3 NIBP × 0.75 - 1.3 kPa
CO2 (I) CO2 (I) × 1.25 —
mmHg
CO2 (E) CO2 (E) × 1.25 CO2 (E) × 0.75
SYS, DIA,
PRESS IBP × 1.25 + 10 IBP × 0.75 - 10 mmHg
MAP
IBP × 1.25 + 10 IBP × 0.75 - 10 mmHg
IBP
IBP × 1.25 + 1.3 IBP × 0.75 - 1.3 kPa

* Not automatically set (the upper limit value is greater than the lower limit
value).

User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series 5-33


5. ALARM FUNCTION

1 Display the ALARM LIMITS window.


Touch the [MENU] key → [ALARM LIMITS] key.

2 Set the automatic setting.


i) Touch the [AUTOMATIC] key. The confirmation message “Automatically
set all parameters based on current data?” appears.

ii) Touch the [YES] key. All upper and lower alarm limits (including ST) are
replaced by the values according to current measurements.

NOTE: Check for valid automatic settings.

3 Touch the [HOME] key to return to the home screen.

5-34 User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series


5. ALARM FUNCTION

Setting All Vital Signs Alarm Limits to a Preset Pattern (Alarm Master)
For fast and easy alarm setup, a group of alarm items can be set all together to
one group of preset settings. This is called an alarm master. This is useful, for
example, if there are typical alarm settings at your hospital, or you have certain
alarm settings for certain patients.
You can also change individual alarm settings, as described in previous pages,
after setting all alarms with an alarm master.
The alarm masters are set by the administrator on the MASTER window of the
SYSTEM SETUP window.
5
1 Display the ALARM LIMITS window.
Touch the [MENU] key → [ALARM LIMITS] key.

2 Touch the [ALARM MASTER] key. The “APPLY SETTING FROM


MASTER?” message appears.

3 Touch the [YES] key to change all settings to the values set on the MAIN
ALARMS page - MATER window - SYSTEM SETUP window.
Touch the [NO] key to cancel changing the alarm settings to the alarm
master settings.

4 Touch the [HOME] key to return to the home screen.

User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series 5-35


5. ALARM FUNCTION

Checking Arrhythmia Alarm Settings


You can check the arrhythmia alarm settings on the ARRHYTH ALARMS
window. You need a password to change the settings. Refer to Section 3 of the
Administrator’s Guide.
For details about arrhythmia monitoring, refer to “Monitoring Arrhythmia” in
Section 9.

WARNING
For arrhythmia monitoring, set <ARRHYTHMIA ANALYSIS> on the
PARAMETERS window of the SYSTEM SETUP window to ON.
Otherwise, there is no sound or indication for arrhythmia alarms.

CAUTION
When the alarm is turned OFF for an arrhythmia, there will be no
alarm for that arrhythmia type. There is no message or mark to
indicate that a certain arrhythmia alarm is turned off. Therefore, be
careful when you turn off an arrhythmia alarm.

1 Display the ARRHYTH ALARMS window.


Touch the [MENU] key → [ARRHYTH ALARMS] key.

2 Confirm the settings. An administrator can change the setting by touching


the [SETUP] key. Refer to “ARRHYTH Page” in Section 3 of the
Administrator’s Guide.

3 Touch the [HOME] key to return to the home screen.

5-36 User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series


5. ALARM FUNCTION

Interbed Alarm
When an interbed alarm occurs, the monitor acts as follows.
NOTE: Parameters which cannot be measured on this monitor are
displayed as “ALARM”.
The monitor action depends on the INTERBED ALARM setting. For details,
refer to the “INTERBED Window” section.
INTERBED ALARM Setting ON OFF
5
Alarm Indicator Off
Three continuous ping sounds (only No sound
Alarm Sound
when the alarm is detected)
The bed ID of interbed alarm The bed ID is highlighted.* The bed ID is displayed in white.
bed is displayed in the upper
right corner. When two or
more alarms are detected, the
Home Screen bed IDs alternate.
Vital sign and arrhythmia alarm: remain Vital sign and arrhythmia alarm: remain
After the alarm is highlighted in white font
Bed ID
silenced.
Technical alarm: Bed ID disappears
The bed ID and interbed alarm message is highlighted.*

Interbed alarm message is


displayed
Multiple Beds
Window

Bed ID Displayed in white —


After the alarm is
Vial sign and arrhythmia alarm: remain highlighted
silenced Alarm
Technical alarm: the message disappears
The bed ID and alarm message is highlighted.*
The alarm message and bed
ID are highlighted in the
alarm priority color. When
the vital sign alarm occurs,
Individual Bed the measurement value is
Window also highlighted.

Bed ID Displayed in white —


After the alarm is
Vial sign and arrhythmia alarm: remain highlighted
silenced Alarm
Technical alarm: the message disappears

* When the alarm of crisis or warning level occurs, the message blinks.

User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series 5-37


6 Review Window

General...........................................................................6-3
6

Review Recording..........................................................................6-3

Time Bar.........................................................................6-4
Scrolling the Time Bar....................................................................6-4

TREND GRAPH Window...............................................6-5


Overview........................................................................................6-5
Displaying the TREND GRAPH Window........................................6-6
Selecting Parameters for the Trendgraph Display..........................6-7
Changing the Trendgraph Scale.....................................................6-8
Changing the Trendgraph Display Format.....................................6-8
Recording the Trendgraph............................................................6-10

TREND TABLE Window............................................... 6-11


Overview......................................................................................6-11
Displaying the TREND TABLE Window........................................6-11
Scrolling the Trend Table..........................................................6-12
Selecting Parameters for the TREND TABLE Display..................6-12
Selecting the Measurement Interval.............................................6-13
Recording the Trend Table...........................................................6-14

NIBP TABLE Window..................................................6-15


Overview......................................................................................6-15
Displaying the NIBP TABLE Window............................................6-15
Selecting Parameters for the NIBP Trend Display...................6-16
Recording the NIBP Trend Table..................................................6-17

RECALL Window.........................................................6-18
General.........................................................................................6-18
Arrhythmia List.........................................................................6-18
Displaying the RECALL Window..................................................6-19
Scrolling the Arrhythmia Recall Files.......................................6-19
Selecting the Arrhythmia Types to be Saved as a Recall File......6-20
Displaying the Actual Size Waveform of the Selected Arrhythmia
Recall File.....................................................................................6-20
Arrhythmia Waveform Annotation........................................... 6-20
Recording the Arrhythmia Recall Waveform.................................6-21
Recording on the ARRHYTH HISTORY Window....................6-21
Recording on the Actual Size ECG Waveform Window.......... 6-22

Alarm History Window................................................6-23


Displaying the ALARM HISTORY Window...................................6-23
Scrolling the Alarm History Files...................................................6-24
Recording the Alarm History File..................................................6-24
Recording the Alarm History Files.......................................... 6-24

OCRG Window.............................................................6-26
Displaying the OCRG Window.....................................................6-26
Changing the OCRG Display Setting...........................................6-27
Changing the Trendgraph Scale for Heart Rate and SpO2 and
Sensitivity for Respiration.............................................................6-28
Recording the OCRG Trend.........................................................6-29

Full Disclosure Window..............................................6-30


Displaying the FULL DISC Window..............................................6-30
Scrolling the Full Disclosure Waveform........................................6-32
Recording the Full Disclosure Waveform.....................................6-32
Recording the Full Disclosure Waveform................................ 6-32
Recording the Enlarged ECG Waveform......................................6-33
Recording the Enlarged ECG Waveform................................ 6-33
6. REVIEW WINDOW

General
You can review saved data on the following review windows. All windows and
pages can display the data of past 120 hours.
• TREND TABLE window: Displays vital sign data of past 120 hours.
• NIBP TABLE window: Displays vital sign data at the NIBP measurement of past
120 hours.
• TREND GRAPH window: Displays trendgraphs of the past 120 hours.
• RECALL window: Displays arrhythmia waveforms from 4 seconds before to
4 seconds after the arrhythmia detection. Up to 120 hours
of files can be saved.
• FULL DISC window: Displays up to 120 hours of compressed and expanded
6
ECG waveforms.
• ALARM HISTORY Displays a table of vital sign alarms and arrhythmia
window: alarms. Up to 120 hours of files can be saved.
• OCRG window: Displays the heart rate, SpO2 and impedance respiration
trendgraphs of the past 120 hours. OCRG window is
available when the patient type setting is NEONATE.

NOTE • When changing the review window, the data at the cursor on
the original window is also displayed on the second window. For
example, if the FULL DISC window is centered on 14:30, and
the window is changed, the ALARM HISTORY window will be
centered on 14:30.
• When <ADMIT MODE> in the SYSTEM SETUP window is set
to AUTO and the monitor power is turned on after the power
has been off for more than 30 minutes, the stored data for the
previous patient (patient information, trend table, NIBP table,
arrhythmia recall, full disclosure, trendgraph and alarm history)
is deleted. Even if <ADMIT MODE> is set to MANUAL, data
(patient information, trend table, NIBP table, arrhythmia recall,
full disclosure, trendgraph and alarm history) is deleted if the
monitor is off for more than 24 hours.
• The oldest file is deleted when the maximum number of files are
saved.
• Do not disconnect the power cord while the monitor power is
on. The data may be lost.

Review Recording
You can record review data. For details of recording, refer to the Section 8
“Recording”.

User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series 6-3


6. REVIEW WINDOW

Time Bar
The time bar is displayed at the lower part of the review window. You can
display the trendgraph, table, NIBP table, recall event, alarm history and full
disclosure of the time by touching the desired time on the time bar.

Scrolling the Time Bar


The time bar can be scrolled by touching the or key on the time bar.

: Scroll the time bar to the left.


: Scroll the time bar to the right.
The latest time is displayed in white and the older times are displayed in green
alternately.

6-4 User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series


6. REVIEW WINDOW

TREND GRAPH Window

Overview
There are 2 trendgraphs on the TREND GRAPH window. You can select
common or separate scales for each trendgraph. Common scale trendgraph can
display trendgraphs for up to 3 selected parameters and separate scale trendgraph
can display trendgraphs for up to 2 selected parameters of the past 120 hours.
You can record trendgraphs on the optional recorder.
The maximum, mean and minimum values of all monitoring parameters are
automatically acquired every 1 minute for the trendgraph. The acquired values 6
are 1-minute averaged data. The frequency of data display depends on the
selected trend time.
1 or 2 h: 1 min
4 h: 2 min
8, 24 h: 4 min
120 h: 15 min

NOTE: When <ADMIT MODE> in the SYSTEM SETUP window is set to


AUTO and the monitor power is turned on more than 30 minutes
after turning power off, the stored data in the monitor is deleted.
Even if <ADMIT MODE> is set to MANUAL, data is deleted when
the monitor is turned off for more than 24 hours.
The following table shows the available trend parameters, screen displays and
scales.
Parameter Description Vertical Scale Range
HR Heart rate (beats/min) 0 - 300
PR Pulse rate (beats/min) 0 - 300
VPC VPC rate (VPCs/min) 0 - 100
RR Respiration rate (breaths/min) 0 - 150
-2.0 - 2.0 (mV)
ST ST level (mV, mm)
-20.0 - 20.0 (mm)
0 - 300 (mmHg)
NIBP NIBP (mmHg, kPa)
0.0 - 40.0 (kPa)
Saturated oxygen from pulse oximeter
SpO2 0 - 100
(%SpO2)
0.0 - 45.0 (°C)
TEMP Temperature (°C, °F)
0.0 - 115.0 (°F)
0 - 300 (mmHg)
PRESS* Invasive Blood Pressure (mmHg, kPa)
0.0 - 40.0 (kPa)
0 - 150 (mmHg)
CO2* End-tidal CO2 Value (mmHg, kPa)
0.0 - 20.0 (kPa)

* Only available for SVM-7503 and SVM-7523 bedside monitor.


The trendgraph can be recorded on the optional recorder.

User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series 6-5


6. REVIEW WINDOW

Displaying the TREND GRAPH Window


1 Touch the [MENU] key to display the MENU window.

2 Touch the [TREND GRAPH] key. The TREND GRAPH window appears.
When TREND GRAPH is assigned to one of the function keys at the upper
left of the screen, the trendgraph window can be displayed by touching
the TREND GRAPH function key. Refer to “KEYS Window” in the
Administrator’s Guide, Section 3 to assign a function to the function key.

Display other review windows

Scale Cursor can be


Display the parameter dragged with
selected on the your finger
PARAMETER SETUP
window

Display the SCALE


SETUP window
Record the trendgraph
on the WS-752P
recorder module

Display the PARAMETER Display the PARAMETER SETUP window


SETUP window Time bar

You can change time bar time interval by touching the or key above the
time bar. When the key is touched, the interval changes 120 h → 24 h → 8 h
→ 4 h → 2 h → 1 h. When the key is touched, the interval changes 1 h → 2 h
→ 4 h → 8 h → 24 h → 120 h. The time bar can be scrolled by touching the
or key on the time bar.
You can select the trendgraph parameters and the display format on the
PARAMETER SETUP window, and the scale on the SCALE SETUP window.
For details on the time bar, refer to the “Time Bar” section.
To return to the home screen, touch the [HOME] key.

6-6 User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series


6. REVIEW WINDOW

Selecting Parameters for the Trendgraph Display


You can change the trendgraph parameters. COMMON scale can display up to 3
parameters and SEPARATE scale can display up to 2 parameters.

1 Touch the [SETUP] key on the TREND GRAPH window. The


PARAMETER SETUP window appears.

2 Select the GRAPH 1 or GRAPH 2 page.

Selectable
parameters

Unselect the
parameters
Trendgraph Keys for displaying
display position other parameters

3 Select the scale in the <TRENDGRAPH SCALE>.

4 Select the display position 1, 2 or 3 on the trendgraph.

5 Select the parameter by touching the desired parameter key. Use the [NONE]
key to deselect the parameter.

6 Touch the key to close the window.

User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series 6-7


6. REVIEW WINDOW

Changing the Trendgraph Scale


You can change the trendgraph scale for each parameter.

1 Touch the [SCALE] key on the TREND GRAPH window. The SCALE
SETUP window appears.

Trendgraph
parameter
Upper limit slider

Setting bar

Lower limit slider

2 Select the parameter of position 1, 2 or 3.

3 Touch and drag the sliders to the desired level on the setting bar.

4 Touch the key to close the window.

Changing the Trendgraph Display Format


You can change the display format of the trendgraph. Selecting [MAX-MIN]
key displays the maximum and minimum values on the trendgraph. Selecting
[AVERAGE] key displays the mean values on the trendgraph.
MAX-MIN

6-8 User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series


6. REVIEW WINDOW

AVERAGE

6
1 Touch the [SETUP] key on the TREND GRAPH window. The
PARAMETER SETUP window appears.

2 Select the GRAPH 1 or GRAPH 2 page.

3 Select MAX-MIN or AVERAGE in the <TRENDGRAPH STYLE> box.

4 Touch the key to close the window.

User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series 6-9


6. REVIEW WINDOW

Recording the Trendgraph


The trendgraph displayed on the TREND GRAPH window can be recorded on
the optional recorder.

1 Display the trendgraph you want to record on the TREND TABLE window.

2 Touch the [RECORD] key. The RECORD window appears.

3 Touch the [RECORD] key and recording starts.


To stop recording, touch the Record key .

4 Touch the key to close the window.

Recording example

The trendgraphs are recorded as displayed on the TREND GRAPH window.

6-10 User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series


6. REVIEW WINDOW

TREND TABLE Window

Overview
The TREND TABLE window displays monitoring parameter data of up to 15
selected parameters as a table and you can change the display interval. One page
shows 6 files. Each file appears in a separate column. Up to 120 hours of files
of periodic vital signs can be created. The table can be recorded on the optional
recorder module.
NOTE: When <ADMIT MODE> in the SYSTEM SETUP window is set to
AUTO and the monitor power is turned on more than 30 minutes 6
after turning power off, the stored data in the monitor is deleted.
Even if <ADMIT MODE> is set to MANUAL, data is deleted when
the monitor is turned off for more than 24 hours.

Displaying the TREND TABLE Window


1 Touch the [MENU] key to display the MENU window.

2 Touch the [TREND TABLE] key. The TREND TABLE window appears.
When TREND TABLE is assigned to one of the function keys at the
upper left of the screen, the TREND TABLE window can be displayed by
touching the TREND TABLE function key. Refer to “KEYS Window” in the
Administrator’s Guide, Section 3 to assign a function to the function key.
Display other review windows

Selected file

Scroll to display
Display the parameters other parameter
selected in the SETUP data
window

Record the trend


table on the WS-752P
recorder module
Time bar

Display the INTERVAL window

Display the PARAMETER SETUP window

User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series 6-11


6. REVIEW WINDOW

For details on the time bar, refer to the “Time Bar” section.
To return to the home screen, touch the [HOME] key.

Scrolling the Trend Table


Use the vertical scroll bar on the window to scroll the trend table. The trend table
can be scrolled by touching the or key on the scroll bar.

Selecting Parameters for the TREND TABLE Display


1 Touch the [SETUP] key on the TREND TABLE window. The PARAMETER
SETUP window appears.

2 Select the display position from the left column. Select the parameter from
the right column. The selected parameter appears in the display order on the
left column.
Selected parameters in the display order.
Up to 15 parameters can be selected.

Selectable
parameters

Unselect the
parameter
Keys for displaying other parameters

3 Repeat step 2 to select other parameters.

4 Touch the key to close the window.

6-12 User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series


6. REVIEW WINDOW

Selecting the Measurement Interval


1 Touch the [INTERVAL] key on the TREND TABLE window. The
INTERVAL window appears.

2 Select the interval for the trend table on the INTERVAL window.

3 Touch the key to close the window.

User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series 6-13


6. REVIEW WINDOW

Recording the Trend Table


The trend table displayed on the TREND TABLE window can be recorded on the
optional recorder module.

1 Display the trend table you want to record on the TREND TABLE window.

2 Touch the [RECORD] key. The RECORD window appears.

3 Set the RECORD START TIME and RECORD END TIME with the
and key.

The initial RECORD START TIME and RECORD END TIME depend on
the REVIEW setting on the RECORDER page of the SYSTEM SETUP
window. For details, refer to “RECORDER page” in Section 3 of the
Administrator’s Guide.

4 Confirm the NUMBER OF PAGES and touch the [RECORD] key.


Recording starts.
To stop recording, touch the Record key .

5 Touch the key to close the window.

Recording example

6-14 User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series


6. REVIEW WINDOW

NIBP TABLE Window

Overview
The NIBP TABLE window displays monitoring parameter data of up to 15
selected parameters with NIBP as a table. Data for all parameters is automatically
entered into the table every time NIBP is measured. The table can be recorded on
the optional recorder module.
One page shows 6 measurements. Each measurement appears in a separate
column. Up to 120 hours of data can be registered to the NIBP trend table. If
more than 120 hours past, the oldest measurement data is deleted. 6
NOTE: When <ADMIT MODE> in the SYSTEM SETUP window is set to
AUTO and the monitor power is turned on more than 30 minutes
after turning power off, the stored data in the monitor is deleted.
Even if <ADMIT MODE> is set to MANUAL, data is deleted when
the monitor is turned off for more than 24 hours.

Displaying the NIBP TABLE Window


1 Touch the [MENU] key to display the MENU window.

2 Touch the [NIBP TABLE] key. The NIBP TABLE window appears.
When NIBP TABLE is assigned to one of the function keys at the
upper left of the screen, the NIBP TABLE window can be displayed by
touching the NIBP TABLE function key. Refer to “KEYS Window” in the
Administrator’s Guide, Section 3 to assign a function to the function key.

User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series 6-15


6. REVIEW WINDOW

Display other review windows

Selected file

Scroll to display
Display the parameters other parameter
selected in the SETUP data
window

Record the NIBP


table on the WS-752P
recorder module

Display the PARAMETER SETUP window

For details on the time bar, refer to the “Time Bar” section.
To return to the home screen, touch the [HOME] key.

Selecting Parameters for the NIBP Trend Display

1 Touch the [SETUP] key on the NIBP TABLE window. The PARAMETER
SETUP window appears.

2 Select the display position from the left column. Select the parameter from
the right column. The selected parameter appears in the display order on the
left column.
Selected parameters in the display order.
Up to 15 parameters can be selected.

Selectable
parameters

Unselect the
parameter
Keys for displaying other parameters

3 Repeat step 2 to select other parameters.

4 Touch the key to close the window.

6-16 User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series


6. REVIEW WINDOW

Recording the NIBP Trend Table


The NIBP trend table displayed on the NIBP TABLE window can be recorded on
the optional recorder.

1 Display the NIBP trend table you want to record on the NIBP TABLE
window.

2 Touch the [RECORD] key. The RECORD window appears.

3 Set the RECORD START TIME and RECORD END TIME with the
and key.

The initial RECORD START TIME and RECORD END TIME depend on
the REVIEW setting on the RECORDER page of the SYSTEM SETUP
window. For details, refer to “RECORDER page” in Section 3 of the
Administrator’s Guide.

4 Confirm the RECORD PAGES and touch the [RECORD] key. Recording
starts.
To stop recording, touch the Record key .

5 Touch the key to close the window.

Recording example

User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series 6-17


6. REVIEW WINDOW

RECALL Window

General
An ECG waveform of 4 seconds before and 4 seconds after the arrhythmia
detection is saved as an arrhythmia recall file. Up to 120 hours of files can
be created. When more than 120 hours of files are created, the oldest file is
automatically deleted.
To create arrhythmia recall files:
• <ARRHYTHMIA ANALYSIS> on the SYSTEM SETUP window must be set
to ON. Refer to “ARRHYTH Page” in Section 3 of the Administrator’s Guide.
• The type of arrhythmias you want to save as files must be selected on the
ARRHYTHMIA EVENT SETUP window. Refer to “Selecting the Arrhythmia
Types to be Saved as a Recall File” section.
NOTE: When <ADMIT MODE> in the SYSTEM SETUP window is set to
AUTO and the monitor power is turned on more than 30 minutes
after turning power off, the stored data in the monitor is deleted.
Even if <ADMIT MODE> is set to MANUAL, data is deleted when
the monitor is turned off for more than 24 hours.
The arrhythmia recall window displays the recall files. Up to 8 files can be
displayed on one page. The actual size arrhythmia waveform can be displayed by
touching a recall file.

Arrhythmia List
The arrhythmias are listed in the priority of highest to lowest. When several
arrhythmias occur at the same time, only the arrhythmia of the highest priority is
saved as the recall file.
Arrhythmia Name Description
ASYSTOLE Longer than 3 to 10 seconds (selectable) with no QRS complex.
VF Ventricular fibrillation longer than 4 seconds.
VT Ventricular tachycardia. 9 or more consecutive VPCs when
heart rate exceeding 100 beats/min.
VPC RUN VPC short run. 3 to 8 (selectable) consecutive VPCs.
TACHYCARDIA Heart rate above the upper heart rate limit.
BRADYCARDIA Heart rate below the lower heart rate limit.
COUPLET VPC couplet (paired VPCs). 2 consecutive VPCs.
EARLY VPC Early VPC including R-on-T type. VPC with a time interval
from the preceding normal QRS complex of less than
approximately one-third of the normal R-R interval, at heart
rate dropping below 120* beats/min.
BIGEMINY Ventricular bigeminy. 3 or more consecutive pairs of VPC
and normal QRS. A dominant rhythm of N-V-N-V-N-V (N =
normal beat, V = ventricular beat)
FREQ VPC Frequent VPCs. VPC rate (VPCs/min) reaching or exceeding
the preset limit of 1 to 99 VPCs/min (selectable).
VPC Ventricular premature contraction.

* 120 beats/min when <PATIENT TYPE> is set to ADULT, 150 beats/min


when <PATIENT TYPE> is set to CHILD or NEONATE.

6-18 User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series


6. REVIEW WINDOW

Displaying the RECALL Window


1 Touch the [MENU] key to display the MENU window.

2 Touch the [RECALL] key to display the RECALL window.


When RECALL is assigned to one of the function keys at the upper left of
the screen, the RECALL window can be displayed by touching the RECALL
function key. Refer to “KEYS Window” in the Administrator’s Guide,
Section 3 to assign a function to the function key.
Display other review windows

Date and time of Selected file


file creation
Compressed ECG of
Arrhythmia type the recall file

Scroll to display
other parameter
recall files

Record the recall


data on the WS- Display the selected
752P recorder arrhythmia types in the
module ARRHYTHMIA EVENT
SETUP window
Display the PARAMETER Time bar
SETUP window

When there is no recall file, the “NO DATA” message is displayed.


For details on the time bar, refer to the “Time Bar” section.
To return to the home screen, touch the [HOME] key.

Scrolling the Arrhythmia Recall Files


Use the vertical scroll bar on the window to scroll the arrhythmia recall file. The
arrhythmia recall file can be scrolled by touching the or key on the scroll
bar.

User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series 6-19


6. REVIEW WINDOW

Selecting the Arrhythmia Types to be Saved as a Recall File


Select the arrhythmia types to create files for. You can select individual
arrhythmia types separately or select all arrhythmia type together.

1 Touch the [SETUP] key on the RECALL window. The ARRHYTHMIA


EVENT SETUP window appears.

Display the selected


arrhythmia types in the
ARRHYTHMIA EVENT
SETUP window

2 Select the arrhythmia type individually.


To set all arrhythmia types together, touch the [ALL] key.

3 Touch the key to close the window.

Displaying the Actual Size Waveform of the Selected Arrhythmia Recall File
The RECALL window displays the actual size ECG of the selected recall file.

1 Touch the or key to display the recall file of the arrhythmia recall
waveform which you want to display in actual size.

2 Touch the center of the recall file. The arrhythmia waveform is displayed in
the actual size.
Display other review windows

Date and time ECG lead


of file creation
ECG sensitivity

Arrhythmia type

QSR annotation

Vital signs numeric


values at the time
the recall file is
created

Record the data on the WS-752P


recorder module

Arrhythmia Waveform Annotation


Each beat of a stored arrhythmia waveform is automatically classified and
annotated as follows.
QRS Annotation Description
N Normal QRS complex
P Paced QRS
V Ventricular premature contraction
? Impossible to classify or during learning.
– Impossible to classify due to noise interference.

6-20 User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series


6. REVIEW WINDOW

Recording the Arrhythmia Recall Waveform


The arrhythmia recall data can be recorded by the recorder module. The
recording can be performed on both the file window and waveform window.

Recording on the ARRHYTH HISTORY Window

1 Display the RECALL window.

2 Touch the [RECORD] key. The RECORD window appears.

3 Set the RECORD START TIME and RECORD END TIME with the
and key.

The initial RECORD START TIME and RECORD END TIME depend on
the REVIEW setting on the RECORDER page of the SYSTEM SETUP
window. For details, refer to “RECORDER page” in Section 3 of the
Administrator’s Guide.

4 Confirm the RECORD PAGE and touch the [RECORD] key. Recording
starts.
To stop recording, touch the Record key .

5 Touch the key to close the window.


The arrhythmia recall data is recorded as displayed on the RECALL window.

Recording example

User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series 6-21


6. REVIEW WINDOW

Recording on the Actual Size ECG Waveform Window

1 Select the arrhythmia recall waveform you want to record.

2 Touch the [RECORD] key. The RECORD window opens.

3 Check the RECORD PAGE and touch the [RECORD] key. Recording starts.
To stop recording the table, touch the Record key .

The 10 seconds of arrhythmia waveforms can be recorded.

Recording example

6-22 User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series


6. REVIEW WINDOW

Alarm History Window


Alarm data can be listed on the ALARM HISTORY window. Up to 120 hrs of
files can be saved and up to 8 data can be displayed on the ALARM HISTORY
window. The alarm history is created when ever alarm occurs.
When the FULL DISC window is displayed from the ALARM HISTORY
window, the waveforms of the selected alarm file on the ALARM HISTORY
window can be displayed.
NOTE: When <ADMIT MODE> in the SYSTEM SETUP window is set to
AUTO and the monitor power is turned on more than 30 minutes
after turning power off, the stored data in the monitor is deleted.
Even if <ADMIT MODE> is set to MANUAL, data is deleted when
6
the monitor is turned off for more than 24 hours.

Displaying the ALARM HISTORY Window


1 Touch the [MENU] key to display the MENU window.

2 Touch the [ALARM HISTORY] key to display the ALARM HISTORY


window.
When ALARM HISTORY is assigned to one of the function keys at the
upper left of the screen, the ALARM HISTORY window can be displayed by
touching the ALARM HISTORY function key. Refer to “KEYS Window” in
the Administrator’s Guide, Section 3 to assign a function to the function key.
Display other review windows

Date and time of


alarm occurrence

Selected file

Scroll files

Record the alarm


history data on
the WS-752P
recorder module
Time bar

User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series 6-23


6. REVIEW WINDOW

For details on the time bar, refer to the “Time Bar” section.
To return to the home screen, touch the [HOME] key.

Scrolling the Alarm History Files


Use the vertical scroll bar on the window to scroll the alarm history file.
The alarm history file can be scrolled by touching the or key on the scroll
bar.

Recording the Alarm History File


To record the numeric data of the selected alarm history file, touch the
[RECORD] key.

Recording the Alarm History Files

1 Display the alarm history page you want to record.

2 Touch the [RECORD] key. The RECORD window appears.

3 Set the RECORD START TIME and RECORD END TIME with the
and key.

The initial RECORD START TIME and RECORD END TIME depend on
the REVIEW setting on the RECORDER page of the SYSTEM SETUP
window. For details, refer to “RECORDER page” in Section 3 of the
Administrator’s Guide.

6-24 User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series


6. REVIEW WINDOW

4 Confirm the NUMBER OF PAGES and touch the [RECORD] key.


Recording starts.
To stop recording, touch the Record key .

5 Touch the key to close the window.


The alarm history files are recorded as displayed on the ALARM HISTORY
window.

Recording example

User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series 6-25


6. REVIEW WINDOW

OCRG Window
The OCRG window displays heart rate and SpO2 acquired every 1 minute for the
trendgraph and compressed respiration waveform of the past 120 hours.
NOTE • When <ADMIT MODE> in the SYSTEM SETUP window is
set to AUTO and the monitor power is turned on more than 30
minutes after turning power off, the stored data in the monitor
is deleted. Even if <ADMIT MODE> is set to MANUAL, data is
deleted when the monitor is turned off for more than 24 hours.
• The OCRG window is available only when PATIENT TYPE
is NEONATE. For details, refer to “Selecting Patient Type” in
Section 3.
The following table shows the available trend parameters, screen displays and
scales.
Parameter Description Vertical Range
HR Heart rate (beats/min) 210 - 60, 160 - 80, 220 - 100
Saturated oxygen from pulse oximeter
SpO2 100 - 60, 100 - 80
(%SpO2)
Respiration measured by impedance
RESP × 1/4, × 1/2, × 1, × 2, × 4
method

Displaying the OCRG Window


1 Press the [MENU] key to display the MENU window.

6-26 User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series


6. REVIEW WINDOW

2 Touch the OCRG key to display the OCRG window.


When OCRG is assigned to one of the function keys at the upper left of the
screen, the OCRG page can be displayed by touching the OCRG function
key. Refer to “KEYS Window” in Administrator’s Guide, Section 3 to assign
a function to the function key.

Displays other
review windows.
Scale

Cursor can be dragged 6


Records the with your finger.
trendgraph on
the WS-752P Time bar
recorder module.
Displays the SCALE SETUP window.

Displays the SETTINGS window.

For details on the time bar, refer to the “Time Bar” section.
To return to the home screen, press the [Home] key.

Changing the OCRG Display Setting


1 Touch the [SETUP] key on the OCRG window to display the SETTINGS
window.

2 Select the [1 cm/min] or [3 cm/min] key in the <SETTINGS> box.

1 cm/min: OCRG display with the horizontal scale 1 cm/min


3 cm/min: OCRG display with the horizontal scale 3 cm/min

User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series 6-27


6. REVIEW WINDOW

Changing the Trendgraph Scale for Heart Rate and SpO2 and
Sensitivity for Respiration
1 Touch the [SCALE] key on the OCRG window to display the SCALE
SETUP window.

2 Touch the [HR], [SpO2] or [RESP(IMP)] key on the left and select the
desired scale or sensitivity on the right.

3 Touch the key to close the window.

6-28 User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series


6. REVIEW WINDOW

Recording the OCRG Trend


The OCRG trend displayed on the OCRG window can be recorded on the
optional WS-752P recorder module.

1 Display the OCRG trend you want to record on the OCRG window.

2 Touch the [RECORD key. The RECORD window appears.

3 Set the RECORD START TIME and RECORD END TIME with the or
key or time slider.
The initial RECORD START TIME and RECORD END TIME depend on
the REVIEW setting on the RECORDER page of the SYSTEM SETUP
window. For details, refer to “RECORDER page” in Section 3 of the
Administrator’s Guide.

4 Confirm the NUMBER OF PAGES and touch the RECORD key. Recording
starts.
To stop recording, touch the Record key.

5 Touch the key to close the window.


The OCRG trend is recorded as displayed on the OCRG window.

Recording example

User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series 6-29


6. REVIEW WINDOW

Full Disclosure Window


ECG full disclosure of 120 hours can be saved. The full disclosure waveforms
can be reviewed, scrolled and recorded, in either compressed or expanded form.
NOTE: When <ADMIT MODE> in the SYSTEM SETUP window is set to
AUTO and the monitor power is turned on more than 30 minutes
after turning power off, the stored data in the monitor is deleted.
Even if <ADMIT MODE> is set to MANUAL, data is deleted when
the monitor is turned off for more than 24 hours.
The FULL DISC window displays one minute full disclosure waveform on
each line. The 5 seconds actual size waveform selected by the cursor on the full
disclosure is displayed on the actual size ECG window.

Displaying the FULL DISC Window


1 Touch the [MENU] key to display the MENU window.

2 Touch the [FULL DISC] key to display the FULL DISC window.
When FULL DISC is assigned to one of the function keys at the upper
left of the screen, the FULL DISC page can be displayed by touching the
FULL DISC function key. Refer to “KEYS Window” in Section 3 of the
Administrator’s Guide to assign a function to the function key.
Display other review windows

When 5 second
Displayed is selected, the
time range waveform is
actual size.
Time
60-second ECG lead
full disclosure
waveform
Scroll time
Vital signs
numeric values
at the cursor

Record the FULL DISC Cursor Time bar


data on the WS-752P
recorder module

For details on the time bar, refer to the “Time Bar” section.
To return to the home screen, touch the [HOME] key.

6-30 User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series


6. REVIEW WINDOW

NOTE: It may take some time for the data to be displayed.


When there is no full disclosure waveform, the “NO DATA” message is
displayed.
The full disclosure is refreshed every minute.
When the FULL DISC window is called up from the RECALL window, the full
disclosure is displayed with the time of the RECALL window.
When the FULL DISC window is called up from the ALARM HISTORY
window, the full disclosure is displayed with the time of the file selected on the
ALARM HISTORY window.
Touch the waveforms to display the 5 seconds of enlarged waveforms. Touch
again to restore the previous display.

Display other review windows


6

Displayed
time range
Time ECG sensitivity
5-second full QRS annotation
disclosure
waveform ECG lead

Vital signs Scroll time


numeric values
at the cursor

Record the data Time bar Cursor


on the WS-752P
recorder module

When the ECG measurement is set to OFF, the SpO2 waveform is displayed. For
turning ECG measurement off, refer to Section 9.

User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series 6-31


6. REVIEW WINDOW

Scrolling the Full Disclosure Waveform


Use the vertical scroll bar on the window to scroll the full disclosure waveform.
The full disclosure waveform can be scrolled by touching the or key on
the scroll bar. The cursor can also be dragged with your finger.

Recording the Full Disclosure Waveform


The displayed full disclosure waveform can be recorded on the optional recorder.

Recording the Full Disclosure Waveform

1 Display the full disclosure waveform you want to record.

2 Touch the [RECORD] key. The RECORD window appears.

3 Set the RECORD START TIME and RECORD END TIME with the
and key.
The initial RECORD START TIME and RECORD END TIME depend on
the REVIEW setting on the RECORDER page of the SYSTEM SETUP
window. For details, refer to “RECORDER page” in Section 3 of the
Administrator’s Guide.

6-32 User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series


6. REVIEW WINDOW

4 Confirm the NUMBER OF PAGES and touch the [RECORD] key.


Recording starts.
To stop recording, touch the Record key .

5 Touch the key to close the window.

Recording example

Recording the Enlarged ECG Waveform


The displayed enlarged waveform can be recorded on the optional recorder
module.

Recording the Enlarged ECG Waveform

1 Display the enlarged waveform you want to record by touching the part of
the waveform.

2 Touch the [RECORD] key. The RECORD window appears.

3 Confirm the NUMBER OF PAGES and touch the [RECORD] key.


Recording starts.
To stop recording, touch the Record key .

4 Touch the key to close the window.

Recording example

User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series 6-33


7 Interbed Window

Registering Interbed Beds...............................................7-3


7
Removing an Interbed Bed.............................................................7-3

Displaying the Numeric Data of All Interbed Beds...........7-4

Displaying the Interbed Bed Data....................................7-5

Interbed Alarm.................................................................7-6
Settings Related to Interbed Alarm.................................................7-7
7. INTERBED WINDOW

When the bedside monitor is connected to a central monitor network, the


bedside monitor data can be sent to the central monitor. The bedside monitor can
display monitoring data of up to 8 other beds in the network on the INTERBED
window. When an alarm occurs at an interbed bed, the “ALARM bed name” of
the alarmed interbed appears on the home screen of this bedside monitor if you
have previously registered the other bed as an interbed bed on the INTERBED
window.
To use the interbed function, the following settings must be set.
• Register the beds to be managed by the interbed function on this monitor.
• Set <INTERBED ALARM> on the SETTINGS window of the INTERBED
window to ON.
• Set <AUTO INTERBED DISPLAY> on the SETTINGS window of the
INTERBED window to ON to automatically display the VIEW OTHER BEDS
window of the alarmed bed when an alarm occurs on that bed.

WARNING
Do not monitor a patient’s vital signs only by the interbed function.
The patient must be monitored on the interbed bed or central
monitor.

NOTE: The monitor must be connected to a network to use the interbed


function.

7-2 User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series


7. INTERBED WINDOW

Registering Interbed Beds


To view another bed, you must register the bed as an interbed bed. Only
registered beds can be viewed. You can register up to 16 interbed beds. Any bed
in the monitor network can be registered as an interbed bed.
When registering an interbed bed, the power of the bedside monitor to be
registered must be turned on.

1 Display the SELECT BEDS window.


Press the [MENU] key → [INTERBED] key → SELECT BEDS tab.

Registered
beds 7

Group key

Beds in the Scroll beds


selected
group

2 In the <SELECTED BEDS> box, select the position to register the interbed
bed.

3 Touch the [GROUP] key to select the group to which the desired bed
belongs and select the bed from the bed list. The beds which are already
registered as interbed beds cannot be selected.

4 Check that the selected bed appears in the <SELECTED BEDS> box.

Removing an Interbed Bed


1 In the <SELECTED BEDS> box, select the interbed bed to be removed.

2 Touch the [VACANT] key.

User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series 7-3


7. INTERBED WINDOW

Displaying the Numeric Data of All Interbed Beds


The numeric data of all registered interbed beds can be displayed on the Multiple
Beds window. The parameters that can be displayed are: heart rate and SpO2.
NOTE: When the instrument which is registered to the interbed bed
is turned off or not connected to the network correctly, the
“MONITOR OFF” message is displayed and measurement value
and alarm are not displayed.
Display the VIEW OTHER BEDS window.
Press the [MENU] key → [INTERBED] key → VIEW OTHER BEDS tab.

7-4 User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series


7. INTERBED WINDOW

Displaying the Interbed Bed Data


On the individual bed window of the INTERBED window, following numeric
data can be displayed. Other parameters cannot be displayed.
Numeric Data:
• Heart rate
• VPC
• ST
• Respiration rate
• CO2
• SpO2
• NIBP
7
• TEMP1
• PRESS1
NOTE: When the instrument which is registered to the interbed bed
is turned off or not connected to the network correctly, the
“MONITOR OFF” message is displayed and measurement value
and alarm are not displayed.

1 Display the VIEW OTHER BEDS window.


Press [MENU] key → [INTERBED] key → VIEW OTHER BEDS tab.

Numeric display
area

2 Touch the desired bed on the Multiple Beds window to display the individual
bed window.
To change beds, touch the key to close the window and select the desired
bed.

User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series 7-5


7. INTERBED WINDOW

Interbed Alarm
When an alarm occurs on an interbed bed, a highlighted bed name appears
at the top right corner of the home screen. This interbed alarm message does
not indicate the type of alarm. The VIEW OTHER BEDS window can be
automatically displayed when an alarm occurs and <AUTO INTERBED
DISPLAY> is set to ON.
NOTE: When the alarm function is turned off by “all alarms off” or “alarm
suspended” on the interbed bed, the interbed alarm does not
occur on this bedside monitor.
Only one interbed ID can be displayed at a time on the home screen. When more
than one interbed alarm occurs, the alarm message appears and the alarming
interbed IDs are alternately displayed one at a time.
On the INTERBED window, the bed ID and patient name of the alarmed bed is
highlighted.
NOTE: The interbed alarm for another bed is lower level than any other
alarm for this bed. Therefore, the interbed alarm might not be
indicated during an alarm for this bed.
The interbed alarm can be set to on or off. When set to ON, the highlighted
bed name in the alarm level color is displayed on the upper right corner of the
home screen when an interbed alarm occurs. When set to OFF, only the non-
highlighted message is displayed.
You can also silence the interbed alarm by touching the key on the individual
bed window of the INTERBED window. Silencing the interbed alarm on this
monitor also silences the alarm on the alarmed bed itself. The alarm silence
indication on the alarmed bed depends on the alarmed bed specifications. The
alarm silence time depends on the setting on the alarmed bed.
For the monitor action when the interbed alarm is silenced, refer to “Interbed
Alarm” in Section 5.
NOTE: When several interbed alarms occur, all interbed alarms are
silenced by touching the key on the individual bed window of
the INTERBED window.
The interbed alarm can only be suspended on the alarmed bed.

7-6 User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series


7. INTERBED WINDOW

Settings Related to Interbed Alarm

CAUTION
The interbed window only appears on the home screen when an
interbed alarm occurs and <AUTO INTERBED DISPLAY> is set to
ON.

1 Display the SETTINGS window.


Press the [MENU] key → [INTERBED] key → SETTINGS tab.

2 Select interbed alarm ON or OFF in the <INTERBED ALARM> box.


Select auto interbed display ON or OFF in the <AUTO INTERBED
DISPLAY> box. When this is set to ON, the multiple beds window is
automatically displayed when an alarm occurs.

3 Touch the [HOME] key return to the home screen.

User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series 7-7


8 Recording

Overview of Recording....................................................8-2
Recording Modes...........................................................................8-3
8
Manual Waveform Recording/Printing...................................... 8-4
Recording on the Review Windows.......................................... 8-4
Periodic Recording.................................................................... 8-5
Alarm Recording....................................................................... 8-5
Recording Mode Annotations.................................................... 8-6
Recording Priority...........................................................................8-7
Recording Sensitivity......................................................................8-7
Recording Speed............................................................................8-7
Recording Related Message..........................................................8-7
Recorded Data...............................................................................8-7

Changing the Recording Speed......................................8-9

Changing the Recording Pattern...................................8-10

Manually Recording Waveforms.................................... 8-11

Setting Periodic Recording............................................8-12


Changing Settings for Automatic Periodic Recording...................8-12

Recording on NIBP Measurement.................................8-14


8. RECORDING

Overview of Recording
A variety of waveforms and data can be recorded by the optional recorder
module.
This section provides an overview of recording.
The “Changing the Recording Pattern” section explains how to change the
recording pattern for all recordings except for the review data recordings.
The “Manually Recording Waveforms” section explains how to manually record
waveforms at any time.
The “Setting Periodic Recording” section explains necessary settings for
performing automatic periodic recording.
Some recording procedures are explained in other sections.
• To record trendgraphs and table, see Section 6.
• To record arrhythmia recall files, see Section 6
• To record alarm history, see Section 6.
• To record full disclosure, see Section 6.
• To record OCRG trend graph, see Section 6.
• For alarm recording, see Section 5.
To load recording paper, see “Loading Recording Paper” in Section 2.

8-2 User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series


8. RECORDING

Recording Modes
The following recording modes are available.
Recording Length/Time of Recorded Operations/Conditions/ Recorded
Recorded Data
Mode Data Settings for Recording Annotation

Real time/ Up to three waveforms [RECORD] key is touched


Time set at MANUAL
delayed selected on the Select the second and third
RECORD TIME on the MANUAL
waveform RECORD window parameters for waveform recording
SYSTEM SETUP window
recording* with numerical data on the RECORD window
Time set in RECORD window. [RECORD] key in the RECORD
Trendgraph Trendgraph on the TREND
Refer to “TREND GRAPH window on the TREND GRAPH
recording window GRAPH
Window” in Section 6. window is touched
Time set in RECORD window. [RECORD] key in the RECORD
Trend table
Table on the window Refer to “TREND TABLE window on the TREND TABLE TREND DATA
recording
Window” in Section 6. window is touched
Time set in RECORD window. [RECORD] key in the RECORD
NIBP table
Table on the window Refer to “NIBP TABLE window on the NIBP TABLE NIBP TREND
recording
Window” in Section 6. window is touched
Time set in RECORD window. [RECORD] key in the RECORD 8
Acquired arrhythmia
Refer to “RECALL Window” window on the RECALL window
waveform
in Section 6. is touched
Arrhythmia
[RECORD] key in the RECORD RECALL
recall recording
Arrhythmia waveform window on the RECALL window
Data displayed on the window
on the window (when the actual size waveform is
displayed) is touched
Time set in RECORD window. [RECORD] key in the RECORD
Alarm history Alarm history on the ALARM
Refer to “ALARM HISTORY window on the ALARM HISTORY
recording window HISTORY
Window” in Section 6. window is touched
Time set in RECORD window. [RECORD] key in the RECORD
Full disclosure data on
Refer to “FULL DISC window on the FULL DISC
the window
Window” in Section 6. window is touched
Full disclosure FULL
recording [RECORD] key in the RECORD DISCLOSURE
Actual size waveform window on the FULL DISC
10 s
on the window window (when the actual size
waveform is displayed) is touched
[RECORD] key in the RECORD
OCRG recording OCRG on the window Data displayed on the window window of the OCRG window is OCRG
touched
<ALARM RECORDING> on the
RECORD window must be set to
Up to three waveforms ON
selected on the
Vital signs alarm From 8 seconds before to 12 Alarm for vital signs parameter
RECORD window and ALARM
recording seconds after alarm occurrence must be turned on
vital sign data at an
alarm occurrence Select the second and third
parameters for waveform recording
on the RECORD window
<ALARM RECORDING> on the
RECORD window must be set to
ON

Up to three waveforms Alarm for arrhythmia must be


selected on the turned on
Arrhythmia From 8 seconds before to 12
RECORD window and <ARRHYTHMIA ANALYSIS> ALARM
alarm recording seconds after alarm occurrence
vital sign data at an on the SYSTEM SETUP window
alarm occurrence must be set to ON
Select the second and third
parameters for waveform recording
on the RECORD window

User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series 8-3


8. RECORDING

Recording Length/Time of Recorded Operations/Conditions/ Recorded


Recorded Data
Mode Data Settings for Recording Annotation
<PERIODIC REC INTERVAL>
Up to three waveforms on the RECORD window must be
selected on the set to ON
Periodic
RECORD window 10 s TIMER
recording Select the second and third
with numerical data at
the set interval parameters for waveform recording
on the RECORD window
Recording <RECORD ON NIBP MEAS>
All monitored RECORD ON
on NIBP – on the SYSTEM SETUP window
parameters NIBP MEAS
measurement must be set to ON

* Real time or delayed recording can be selected on the SYSTEM SETUP


window. Refer to the Administrator’s Guide, Section 3.

Manual Waveform Recording


Up to three waveforms selected on the RECORD window are recorded. For
details, refer to the “Manually Recording Waveforms” section.
With recorder: Recorded on the optional recorder whenever the Record key is
touched.
No recorder: Not available.

Recording on the Review Windows


Waveforms and data displayed on the review window can be recorded. For
details, refer to Section 6.
With recorder: Recorded on the optional recorder when the Record key in the RECORD
window on the review window is touched.
No recorder: Not available.

8-4 User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series


8. RECORDING

Periodic Recording
Up to three waveforms selected on the RECORD window and vital signs data are
recorded automatically at the set interval.
Set the following items on the RECORD window. The time interval is set on the
SYSTEM SETUP window. Refer to Section 3 of the Administrator’s Guide.
• Select ON for periodic recording. When OFF is selected, periodic recording is
turned off.
• Recording pattern

Recording example

Alarm Recording
When a vital sign alarm or arrhythmia alarm occurs, up to three waveforms
selected on the RECORD window and vital sign data are automatically recorded.
The recorded waveforms are from 8 seconds before to 12 seconds after the alarm
occurrence.

User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series 8-5


8. RECORDING

Set alarm recording on or off on the RECORD window. For details, refer to
Section 5.

CAUTION
Alarm recording is not performed when:
• Alarm is suspended.
• Alarm recording is set to OFF.

Recording example

Recording on NIBP Measurement


When NIBP is measured, all monitored parameters are recorded. To set
the recording on NIBP measurement on or off, refer to Section 3 of the
Administrator’s Guide.

Recording Mode Annotations


One of the following annotations is recorded on each page of the recording paper
as shown below.
TIMER: Automatic periodic recording. Refer to the “Setting
Periodic Recording” section.
ALARM: Automatic recording at a vital sign or arrhythmia alarm
occurrence. Refer to “Turning Automatic Alarm Recording
On/Off” in Section 5.
TREND GRAPH: Trendgraph recording. Refer to “TREND GRAPH
Window” in Section 6.
TREND DATA: Trend table recording. Refer to “TREND TABLE Window”
in Section 6.
NIBP TREND: NIBP trend recording. Refer to “NIBP TABLE Window” in
Section 6.
RECALL: Arrhythmia waveform recording. Refer to “Arrhythmia
Recall Window” in Section 6.
ALARM HISTORY: Alarm history recording. Refer to “Alarm History Window”
in Section 6.
FULL DISCLOSURE: Full disclosure recording. Refer to “Full Disclosure
Window” in Section 6.
OCRG: OCRG recording on the OCRG window. Refer to “OCRG
Window” in Section 6.
RECORD ON NIBP MEAS: Recording on NIBP measurement.
MANUAL: Manual recording.

8-6 User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series


8. RECORDING

Recording Priority
If more than one recording mode is activated at the same time, only the highest
priority mode is used.
Manually stopping recording Manual recording Alarm recording Periodic recording
by the Record key Recording on NIBP measurement

High Recording priority Low

During alarm recording, if a higher priority alarm occurs, the current recording is
canceled and the higher priority alarm is recorded for 20 seconds.
During any type of recording, if a lower or equal priority alarm recording or
any other type of recording occurs, the lower or equal priority recording is not
performed; only the current recording is performed.

Recording Sensitivity
The sensitivity of the waveforms recorded on the recording paper is the same as 8
the sensitivity of the waveforms displayed on the screen.
To change the sensitivity, change the sensitivity setting on the parameter setting
window as described in Sections 9 to 16.

Recording Speed
The recording speed can be set at <RECORDING SPEED> on the RECORD
window. Refer to “Changing the Recording Speed” in this section.

Recording Related Message


The following messages appear in the following conditions.
When out of recording paper

When the recorder door is open

Recorded Data
The following data can be printed.
Printed Items Example
Patient name John Smith
Bed ID BED-001
Date and time 2015/04/09 14:19
Reason for recording TIMER, ALARM, etc.
Sensitivity ×2
Paper speed 25 mm/s
ECG related message MONITOR*1
Pacing detect ON

User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series 8-7


8. RECORDING

Printed Items Example


Patient type ADULT
Arrhythmia analysis version ECG: 01-01
Heart rate (beats/min) HR: 100
ECG lead II
Number of VPCs VPC: 10/min
ST level –0.04 mV
Pulse rate (beats/min) PR: 80
SpO2 (%) SpO2: 98
NIBP: SYS/DIA (MAP) (mmHg),
NIBP: 132/61 (80) mmHg 17:24
measurement time
Respiration rate (resp/min) RR: 14
Temperature (°C/°F) TEMP: 36.4°C
Arrhythmia name COUPLET
Waveform annotation *2
N, V, P, etc.

*1 Selected setting for FILTERS on the ECG window is recorded. Refer to


Section 9. When the “CHECK ELECTRODES” alarm occurs, “CHECK
ELECTRODES” is recorded instead of the FILTERS setting.
*2 Recorded when the recording mode is MANUAL (DELAY mode), ALARM
or RECALL and <ARRHYTHMIA ANALYSIS> on the ECG window of the
SYSTEM SETUP window is set to ON.

8-8 User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series


8. RECORDING

Changing the Recording Speed


Recording speed can be selected from 12.5 mm/s, 25 mm/s or 50 mm/s for
recording with the optional recorder module.
Recording speed and waveform sweep speed on the screen can be set separately.

1 Display the RECORD window.


Touch the [MENU] key → [RECORD] key.

2 Touch the [RECORDING SPEED] key. The RECORDING SPEED window


opens.

3 Select the speed by touching the speed key.

4 Touch the key to close the window.

5 Touch the [HOME] key to return to the home screen.

User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series 8-9


8. RECORDING

Changing the Recording Pattern


Up to three parameter waveforms can be selected for a recording pattern.
The selected recording pattern applies to all recording except recording on the
review windows. ECG (TRACE 1) is the default setting.

1 Display the RECORD window.


Touch the [MENU] key → [RECORD] key.

2 Touch the [TRACE 1], [TRACE 2] or [TRACE 3] key. The TRACE 1,


TRACE 2 or TRACE 3 window opens.

3 Select the parameter by touching the parameter key. Select the [NONE] key
to not assign any parameter.

CO2 and PRESS


are only available
for SVM-7503 and
SVM-7523.

4 Touch the key to close the window.

5 Repeat steps 2 to 4 to set other TRACE.

6 Touch the [HOME] key to return to the home screen.

8-10 User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series


8. RECORDING

Manually Recording Waveforms


Waveforms and data can be recorded manually on the recorder module.
There are four settings:
• Recording pattern: This setting determines which of the measured parameter
waveforms is recorded. See the “Changing the Recording
Pattern” in this section.
• Real-time or Delay mode: In DELAY mode, recording begins with the waveforms
acquired 8 seconds before recording starts. In REAL TIME
mode, recording begins with the waveforms acquired when
recording starts. To select real-time or delayed manual
recording mode, refer to “RECORD Window” in the
Administrator’s Guide, Section 3.
• Recording length: CONTINUOUS, 10 s, 20 s or 30 s can be selected for the
recording length on the SYSTEM SETUP window. Refer to
“RECORD Window” in the Administrator’s Guide, Section
3.
• Recording speed: The recording speed is set at <RECORDING SPEED> on 8
the RECORD window.

1 If necessary, select the recording pattern on the RECORD window. Refer to


the “Changing the Recording Pattern” in this section.

2 To start recording, touch the Record key .

3 To stop recording, touch the Record key again.

Record key Recording example

User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series 8-11


8. RECORDING

Setting Periodic Recording


You can record up to three waveforms with numerical data periodically.
A 10-second waveform can be automatically recorded at a preset interval that
you can set from 1 min, 2 min, 3 min, 4 min, 5 min, 10 min, 15 min, 30 min, 60
min and 120 min.
Recording starts at the next interval for periodic recording.
For example, if you start automatic periodic recording at 9:20 with a 30-minute
interval and <PERIODIC RECORD START TIME> is set to CLOCK, periodic
recording will be performed at 9:30, 10:00, 10:30 and so on. If you start at 9:20
with a 120-minute interval, periodic recording will be performed at 10:00, 12:00,
14:00 and so on.
For example, if you start automatic periodic recording at 9:20 with a 30-minute
interval and <PERIODIC RECORD START TIME> is set to PERIOD, periodic
recording will be performed at 9:20, 9:50, 10:20 and so on. If you start at 9:20
with a 120-minute interval, periodic recording will be performed at 9:20, 11:20,
13:20 and so on.

Changing Settings for Automatic Periodic Recording


There are three settings:
• Periodic recording ON/OFF: ON must be selected on the PERIODIC REC INTERVAL
window to automatically record waveform and data at
periodic interval.
• Recording time interval: You can set the desired interval for automatic periodic
recording at <PERIODIC REC INTERVAL> on the
SYSTEM SETUP window. Time selection is 1 min,
2 min, 3 min, 4 min, 5 min, 10 min, 15 min, 30 min,
60 min and 120 min. Default setting is 15 min. See
“RECORD Window” in the Administrator’s Guide,
Section 3.
• Periodic record start time: You can select the start time for the periodic recording at
<PERIODIC RECORD START TIME> on the SYSTEM
SETUP window. When selecting CLOCK, recording
starts at the nearest interval based on the clock hour.
When selecting PERIOD, recording starts when you
touch the [ON] key in the PERIODIC REC INTERVAL
window. Default setting is CLOCK. See “RECORD
Window” in the Administrator’s Guide, Section 3.

8-12 User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series


8. RECORDING

1 Display the RECORD window.


Touch the [MENU] key → [RECORD] key.

2 Touch the [PERIODIC REC] key. The PERIODIC REC window opens.

3 Select ON or OFF for performing periodic recording. 8

The recording interval


selected on the RECORD
window of the SYSTEM
SETUP window.

4 Touch the key to close the window.

5 Touch the [HOME] key to return to the home screen.

User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series 8-13


8. RECORDING

Recording on NIBP Measurement


You can record the monitored parameter values each time NIBP is measured.
Set the RECORD ON NIBP MEAS on the NIBP window of the SYSTEM
SETUP window to ON. Refer to Section 3 of the Administrator’s Guide.
To stop the recording, touch the Record key .

Record key Recording example

8-14 User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series


9 ECG Monitoring

General............................................................................9-3

Preparing for ECG Monitoring.........................................9-4


Preparation Flowchart....................................................................9-4
Number of Electrodes and Measuring Leads.................................9-4
Electrode Position..........................................................................9-4 9
3 Electrode Leads..................................................................... 9-4
5 Electrode Leads..................................................................... 9-5
Electrode Positions for Detecting the Pacemaker Pulse................9-6
Changing the Electrode Lead.................................................... 9-6
Changing the Electrode Positions............................................. 9-6
Selecting Electrodes and Lead.......................................................9-7
Types of Electrodes and Lead................................................... 9-7
Connecting Cables and Attaching Disposable Electrodes.............9-8
Connecting the Electrode Cable to the Monitor........................ 9-8
Attaching Disposable Electrodes to the Patient........................ 9-8

Monitoring ECG...............................................................9-9
ECG Information on the Home Screen.........................................9-10
ECG Data Display........................................................................9-10
Measuring ST Level.....................................................................9-10
Detached Electrode Detection and Display..................................9-11
AC Interference and Display........................................................9-12

Monitoring Arrhythmia...................................................9-13
General.........................................................................................9-13
Arrhythmia Analysis Data Display............................................9-14
Changing Arrhythmia Monitoring Settings....................................9-14
Turning Arrhythmia Analysis On or Off....................................9-15
Selecting the Patient Type for QRS Detection.........................9-15
Learning the ECG Waveform for Arrhythmia Detection (VPC
Learning)..................................................................................9-16
Checking the Dominant QRS...................................................9-18
Changing ECG Settings................................................9-20
Changing the Monitoring Lead.....................................................9-21
Optimum Lead..........................................................................9-21
Changing a Lead..................................................................... 9-22
Changing the ECG Sensitivity......................................................9-23
Changing the Heart Rate/Pulse Rate, VPC and ST Alarm Limits.9-24
Checking Arrhythmia Alarm Settings............................................9-25
Turning ECG Measurement On or Off..........................................9-27
Turning Pacing Spike Detection On or Off...................................9-28
Changing the Number of Electrodes............................................9-30
Selecting the Filter Type...............................................................9-31
Changing the Sync Sound Source...............................................9-32

Use with an Electrosurgical Unit....................................9-34

ECG 7-lead Display.......................................................9-36


9. ECG MONITORING

General
To monitor ECG, attach disposable electrodes to the patient and connect them
to the ECG/RESP socket on the monitor. Two leads can be monitored with
arrhythmia analysis and ST level measurement.

WARNING
Interaction Between Minute Ventilation Rate-Adaptive Pacemakers
and Cardiac Monitoring and Diagnostic Equipment*
The bioelectric impedance measurement sensor of a minute
ventilation rate-adaptive implantable pacemaker may be affected by
cardiac monitoring and diagnostic equipment which is connected to
the same patient. If this occurs, the pacemaker may pace at its
maximum rate and give incorrect data to the monitor or diagnostic
equipment. In this case, set the <IMPEDANCE MEASUREMENT>
on the RESP window to OFF on the bedside monitor.

* Minute ventilation is sensed in rate-adaptive pacemakers by a technology


known as bioelectric impedance measurement (BIM). Many medical devices
in addition to pacemakers use this technology. When one of these devices is 9
used on a patient with an active, minute ventilation rate-adaptive pacemaker,
the pacemaker may erroneously interpret the mixture of BIM signals created in
the patient, resulting in an elevated pacing rate.
NOTE: When a line isolation monitor is used, noise from the line isolation
monitor may resemble actual ECG waveforms on the bedside
monitor and cause false heart rate alarms or no alarm at all.

User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series 9-3


9. ECG MONITORING

Preparing for ECG Monitoring

Preparation Flowchart
1 Select the electrode lead and electrodes.

2 Connect the electrode lead to the ECG patient cable and connect the ECG
patient cable to the ECG/RESP socket on the left side panel of the monitor.

3 Attach the disposable electrodes to the patient and attach the electrode lead
to the electrodes.

4 Monitoring starts. Set necessary settings.

Number of Electrodes and Measuring Leads


The leads which can be monitored differ according to the type of electrode lead
and number of electrodes used. This monitor automatically identifies the number
of electrodes attached to the patient.
No. of
Lead Features
Electrodes
3 I, II, III Can measure at the thoracic wall.
5 I, II, III, aVR, aVL, aVF, V1 to V6 Similar to the standard 12 lead.

Electrode Position

3 Electrode Leads
Electrode Position
Symbol Lead Color (Clip Color) Electrode Position
R Red (Red-beige)
Right infraclavicular fossa
RA White (White-beige)
L Yellow (Yellow-beige)
Left infraclavicular fossa
LA Black (Black-beige)
F Green (Green-beige)
Lowest rib on the left anterior axillary line
LL Red (Red-beige)

Lead Connection

9-4 User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series


9. ECG MONITORING

5 Electrode Leads
Electrode Position
The 5-electrode method with lead II and lead V5 is effective for monitoring
myocardial ischemia. You can improve monitoring accuracy considerably
C/V by adding lead V4 to this combination. Ca (Va) can be at any position of the
standard 12 leads C1 to C6 (V1 to V6).
Symbol Lead Color (Clip Color) Electrode Position
R Red (Red-beige)
Right infraclavicular fossa
RA White (White-beige)
L Yellow (Yellow-beige)
Left infraclavicular fossa
LA Black (Black-beige)
F Green (Green-beige)
Lowest rib on the left anterior axillary line
LL Red (Red-beige)
N (RF) Black (Black-beige) Right anterior axillary line at the same level
N (RL) Green (Green-beige) as F.

C White (Brown-white) Fifth intercostal space on the left


midclavicular line. (C4 position of standard
V Brown (Blue-brown) 12 leads)

Lead Position 9
Standard limb leads
Lead I Lead II Lead III

R/RA L/LA R/RA R/RA L/LA


L/LA

F/LL F/LL F/LL

N (RF/RL) N (RF/RL) N (RF/RL)

Monopolar limb leads


aVR lead aVL lead aVF lead

R/RA L/LA R/RA L/LA R/RA


L/LA

F/LL F/LL F/LL

N (RF/RL) N (RF/RL) N (RF/RL)

Monopolar chest leads


V1 to V6 leads
to

R/RA L/LA

F/LL
N (RF/RL)

User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series 9-5


9. ECG MONITORING

Electrode Positions for Detecting the Pacemaker Pulse


If the pacemaker pulse cannot be detected, change the electrode lead or electrode
positions as follows.

Changing the Electrode Lead


If the pacemaker pulse cannot be detected with lead II, use lead I or lead III.

Changing the Electrode Positions


If the pacemaker pulse cannot be detected with lead I or lead III, change the
electrode position as follows.

1 With the lead II position, move the F/LL electrode up.

2 If step 1 was not effective, move the R/RA electrode down.

3 If step 2 was not effective, move the R/RA and F/LL electrodes closer
together.

If the pacemaker pulse is still not detected, the pacing pulse on the body
surface may be too small. The sensitivity performance is limited.

9-6 User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series


9. ECG MONITORING

Selecting Electrodes and Lead


Select the appropriate electrodes and lead according to the purpose.

WARNING
When using a defibrillator together with the monitor, use Ag/AgCl
electrodes. Other types of electrodes, stainless steel in particular,
will adversely affect the ECG waveform by slowing the baseline
recovery on the monitor and result in no monitoring immediately
following defibrillation.

CAUTION
Only use Shanghai Kohden products and specified parts and
accessories. When other electrodes are used, the “CHECK
ELECTRODES” message may appear and monitoring may stop.

CAUTION
At the start of ECG monitoring, check that the dominant QRS is
appropriate. Otherwise arrhythmia monitoring may be inaccurate. 9

NOTE • Electrode leads other than Shanghai Kohden’s might not be


defibrillator-proof.
• Do not use different types of electrodes together. This might
cause ECG monitoring to become unstable.

Types of Electrodes and Lead


No. of Electrodes Disposable Electrodes ECG PATIENT CABLE
BJ-753P (IEC)/BJ-753PA (AHA)
(SNAP type, 3.5 m)

3
Vitrode L-150, L-150X
(I, II, III)

BJ-755P (IEC)/BJ-755PA (AHA)


(SNAP type, 3.5 m)

5
(I, II, III, aVR, aVL, Vitrode L-150, L-150X
aVF, V1 to V6)

User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series 9-7


9. ECG MONITORING

Connecting Cables and Attaching Disposable Electrodes

Connecting the Electrode Cable to the Monitor


Connect the ECG PATIENT CABLE to the ECG/RESP socket on the monitor.

When connecting the 3-electrode lead

Attaching Disposable Electrodes to the Patient


Attach the electrodes to the patient by referring to the manual provided with the
electrodes.

WARNING
After attaching the electrode to the patient and connecting the cable
to the monitor, check that electrodes are attached to the patient and
check that the cable is connected to the monitor properly. When the
electrodes are removed from the patient, do not touch the metal part
of the electrode with bare hands or let the metal part of the electrode
contact the metal part of the bed or any other conductive parts.
Failure to follow this warning may cause electrical shock or injury to
the patient by discharged energy.

CAUTION
Do not reuse disposable electrodes.

NOTE • To maintain good contact between the electrode and skin,


check that the paste of the disposable electrode is not dry.
• When contact of the disposable electrode becomes poor,
replace the electrode with a new one immediately. Otherwise,
contact impedance between the skin and electrode increases
and the correct ECG cannot be obtained.
To obtain a stable ECG:
• Shave excess hair.
• Rub the patient’s skin with a piece of cotton where the electrodes are to be
attached.
• If the skin is dirty, clean with soap and water. Dry completely.
• Clean the patient’s skin with a piece of cotton moistened with alcohol. Dry
completely.

9-8 User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series


9. ECG MONITORING

Monitoring ECG
When electrodes are attached to the patient and cables are connected properly,
ECG and heart rate appear on the screen. The monitor automatically learns the
patient’s dominant ECG.
One lead appears on the home screen. Up to two leads can be displayed on the
home screen when monitoring with five electrodes.

CAUTION
When the “CHECK ELECTRODE” message is displayed, ECG is not
monitored properly and the ECG alarm does not function. Check the
electrode, electrode leads and connection cord, and if necessary,
replace with new ones.

CAUTION
When the “NOISE” or “CANNOT ANALYZE” message is displayed,
ECG data and alarm are not reliable. Remove the cause by checking
the electrodes, electrode leads, patient’s body movement, EMG and
9
peripheral instruments grounding. Also make sure that an electric
blanket is not used.

CAUTION
During NIBP cuff inflation, heart rate counting accuracy is not
guaranteed by noise interference.

NOTE • After adjusting the sensitivity of the ECG on the screen and
changing necessary settings, check that the dominant QRS is
appropriate.
• The maximum heart rate range is 300 beats/min. “300” is
displayed on the screen even when the patient’s heart rate is
above 300.

User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series 9-9


9. ECG MONITORING

ECG Information on the Home Screen


Filter setting
ECG waveform Patient type

QRS sync mark


Heart rate
Lead

ST level
Sensitivity

VPC

ECG Data Display


The following ECG related data is acquired when ECG is monitored.
Displayed Data
Screen/Window <ARRHYTHMIA ANALYSIS> is <ARRHYTHMIA
set to ON*1 ANALYSIS> is set to OFF*1
Heart rate
ST level Heart rate
Arrhythmia classification message ST level
Home screen
Number of VPC per minute “ASYSTOLE” alarm
Arrhythmia alarm occurrence (when occurrence
arrhythmia alarm is set to ON*2)
Heart rate trendgraph
ST level trendgraph Heart rate trendgraph
TREND GRAPH window
Number of VPC trendgraph ST level trendgraph
(Refer to the Operator’s Manual Heart rate list Heart rate list
or Section 6 of the User’s Guide)
ST level list ST level list
Number of VPC list
RECALL window
Recall files of the arrhythmias set to
(Refer to the Operator’s Manual be saved*3 “ASYSTOLE” recall files
or Section 6 of the User’s Guide)

*1 Arrhythmia analysis can be turned on or off on the PARAMETERS window


→ ECG page on the SYSTEM SETUP window.
*2 Alarm on/off can be set individually for certain arrhythmias on the
ARRHYTH page on the PARAMETERS window of the SYSTEM SETUP
window.
When alarm recording is turned on, the data and waveform are recorded at
the arrhythmia alarm occurrence.
*3 The arrhythmia waveforms to be saved as recall files are set on the RECALL
window of the Review window.

Measuring ST Level
9-10 User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series
9. ECG MONITORING

The ST level is the amplitude between the baseline and ST wave. The ECG
waveform is averaged for 15 seconds to remove artifacts. The baseline and the
ST wave are detected from the averaged ECG, and the ST level is measured.
Baseline NOTE • If there are too many arrhythmias, there is noise on the ECG, or
ST level
the heart rate is below 32, ST level might not be measured and
ST wave ST level is not displayed on the screen.
• Although the ST algorithm has been tested for accuracy of the
ST analysis result, the significance of the ST level changes
need to be determined only by a physician.

Detached Electrode Detection and Display


When an electrode or electrode lead is detached during ECG monitoring, a
“CHECK ELECTRODES” alarm occurs.
When monitoring with 5 electrodes and <AUTO LEAD CHANGE> on the
ECG page of the PARAMETERS window is set to on, and the “CHECK
ELECTRODES” message is displayed for more than 5 seconds, the lead for the
first trace on the home screen is automatically changed to a stable lead.
5 seconds after the detached electrode or electrode lead is attached again, the
lead of the first trace returns to the lead prior to auto lead change.
While the “CHECK ELECTRODES” message is displayed, the correct ECG 9
waveform is not displayed. To prevent incorrect reading of ECG during an
error condition, the ECG waveform is temporarily replaced with a square wave
and flat line. Check the electrodes if this message appears. Refer to “Screen
Messages” section of the Operator’s Manual.

CAUTION
When the “CHECK ELECTRODE” message is displayed, ECG is not
monitored properly and the ECG alarm does not function. Check the
electrode, electrode leads and connection cord, and if necessary,
replace with new ones.

When the “CHECK ELECTRODES” message appears, the ECG waveforms


become square waves for 2 seconds, then change to flat lines above the baseline.

User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series 9-11


9. ECG MONITORING

AC Interference and Display


To prevent incorrect reading of ECG during an error condition, when there is a
large AC interference (hum) on the waveform, the “CHECK ELECTRODES”
message appears and the waveform appears as shown below, depending on the
filter setting on the ECG window.
When the waveform looks like this, check that the bedside monitor is properly
grounded.
Hum noises may interfere if the electrodes are dry. Replace the electrodes with
new ones.

When <FILTERS> is set to DIAG


Noise superimposes on the waveform.

When <FILTERS> is set to MONITOR or MAXIMUM


When noise superimposes on the waveform and it is difficult to detect QRS
waves, the ECG waveforms become square waves for 2 seconds, then change to
flat lines above the baseline.

9-12 User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series


9. ECG MONITORING

Monitoring Arrhythmia

General
The following functions are available for arrhythmia monitoring.
• Arrhythmia alarm indication (alarm sound, screen message and alarm indicator
lamp). Refer to the Operator’s Manual or Section 5 of the User’s Guide.
• Arrhythmia waveform storage (Arrhythmia recall files). Refer to the
Operator’s Manual or Section 6 of the User’s Guide.
• Arrhythmia waveform recording. Refer to the Operator’s Manual or Section 8
of the User’s Guide.
• VPC display and trendgraph. Refer to the Operator’s Manual or Sections 4 and
6 of the User’s Guide.

WARNING
For arrhythmia monitoring, set <ARRHYTHMIA ANALYSIS> on the
SYSTEM SETUP window to ON. Otherwise, there is no sound or
indication for arrhythmia alarms (except for ASYSTOLE). 9

When arrhythmia analysis is set to on, arrhythmia analysis starts as soon as


the ECG monitoring starts. The monitor automatically detects and classifies
arrhythmia by comparing each beat of the real-time ECG waveform to a
reference ECG waveform (dominant QRS). If the following points of a QRS do
not match the dominant QRS, that QRS is recognized as an arrhythmia.
• RR interval
• QRS width
• QRS amplitude
• QRS polarity
It is important to check the dominant QRS on the ECG window at the start of
ECG monitoring for accurate arrhythmia monitoring.

CAUTION
At the start of ECG monitoring, check that the dominant QRS is
appropriate. Otherwise arrhythmia monitoring may be inaccurate.

When the QRS wave or RR interval changes too frequently, it becomes difficult
for the monitor to distinguish between the normal ECG and arrhythmia. To solve
this problem, the monitor uses pattern matching and multi template matching for
analyzing arrhythmia. However, when the patient’s QRS changes rapidly, check
that the appropriate dominant QRS is used for arrhythmia analysis.

User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series 9-13


9. ECG MONITORING

Arrhythmia Analysis Data Display


When the monitor detects an arrhythmia, the arrhythmia alarm and data are
indicated. The message display interval depends on the priority setting on the
ALARM window of the SYSTEM SETUP window. For details on this setting,
refer to Section 3 of the Administrator’s Guide.
Highlighted heart rate Arrhythmia alarm messages

The following arrhythmias are analyzed.


Arrhythmia Name Description
ASYSTOLE Longer than 3 to 10 seconds (selectable) with no QRS complex.
VF Ventricular fibrillation longer than 4 seconds.
Ventricular tachycardia. 9 or more consecutive VPCs when
VT
heart rate exceeding 100 beats/min.
VPC RUN VPC short run. 3 to 8 (selectable) consecutive VPCs.
TACHYCARDIA Heart rate above the upper heart rate limit.
BRADYCARDIA Heart rate below the lower heart rate limit.
COUPLET VPC couplet (paired VPCs). 2 consecutive VPCs.
Early VPC including R-on-T type. VPC with a time interval
from the preceding normal QRS complex of less than
EARLY VPC
approximately one-third of the normal R-R interval, at heart rate
dropping below 120* beats/min.
Ventricular bigeminy. 3 or more consecutive pairs of VPC and
BIGEMINY normal QRS. A dominant rhythm of N-V-N-V-N-V (N = normal
beat, V = ventricular beat)
Frequent VPCs. VPC rate (VPCs/min) reaching or exceeding
FREQ VPC
the preset limit of 1 to 99 VPCs/min (selectable).
VPC Ventricular premature contraction.

* 120 beats/min when <PATIENT TYPE> is set to ADULT, 150 beats/min when
<PATIENT TYPE> is set to CHILD or NEONATE.
The QRS is annotated as follows.
QRS Annotation Description
N Normal QRS complex
P Paced QRS
V Ventricular premature contraction
? Impossible to classify or during learning.
– Impossible to classify due to noise interference.

Changing Arrhythmia Monitoring Settings


Check the following settings for arrhythmia monitoring.

9-14 User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series


9. ECG MONITORING

Turning Arrhythmia Analysis On or Off

WARNING
For arrhythmia monitoring, set <ARRHYTHMIA ANALYSIS> on the
SYSTEM SETUP window to ON. Otherwise, there is no sound or
indication for arrhythmia alarms (except for ASYSTOLE).

You can turn the arrhythmia analysis on or off on the ECG page of the
PARAMETERS window of the SYSTEM SETUP window. When arrhythmia
monitoring is necessary, select ON. For details, refer to Section 3 of the
Administrator’s Guide.

Selecting the Patient Type for QRS Detection

CAUTION
At the start of ECG monitoring, check that the correct patient type is
set for <PATIENT TYPE> on the ADMIT window. If an inappropriate
patient type is set, heart rate cannot be counted accurately and
noise or P waves may be counted as QRS and cardiac arrest may 9
be overlooked.

Select the monitoring patient type. The selected patient type is displayed on the
home screen.
When “SHOW ADMIT CONFIRMATION WINDOW” is set to ON on
the DISPLAY window of the SYSTEM SETUP window, a confirmation
window of “NEW PATIENT?” appears. When [YES] key is touched, the
patient data including this patient type setting returns to the master setting
on the ARRHYTH page of the MASTER window. When “SHOW ADMIT
CONFIRMATION WINDOW” is set to OFF on the DISPLAY window of the
SYSTEM SETUP window, and 30 minutes elapse after monitor power off, the
patient data including this patient type setting also returns to the master setting
on the ARRHYTH page of the MASTER window. Refer to Section 3 of the
Administrator’s Guide.
The QRS settings depend on the patient type. You can set the patient type on the
ADMIT window. Refer to “Change the Patient Type” in Section 3.
PATIENT TYPE Setting
Items
ADULT CHILD NEONATE
Detect narrow QRS Not Not available Available
available
QRS detection Automatic Same as the Automatic sensitivity
sensitivity sensitivity <SENSITIVITY> setting

User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series 9-15


9. ECG MONITORING

Learning the ECG Waveform for Arrhythmia Detection (VPC Learning)


The monitor automatically detects and classifies arrhythmia waveforms when
arrhythmia analysis is set to on. To do this, the monitor compares each beat of
the real-time ECG waveform to a reference ECG waveform (dominant QRS).
The monitor automatically samples this reference waveform when ECG
monitoring begins, when the monitoring lead is changed, when the “CHECK
ELECTRODES” alarm message is resolved or <PACING DETECT> setting is
changed. Sampling the reference waveform is called “Learning”.
Learning takes a few second. During learning, a “LEARNING” message is
displayed on the screen. After learning, the dominant QRS is replaced with the
new one and the monitor resumes analyzing the ECG waveforms.
NOTE • To make the monitor learn, <ARRHYTHMIA ANALYSIS> on
the ECG page of the PARAMETERS window of the SYSTEM
SETUP window must be set to ON.
• During learning, alarms other than “ASYSTOLE”, “VF”,
“BRADYCARDIA” and “TACHYCARDIA” do not function.
• When monitoring a patient with wide QRS tachycardia, the
monitor may misjudge the ECG and there may be VT or VF
alarms during learning. In that case, change to an electrode
lead in which a narrower QRS is obtained. If a narrower QRS
cannot be obtained in any electrode lead, do the learning during
the VT alarm. This waveform will be the dominant QRS. You
can make the monitor “relearn” the reference ECG waveform at
any time, for example, when the automatic VPC classification is
questionable.
• After ECG learning, confirm that the acquired dominant QRS is
the stable ECG of the patient.
You can make the monitor “relearn” the reference ECG waveform at any time,
for example, when the automatic VPC classification is questionable.

CAUTION
If there is any doubt about the arrhythmia analysis, make the monitor
relearn the patient’s ECG and check that the dominant QRS is
appropriate. Otherwise, an important arrhythmia may be overlooked.

1 Display the ECG window.


Touch [MENU] key → [ECG] key.

9-16 User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series


9. ECG MONITORING

2 Touch the [ECG1 LEAD/SENSITIVITY FILTERS/LEARN] key. The ECG1


LEAD/SENSITIVITY FILTERS/LEARN window opens.

3 Touch the [LEARN] key. The monitor learns the reference ECG waveform
and the dominant QRS is refreshed.

Date and time the


dominant QRS is
acquired

Dominant QRS

NOTE: The ECG waveform on the ECG1 LEAD/SENSITIVITY FILTER/


LEARN window is delayed 5 seconds.

4 Check that the dominant QRS is appropriate for arrhythmia analysis.


9
5 Touch the key to close the window.

6 Touch the [HOME] key to return to the home screen.

User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series 9-17


9. ECG MONITORING

Checking the Dominant QRS


The monitor detects QRS of the monitoring ECG and classifies them into
templates. The monitor selects the most typical QRS, called dominant QRS, and
uses it for analyzing arrhythmia. Whenever ECG is learned or relearned, the
dominant QRS is refreshed.
The ECG on the ECG1 LEAD/SENSITIVITY/FILTERS/LEARN window are
annotated by the following QRS classification.
QRS Annotation Description
N Normal QRS complex
P Paced QRS
V Ventricular premature contraction
? Impossible to classify or during learning.
– Impossible to classify due to noise interference.

If there is any doubt about the arrhythmia analysis, make the monitor relearn the
patient’s ECG and check the dominant QRS.

1 Display the ECG window.


Touch [MENU] key → [ECG] key.

2 Touch the [ECG1 LEAD/SENSITIVITY FILTERS/LEARN] key. The ECG1


LEAD/SENSITIVITY FILTERS/LEARN window opens.

9-18 User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series


9. ECG MONITORING

3 The dominant QRS and ECG of the first trace is displayed on the ECG1
LEAD/SENSITIVITY FILTERS/LEARN window.

QRS annotation

Dominant QRS

NOTE: The ECG waveform on the ECG1 LEAD/SENSITIVITY FILTER/


LEARN window is delayed 5 seconds.

4 Check that the dominant QRS is appropriate.


To change the dominant QRS, touch the [LEARN] key to relearn the ECG.
The dominant QRS is refreshed. 9
5 Touch the key to close the window.

6 Touch the [HOME] key to return to the home screen.

User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series 9-19


9. ECG MONITORING

Changing ECG Settings


Change settings on the ECG window. The following settings can be changed for
ECG monitoring.
• Monitoring lead
• ECG sensitivity
• Learn ECG. Refer to the “Monitoring Arrhythmia” section.
• Heart rate, VPC and ST alarm limits and setting
• Check dominant QRS. Refer to the “Monitoring Arrhythmia” section.
• Pacing on/off
• Number of electrodes
• Filter mode
• Sync source
• ECG measurement on or off
The following items can be set on the SYSTEM SETUP window. Refer to
Section 3 of the Administrator’s Guide.
• Auto lead change on/off when electrode is detached
• Arrhythmia analysis on/off. Refer to the “Monitoring Arrhythmia” section.
• Arrhythmia alarms
• ECG electrode lead type (IEC or AHA)
• Heart rate sync sound pitch (High, Middle, Low)
• ECG display color
• Pacing mark display on/off
• Pacing mark position
• Monitoring lead name for V-lead
• Alarm indicator sync with QRS on/off
• Cascade ECG waveform on/off
• Hum filter
The ST level unit (mV or mm) can be set on the SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
screen. Refer to Section 2 of the Administrator’s Guide.
The ECG sweep speed is the speed set for <SWEEP SPEED> on the SWEEP
SPEED window of the DISPLAY/SOUND window.

9-20 User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series


9. ECG MONITORING

Changing the Monitoring Lead


One lead can be monitored with 3 electrodes and two leads can be monitored
with 5 electrodes on the home screen.
No. of Electrodes Lead
3 I, II, III
5 I, II, III, aVR, aVL, aVF, V1 to V6

When monitoring with 5 electrodes, the lead of the first trace can be
automatically changed to a stable lead when there is an electrode detachment or
the “CHECK ELECTRODES” message is displayed for more than 5 seconds.
Refer to the “Auto Lead Change On or Off” section of the Administrator’s
Guide.

Optimum Lead
NOTE: Follow the physician’s instructions for lead position when
available.
It is generally considered that Lead II and Lead V1 are suitable for arrhythmia
monitoring and that Lead V4 and Lead V5 are suitable for myocardial ischemia
monitoring.
9
Some types of ECGs are difficult for automatic analysis, and heart rate or
arrhythmia detection level is not accurate for some patients. In these cases, use
the following procedure to find the appropriate lead for automatic analysis.

1 Measure the patient’s ECG with the standard 12 ECG leads using an ECG
instrument.

2 Select the optimum lead according to the following guidelines:


i) Select the lead with the highest QRS wave amplitude and least difference
in amplitude compared with a VPC or pacing pulse.
0.5 ≤ QRS1/QRS2 ≤ 2
ii) Select the lead with less than 0.2 mV amplitude of the P-wave.
P ≤ 0.2 mV
iii) Select the lead with a T-wave amplitude which is less than one-third of
the QRS wave.
T1 ≤ 1/3QRS1, T2 ≤ 1/3QRS2

QRS1

P T1 T2

QRS2

User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series 9-21


9. ECG MONITORING

Changing a Lead
You can change the lead of traces on the home screen.
NOTE: When the <ELECTRODES> setting is changed, the lead setting
automatically changes to II. Change the number of electrodes
setting before changing the lead.

1 Display the ECG window.


Touch [MENU] key → [ECG] key.

2 Touch the [ECG1 LEAD/SENSITIVITY FILTERS/LEARN] key. The ECG1


LEAD/SENSITIVITY FILTERS/LEARN window opens.

3 Select the lead from the <LEAD> box at the bottom of the window. The first
trace changes to the selected lead.

To change the lead for the second trace on the home screen, touch the [ECG2
LEAD/SENSITIVITY] key on the ECG window and select the lead for the
second trace.

9-22 User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series


9. ECG MONITORING

4 Touch the key to close the window.

5 Touch the [HOME] key to return to the home screen.

Changing the ECG Sensitivity


The sensitivity determines the size of the waveform on both the screen and
recording paper. For stable QRS detection, the QRS amplitude should be larger
than 1 cm on the screen.
The sensitivity of the first trace can be set manually or automatically. When you
select auto sensitivity, the sensitivity is automatically determined according to
the average QRS amplitude of the previous 16 beats. When sensitivity is set
automatically, “AUTO” appears beside the sensitivity on the screen.
QRS Wave Amplitude Auto Sensitivity
< 5 mm ×4
< 10 mm ×2
< 20 mm ×1
< 30 mm × 1/2
≥ 30 mm × 1/4

NOTE • During learning or when there is noise, auto sensitivity is not 9


possible.
• The sensitivity of the second trace cannot be set automatically.

1 Display the ECG window.


Touch [MENU] key → [ECG] key.

2 Touch the [ECG1 LEAD/SENSITIVITY FILTERS/LEARN] key. The ECG1


LEAD/SENSITIVITY FILTERS/LEARN window opens.

3 Select the sensitivity.

For first trace

User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series 9-23


9. ECG MONITORING

To change the sensitivity for the second trace, display the ECG2 LEAD/
SENSITIVITY window and select the sensitivity for the second trace.

4 Touch the key to close the window.

5 Touch the [HOME] key to return to the home screen.

Changing the Heart Rate/Pulse Rate, VPC and ST Alarm Limits

CAUTION
When the alarm limit is set to OFF, there will be no alarm for that
limit. Depending on the setting, the alarm off mark might not be
displayed on the screen. Be careful when you set the alarm limit to
OFF.

You can set the upper and lower heart rate/pulse rate, VPC and ST level of the
first trace alarm limits on the ECG window. You can set all alarms, including the
upper and lower heart rate alarm limits, on the ALARM LIMITS window (See
the Operator’s Manual or Section 5 of the User’s Guide).
Setting Range
NOTE: VPC alarm limit can only be set when <ARRHYTHMIA
ANALYSIS> on the SYSTEM SETUP window is ON.
HR/PR: Upper limit: When <SYNC SOURCE> is set to ECG:
16 to 300 beats/min in 1 beat/min steps, OFF
When <SYNC SOURCE> is set to PRESS1 or SpO2:
31 to 300 beats/min in 1 beat/min steps, OFF
(default setting: ADULT-140, CHILD-170, NEONATE-200)
Lower limit: When <SYNC SOURCE> is set to ECG:
OFF, 15 to 299 beats/min in 1 beat/min steps
When <SYNC SOURCE> is set to PRESS1 or SpO2:
OFF, 30 to 299 beats/min in 1 beat/min steps
(default setting: ADULT-50, CHILD-75, NEONATE-100)
VPC: Upper limit: 1 to 99 beats/min in 1 beats/min steps, OFF
(default setting: OFF)
ST: Upper limit: –1.99 to +2.00 mV in 0.01 mV steps (–19.9 to +20.0 mm in 0.1
mm steps), OFF (default setting: OFF)
Lower limit: OFF, –2.00 to +1.99 mV in 0.01 mV steps (–20.0 to +19.9 mm
in 0.1 mm steps) (default setting: OFF)

9-24 User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series


9. ECG MONITORING

1 Display the ECG window.


Touch [MENU] key → [ECG] key.

2 Touch the [HR/PR] key to change the heart rate/pulse rate alarm limits.
Touch the [VPC] key to change the VPC alarm limit.
Touch the [ST] key to change the ST level of the first trace alarm limits.
Selected parameter

Upper limit

Upper limit
slider
Current measured Setting bar
value

9
Lower limit slider Lower limit

3 Touch and drag the sliders to the desired level on the setting bar. Use the
or key to adjust the setting.
If the upper limit is set to a value above the maximum, the upper limit alarm
is set to OFF. If the lower limit is set to a value below the minimum, the
lower limit alarm is set to OFF.

4 Touch the key to close the window.

5 Touch the [HOME] key to return to the home screen.

Checking Arrhythmia Alarm Settings

WARNING
For arrhythmia monitoring, set <ARRHYTHMIA ANALYSIS> on the
SYSTEM SETUP window to ON. Otherwise, there is no sound or
indication for arrhythmia alarms (except for ASYSTOLE).

CAUTION
When the alarm is turned to OFF for an arrhythmia, there will be no
alarm for that arrhythmia type. There is no message or mark to
indicate that a certain arrhythmia alarm is turned off. Therefore, be
careful when you turn off an arrhythmia alarm.

NOTE: When an arrhythmia alarm is turned to OFF, there will be no alarm


recording for that arrhythmia type even when alarm recording is
set to ON on the RECORD window.
You can check the arrhythmia alarm settings. Only an administrator can change
the settings. Refer to Section 3 of the Administrator’s Guide.

User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series 9-25


9. ECG MONITORING

Alarm ON/OFF
Parameter Detection Condition (Default Setting)
Setting
ASYSTOLE 3 to 10 seconds (5) ON fixed
VF – ON fixed
9 or more consecutive VPCs when heart rate
VT exceeding 100 beats/min. ON fixed
(ADULT, CHILD: 100, NEONATE: 140)
VPC RUN 3 to 8 VPCs (3) ON fixed
COUPLET – ON/OFF (OFF)
EARLY VPC – ON/OFF (OFF)
BIGEMINY – ON/OFF (OFF)

Select the arrhythmia type in the SYSTEM SETUP window. Refer to the
Administrator’s guide, Section 3.

1 Display the ECG window.


Touch [MENU] key → [ECG] key.

2 Touch the [ARRHYTH ALARMS] key. The ARRHYTH ALARMS window


opens.

Threshold setting

ON/OFF setting

3 Check the arrhythmia alarm settings. An administrator can change the setting
by touching the [SETUP] key. Refer to “ARRHYTH Page” in Section 3 of
the Administrator’s Guide.

4 Touch the key to close the window.

5 Touch the [HOME] key to return to the home screen.

9-26 User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series


9. ECG MONITORING

Turning ECG Measurement On or Off


You can turn ECG measurement on or off.
ON: Measurement data and alarms related to ECG are displayed. When ECG
measurement is turned from OFF to ON, the waveform on the home screen
automatically changes from pulse waveform to ECG waveform and the SYNC
SOURCE automatically changes to ECG.
OFF: Measurement data and alarms related to ECG are not displayed. The waveform on
the home screen automatically changes from ECG waveform to pulse waveform.
The SYNC SOURCE automatically changes from ECG to SpO2.

CAUTION
When the ECG measurement is OFF, ECG alarms do not occur
even if each ECG alarm item is set to ON.

NOTE • You cannot turn off the ECG measurement when ECG is
monitored.
• When ECG data is received, the ECG measurement is
automatically set to ON. If the ECG measurement does not
start, set ECG measurement to ON manually.

1 Display the ECG window. 9


Touch [MENU] key → [ECG] key.

2 Touch the [ECG MEASUREMENT] key. The ECG MEASUREMENT


window opens.

3 Touch the [ON] or [OFF] key to set ECG measurement on or off.

4 Touch the key to close the window.

5 Press the [HOME] key to return to the home screen.

User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series 9-27


9. ECG MONITORING

When ECG measurement is turned off, other parameters are enlarged on the
home screen.

When the ECG measurement is turned off, HR, VPC and ST on the TREND
TABLE, NIBP TABLE and TREND GRAPH window is not displayed. The ECG
full disclosure waveform is not displayed on the FULL DISC window.

Turning Pacing Spike Detection On or Off


When the patient has an implanted cardiac pacemaker, the pacing pulse may be
counted as QRS and the heart rate may be miscounted. The pacing pulse is a
very small wave which cannot be displayed on the monitor. When pacing spike
detection is set to ON, the pacemaker spikes are rejected which allows correct
heart rate counting. When pacing mark is set to ON on the SYSTEM SETUP
window, the pacing mark is displayed on the ECG. Refer to Section 3 of the
Administrator’s Guide.
When pacing spike detection is set to OFF, the non-paced mark appears in the
upper right of the screen.

WARNING
Turn the pacing pulse detection* to ON when monitoring a
pacemaker patient. Otherwise the pacemaker pulse is not rejected.
However, even when the pacing pulse detection is set to ON, the
pacemaker pulse might not be rejected. When the pacemaker pulse
is not rejected, the pacemaker pulse is detected as QRS and false
heart rate may be indicated or critical arrhythmia such as asystole
may be overlooked. Keep pacemaker patients under close
observation.

WARNING
Even when the pacing pulse detection is set to ON, the pacemaker
pulse can be overlooked or detected as QRS. You cannot confirm
the pacemaker operation only from the detected pacemaker pulse.

* For the pacemaker pulse rejection capability of SVM-7503 and SVM-7523


bedside monitors, refer to the “Specifications - ECG” in operator’s manual.
NOTE: When you monitor a premature baby or infant and the monitor
miscounts the narrow width QRS, set PACING DETECT to OFF.

9-28 User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series


9. ECG MONITORING

1 Display the ECG window.


Touch [MENU] key → [ECG] key.

2 Touch the [PACING DETECT] key. The PACING window opens.

3 Touch the [ON] or [OFF] key to select on or off.

4 Touch the key to close the window.

5 Touch the [HOME] key to return to the home screen.

User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series 9-29


9. ECG MONITORING

Changing the Number of Electrodes


Select the type and number of electrodes.

1 Display the ECG window.


Touch [MENU] key → [ECG] key.

2 Touch the [ELECTRODES] key. The ELECTRODES window opens.

3 Select the type and number of electrodes.


3: Monitoring with 3 electrodes.
5: Monitoring with 5 electrodes.

4 Touch the key to close the window.

5 Touch the [HOME] key to return to the home screen.

9-30 User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series


9. ECG MONITORING

Selecting the Filter Type


There are following types for ECG filter.
DIAG: This mode is best for viewing the details of the waveform. It is similar to
the real ECG. (0.05 to 150 Hz)
MONITOR: Low-cut and high-cut filter. (0.3 to 40 Hz)
MAXIMUM: Baseline drift-free, hum (AC) and high-cut filter. Appropriate when there
is noise from AC or ESU. (1 to 18 Hz)

NOTE • When performing defibrillation, set the <FILTERS> to


MONITOR or MAXIMUM. The waveform recovery may become
slow due to electrode polarization when DIAG is set.
• When DIAG is selected, the frequency response is 0.05 to 150
Hz. Be aware of this when monitoring the ECG.

1 Display the ECG window.


Touch [MENU] key → [ECG] key.

2 Touch the [ECG1 LEAD/SENSITIVITY/FILTERS/LEARN] key. The ECG1


LEAD/SENSITIVITY/FILTERS/LEARN window opens.

3 Select filter type in the <FILTERS> box.

4 Touch the key to close the window.

5 Touch the [HOME] key to return to the home screen.

User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series 9-31


9. ECG MONITORING

Changing the Sync Sound Source


You can select ECG, SpO2 pulse (SpO2) or arterial blood pressure pulse
(PRESS1) as the sync sound source. The sync source can also be changed on the
SpO2 and PRESS windows.
When pulse wave and pressure waveform are irregular because of an IABP,
select ECG.
NOTE • When heart rate is unstable because of an ESU, select SpO2 or
PRESS1.
• When the connection cord of SpO2 or IBP of the arterial blood
pressure is disconnected from the monitor and an alarm occurs
when the sync source is set to SpO2 or PRESS1, the sync
source changes to ECG when the alarm is silenced by touching
the [Silence Alarms] key. The sync source returns to SpO2 or
PRESS1 when the SpO2 or IBP is monitored again. When using
PRESS1 as the sync source, adjust zero balance.
• When the sensor is detached from the patient and alarm
occurs, and the sync source is set to SpO2 or PRESS1, the
sync source does not change to ECG when the alarm is
silenced, and "- - -" is displayed for PR.
• PRESS1 is only available for SVM-7503 and SVM-7523.
When the sync source is set to ECG and ECG is not measured, there is no sync
sound.
When SpO2 is selected, the pulse rate is displayed to the left of the heart rate on
the screen and the sync mark synchronizes with the pulse.

9-32 User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series


9. ECG MONITORING

1 Display the ECG window.


Touch [MENU] key → [ECG] key.

2 Touch the [SYNC SOURCE] key. The SYNC SOURCE window opens.

3 Select the sync source.


ECG: QRS
PRESS1: Pulse wave of arterial blood pressure
9
SpO2: SpO2 pulse

4 Touch the key to close the window.

5 Touch the [HOME] key to return to the home screen.

User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series 9-33


9. ECG MONITORING

Use with an Electrosurgical Unit


For use with an electrosurgical unit (ESU), this monitor has a circuit to
protect the patient from skin burn and to reduce ESU interference on the ECG
waveform. However, the effectiveness of this circuit depends on electrode
position and monitor setup. With an ESU, pay attention to the following points.

WARNING
When the monitor is used with an electrosurgical unit (ESU), firmly
attach the entire area of the ESU return plate. Otherwise, the current
from the ESU flows into the electrodes of the monitor, causing
electrical burn where the electrodes are attached. For details, refer
to the ESU manual.

WARNING
When using the monitor with an ESU, locate the monitor and ESU
and ground the instruments properly. Check the ECG and value on
the monitor. Otherwise noise from the ESU may interfere with the
ECG and the heart rate and arrhythmia analysis may be incorrect.

• Arrangement
Install the monitor as far from the ESU as possible. If possible, locate them on
opposite sides of the operating table.
• Power supply
Noise from the ESU may interfere with the ECG signal through the AC power
line. Supply power to the monitor and ESU from different outlets located as far
from each other as possible. Do the equipotential grounding properly.

3 electrodes

Power supply and Power supply and


grounding for ESU grounding for monitor

ESU Operating table


SVM-7500 seriesmonitor
PVM-2701/2703 monitor

• Measure with 3-electrode lead


Use the minimum number of electrodes. Use new electrodes.
• Minimize noise
1. Select an ECG lead where the active ECG electrodes are located as far from
the incision as possible.
2. Position the + and – electrodes as close as possible.
3. Select the leads where the angle (θ) between the active electrodes and the
incision is as small as possible.
4. Set the electrosurgical return plate as close to the incision as possible.

9-34 User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series


9. ECG MONITORING

As far as possible from electrode and


as near as possible to incision.

Return plate
Incision

Make small

• Set the following items on the ECG window.


FILTERS: MAXIMUM
SYNC SOURCE: SpO2

• Noise is superimposed on the waveform and the respiration rate cannot be


monitored accurately in the impedance method. When monitoring respiration,
turn respiration monitoring off.

User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series 9-35


9. ECG MONITORING

ECG 7-lead Display


SVM-7500 series bedside monitor can display 7 leads on the screen.

1 Touch [7 LEAD] key on the MENU window to display ECG 7 screen.


Waveforms of ECG 7-lead can be displayed (I, II, III, aVR, aVL, aVF and V
lead*).

2 Touch [MENU] key or blank on the screen to return to home screen.

NOTE: ECG 7-lead can be displayed only in 5-electrode mode. For


details on setting of 5-electrode, refer to “ECG” section.
* The V lead label can be set in “V-LEAD” window of SYSTEM SETUP →
PARAMETERS → ECG.

9-36 User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series


10 Respiration
Monitoring

General..........................................................................10-2
Impedance Method.......................................................................10-2

Preparing for Respiration Monitoring in Impedance


Method..........................................................................10-3
Preparation Flowchart..................................................................10-3
Electrode Position and Waveform Examples...............................10-3 10
Electrode Position........................................................................10-3
Electrode Position................................................................... 10-4
Amplitude................................................................................ 10-4
Connecting Cables and Attaching Disposable Electrodes...........10-4

Monitoring Respiration..................................................10-5
Respiration Information on the Home Screen..............................10-5

Changing Respiration Settings......................................10-6


Changing the Monitoring Lead in Impedance Method..................10-6
Changing the Respiration Sensitivity............................................10-6
Turning Respiration Measurement On or Off in Impedance
Method.........................................................................................10-7
Changing the Respiration Rate and Apnea Alarm Limits.............10-8
Changing the Respiration Waveform Sweep Speed..................10-10
10. RESPIRATION MONITORING

General
On this monitor, respiration can be measured by impedance method.

Impedance Method
In the impedance method, respiration is measured and monitored by attaching the
ECG electrodes to the patient and connecting them to the ECG/RESP socket on
the monitor. This method measures changes in impedance between the R and F
(RA and LL) ECG electrodes.

WARNING
Interaction Between Minute Ventilation Rate-Adaptive Pacemakers
and Cardiac Monitoring and Diagnostic Equipment*
The bioelectric impedance measurement sensor of a minute
ventilation rate-adaptive implantable pacemaker may be affected by
cardiac monitoring and diagnostic equipment which is connected to
the same patient. If this occurs, the pacemaker may pace at its
maximum rate and give incorrect data to the monitor or diagnostic
equipment. In this case, set the <IMPEDANCE MEASUREMENT>
on the RESP window to OFF on the bedside monitor.

* Minute ventilation is sensed in rate-adaptive pacemakers by a technology


known as bioelectric impedance measurement (BIM). Many medical devices
in addition to pacemakers use this technology. When one of these devices is
used on a patient with an active, minute ventilation rate-adaptive pacemaker,
the pacemaker may erroneously interpret the mixture of BIM signals created in
the patient, resulting in an elevated pacing rate.

10-2 User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series


10. RESPIRATION MONITORING

Preparing for Respiration Monitoring in Impedance Method

Preparation Flowchart
The electrode lead is fixed on R-F.

1 Connect the electrode lead to the ECG patient cable and connect the ECG
patient cable to the ECG/RESP socket on the left side panel of the monitor.

3 Attach the disposable electrodes to the patient and attach the electrode lead
to the electrodes.

4 Monitoring starts. Set necessary settings.

Electrode Position and Waveform Examples


Respiration can be measured by the impedance method when the R (RA) and F
(LL) electrodes are placed so that the lungs are between the electrodes.
The optimum electrode positions for ECG monitoring of a patient are not always
optimum for respiration monitoring of the patient. Select the optimum positions
for both ECG and respiration measurements.
10
The amplitude of the respiration
Electrode lead and position
waveform differs according to the electrode
162 cm 47 kg female 153 cm 45 kg female
position. The following shows different examples of respiration waveforms
according to the electrode position when monitoring with the impedance method.

L/LA
Electrode Position
R/RA
1
F/LL
Electrode lead and position 162 cm 47 kg female 153 cm 45 kg female
Standard R-F/RA-LL

R/RA L/LA
R/RA L/LA
1
2
F/LL
F/LL
Standard R-F/RA-LL
R-L/RA-LA

R/RA
R/RA L/LA
L/LA
2
3
2
F/LL
F/LL
R-F/RA-LL withR-L/RA-LA
higher F/LL position

R/RA L/LA
3
F/LL

R-F/RA-LL with higher F/LL position

User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series 10-3


10. RESPIRATION MONITORING

Electrode Position
R or RA F or LL L or LA
Lowest rib on the left anterior
1 Right infraclavicular fossa —
axillary line
Fifth intercostal space on the
2 Right infraclavicular fossa —
left midaxillary line

Amplitude
170 cm 60 kg male 179 cm 94 kg male 160 cm 50 kg male
1 Respiration measurement is influenced by movement of the chest and abdomen.
The amplitude of the waveform changes greatly according to slight change of the F
(LL) electrode position. It also differs considerably between different patients.
2 Respiration amplitude is large, and therefore, detection rate is good. The electrode
position is similar to lead II of the ECG. This position is highly recommended.

170 cm 60 kg male 179 cm 94 kg male 160 cm 50 kg male

Connecting Cables and Attaching Disposable Electrodes


Connecting cables and attaching disposable electrodes are the same as for the
ECG monitoring. Refer to “Preparing for ECG Monitoring” in Section 9.

10-4 User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series


10. RESPIRATION MONITORING

Monitoring Respiration
When preparation is done properly, the respiration waveform appears on the
screen.
In impedance method, the respiration data do not appear on the screen when
respiration monitoring in impedance method is set to OFF (the “RESP OFF”
message appears). When using an ESU, noise is superimposed on the waveform
and the respiration measurement cannot be monitored accurately.

Respiration Information on the Home Screen

10

Respiration Respiration waveform Scale


sync mark
Respiration rate

User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series 10-5


10. RESPIRATION MONITORING

Changing Respiration Settings


Change settings on the RESP window (SVM-7501 and SVM-7521) or RESP/
CO2 window (SVM-7503 and SVM-7523). The following settings can be
changed for respiration monitoring.
• Turning respiration monitoring on/off
• Changing monitoring lead
• Respiration sensitivity
• Respiration rate and apnea alarm limits
• Respiration waveform sweep speed
The respiration waveform sweep speed can also be set on the DISPLAY/
SOUND window. Refer to Section 3.
The noise reduction for impedance respiration monitoring can be turned on or
off and the respiration data display color can be set on the SYSTEM SETUP
window. Refer to Section 3 of the Administrator’s Guide.
NOTE: The screens in this section are for SVM-7503 and SVM-7523.
The procedure is the same for SVM-7501 and SVM-7521.

Changing the Monitoring Lead in Impedance Method


The lead is fixed to R-F (RA-LL).

Changing the Respiration Sensitivity


The sensitivity determines the size of the waveform on both the screen and
recording paper.
The respiration waveform amplitude differs according to the sensitivity and the
NOISE REDUCTION ON IMPEDANCE RESP setting on the SYSTEM SETUP
window. The following amplitudes for the respiration rate can be counted. Refer
to Section 3 of the Administrator’s Guide for the NOISE REDUCTION ON
IMPEDANCE RESP setting.

10-6 User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series


10. RESPIRATION MONITORING

NOISE REDUCTION ON Countable Amplitudes for


Sensitivity
IMPEDANCE RESP Setting the Respiration Rate
× 1/4 Larger than 0.375 mm
× 1/2 Larger than 0.75 mm
OFF ×1 Larger than 1.5 mm
×2 Larger than 3 mm
×4 Larger than 6 mm
ON All sensitivities Larger than 10 mm

1 Display the RESP or RESP/CO2 window.


Touch [MENU] key → [RESP] or [RESP/CO2] key.

10

2 Touch the [RESP LEAD/SENSITIVITY] key. The RESP LEAD/


SENSITIVITY window opens.

3 Select the appropriate sensitivity from × 1/4, × 1/2, × 1, × 2 and × 4 in the


<SENSITIVITY> box.

4 Touch the key to close the window.

5 Touch the [HOME] key to return to the home screen.

Turning Respiration Measurement On or Off in Impedance Method


Even when respiration measurement is set up, you can turn respiration
measurement off if you do not need it. When respiration is turned off, respiration
waveform does not appear and the “RESP OFF” message appears on the home
screen. When respiration is not available, no respiration data appears.
NOTE: When using an ESU, noise is superimposed on the waveform and
the respiration measurement cannot be monitored accurately.

User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series 10-7


10. RESPIRATION MONITORING

1 Display the RESP or RESP/CO2 window.


Touch [MENU] key → [RESP] or [RESP/CO2] key.

2 Touch the [IMPEDANCE MEASUREMENT] key. The IMPEDANCE


MEASUREMENT window opens.

3 Select [ON] or [OFF] key to turn impedance measurement on or off.

4 Touch the key to close the window.

5 Touch the [HOME] key to return to the home screen.

Changing the Respiration Rate and Apnea Alarm Limits

CAUTION
When the alarm limit is set to OFF, there will be no alarm for that
limit. Depending on the setting, the alarm off mark might not be
display on the screen. Be careful when you set the alarm limit to
OFF.

You can set the upper and lower respiration rate and apnea alarm limits on the
RESP or RESP/CO2 window. You can set all alarms, including the upper and
lower respiration rate and apnea alarm limits, on the ALARM LIMITS window
(See the Operator’s Manual or Section 5 of the User’s Guide).

10-8 User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series


10. RESPIRATION MONITORING

Setting Range
Respiration rate upper limit: 2 to 150 counts/min in 2 counts/min steps, OFF
(default setting: OFF)
Respiration rate lower limit: OFF, 0 to 148 counts/min in 2 counts/min steps
(default setting: OFF)
Apnea upper limit: 5 to 40 seconds in 5-second steps, OFF (default setting: 20)

1 Display the RESP or RESP/CO2 window.


Touch [MENU] key → [RESP] or [RESP/CO2] key.

10

2 Touch the [RR] key to change the respiration rate alarm setting.
Touch the [APNEA] key to change the apnea alarm setting.
Selected parameter

Upper limit
slider
Upper limit

Setting bar

Current measured
value

Lower limit slider Lower limit

3 Touch and drag the sliders to the desired level on the setting bar. Use the
or key to adjust the setting.
If the upper limit is set to a value above the maximum, the upper limit alarm
is set to OFF. If the lower limit is set to a value below the minimum, the
lower limit alarm is set to OFF.

4 Touch the key to close the window.

5 Touch the [HOME] key to return to the home screen.

User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series 10-9


10. RESPIRATION MONITORING

Changing the Respiration Waveform Sweep Speed


The respiration waveform sweep speed on the screen can be selected. This
setting can also be changed on the DISPLAY/SOUND window.

1 Display the RESP or RESP/CO2 window.


Touch [MENU] key → [RESP] or [RESP/CO2] key.

2 Touch the [RESP SWEEP SPEED] or [RESP/CO2 SWEEP SPEED] key. The
RESP SWEEP SPEED or RESP/CO2 SWEEP SPEED window opens.

3 Select the sweep speed.

4 Touch the key to close the window.

5 Touch the [HOME] key to return to the home screen.

10-10 User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series


11 CO2 Monitoring

General.......................................................................... 11-2
Mainstream Method......................................................................11-2
Measurement Error with the TG-901T4/TG-921T4 CO2 Sensor
Kit.................................................................................................11-2
Use with Volatile Anesthetic Agents.............................................11-4

Preparing for CO2 Monitoring........................................ 11-5


Preparation Flowchart..................................................................11-5
Mainstream Method.................................................................11-5
Types of CO2 Sensor Kits for Mainstream Method.......................11-5
11
TG-901T4 CO2 Sensor Kit........................................................11-6
TG-921T4 CO2 Sensor Kit........................................................ 11-7
TG-971T4/TG-981T4 CO2 Sensor Kit.......................................11-9
Connecting the CO2 Sensor Kit to the Monitor........................... 11-11
Connecting the CO2 Sensor Kit to the Respiration Circuit.......... 11-11
Performing Zero Calibration when Using a TG-971T4/TG-981T4
CO2 Sensor Kit........................................................................... 11-11
Calibrating by Air.................................................................... 11-12
Calibrating with N2 Gas.......................................................... 11-13

Monitoring CO2............................................................ 11-14


CO2 Information on the Home Screen........................................11-14

Changing CO2 Settings................................................ 11-16


Changing the Scale....................................................................11-16
Changing the CO2, Respiration Rate and Apnea Alarm Limits...11-17
Setting the Inspiration Composition............................................11-18
Changing the CO2 Waveform Sweep Speed..............................11-19
Changing Duration for Holding ETCO2 Maximum Value............11-19

Inspection of Measuring Accuracy............................... 11-21


Daily Inspection of Measuring Accuracy.....................................11-21
Inspection of Measuring Accuracy (Precise Method).................11-21
11. CO2 MONITORING

General
On this monitor, CO2 can be measured by mainstream method.
To monitor CO2 by the mainstream method, connect the TG-901T4, TG-921T4,
TG-971T4 or TG-981T4 CO2 sensor kit to the patient’s respiration circuit or
directly to the patient and connect the CO2 sensor kit to the CO2 socket on the
monitor.

Mainstream Method
In the mainstream method, the sensor is located directly in the respiration circuit.
There are two types of sensors for different calculation methods.
Semi-quantitative method using the TG-901T4/TG-921T4 CO2 sensor kit
Measurements are based on the assumption of no CO2 gas in the inspiration.
The CO2 concentration in the respiration is calculated by taking the CO2
concentration in the inspiration as 0 mmHg (0 kPa).
Quantitative method using the TG-971T4/TG-981T4 CO2 sensor kit
The CO2 partial pressure in both inspiration and expiration is measured.
The mainstream CO2 measurement method has the following merits and limits
compared to the sidestream method. Understand these points when performing
measurements.
Merits
• No delay in the measurement time.
• Measurement is stable over a long period of time.
• Few measurement troubles due to mixture of water droplets.
Limits
• TG-901T4 CO2 sensor kit cannot be used on non-intubated patients.
• Due to the weight of the TG-901T4 CO2 sensor kit, load is easily imposed on
the tracheal tube.
• The dead space volume is relatively large.

Measurement Error with the TG-901T4/TG-921T4 CO2 Sensor Kit


With the TG-901T4/TG-921T4 CO2 sensor kit, measurements are based on the
assumption that the inspiration contains no CO2 gas. If CO2 gas mixes in the
inspiration, measured values will be lower than normal.

WARNING
With the TG-901T4/TG-921T4 CO2 sensor kit, measurements are
based on the assumption of no CO2 gas in the inspiration. The CO2
concentration in the respiration is calculated by taking the CO2
concentration in the inspiration as 0 mmHg. Therefore, measuring
CO2 by connecting the CO2 sensor kit to a Jackson Rees circuit,
Mapleson D circuit or any other respiration circuit where CO2 gas
may be present during inspiration may result in the acquired data
being lower than the actual value.

11-2 User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series


11. CO2 MONITORING

WARNING
The CO2 sensor kit cannot correctly measure the ETCO2 value and
respiration rate during high frequency oscillation (HFO). Do not
diagnose the patient from the ETCO2 Value and respiration rate.

CAUTION
With the TG-921T4 CO2 sensor kit, measurements are based on the
assumption of no CO2 gas in the inspiration. The CO2 concentration
in the respiration is calculated by taking the CO2 concentration in the
inspiration as 0 mmHg. Therefore, measuring CO2 of a patient with
an oxygen mask where CO2 gas may be present in the inspiration
gas may result in the acquired data being lower than the actual
value.

When CO2 is mixed in inspiration

Actual CO2 waveform CO2 waveform on the monitor


40 mmHg 40 mmHg
5.3 kPa 5.3 kPa
Measured value becomes lower

CO2 mixed in inspiration

11
0 0

Measurement Error when CO2 is Mixed in the Inspired Air


ETCO2 (mmHg)
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80
(1.3 kPa) (2.7 kPa) (4.0 kPa) (5.3 kPa) (6.7 kPa) (8.0 kPa) (9.3 kPa) (10.7 kPa)
10
(1.3 kPa)

5
(0.7 kPa)

0
Error (mmHg)

5
( 0.7 kPa)

10
( 1.3 kPa)

15
( 2.0 kPa)

20
( 2.7 kPa)

25
( 3.3 kPa)
CO2 mixed in inspired air
1 mmHg (0.1 kPa)
2 mmHg (0.3 kPa)
4 mmHg (0.5 kPa)
8 mmHg (1.1 kPa)

CAUTION
The TG-901T4 and TG-921T4 CO2 sensor kits do not adjust the
measurement value to compensate for different atmospheric
pressure. Be careful when reading the value when using the CO2
sensor kit at high altitudes because the measurement value may be
inaccurate.

The measurement value drops 0.13 kPa (1 mmHg) for 5.33 kPa (40 mmHg) CO2
gas when an atmospheric pressure drops 3.3 kPa.

User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series 11-3


11. CO2 MONITORING

CAUTION
The measured value may be incorrect when the operating
temperature changes greatly or there is excess condensation in the
airway adapter or nasal adapter.

Use with Volatile Anesthetic Agents

CAUTION
When using an anesthetic instrument with a volatile anesthetic
agent, the CO2 measurement may be inaccurate.

Volatile anesthetic agents affect the CO2 value. Be aware of this when using
volatile anesthetic agent.
Example: At 1 atmospheric pressure, 5 % (38 mmHg, 5.07 kPa) CO2 and N2
mixture gas, no condensation

Difference
Anesthetic Gas Concentration TG-901T4 TG-921T4 TG-971T4/
TG-981T4
+0.9 mmHg +0.9 mmHg +0.3 mmHg
Halothane 4%
(+0.12 kPa) (+0.12 kPa) (+0.04 kPa)
+1.5 mmHg +1.5 mmHg +0.9 mmHg
Enflurane 5%
(+0.20 kPa) (+0.20 kPa) (+0.12 kPa)
+1.8 mmHg +1.8 mmHg +1.7 mmHg
Isoflurane 5%
(+0.24 kPa) (+0.24 kPa) (+0.22 kPa)
+2.8 mmHg +2.8 mmHg +2.1 mmHg
Sevoflurane 6%
(+0.37 kPa) (+0.37 kPa) (+0.28 kPa)
+7.0 mmHg +6.6 mmHg -
24 %
(+0.93 kPa) (+0.88 kPa)
Desflurane
+6.6 mmHg +5.4 mmHg +2.9 mmHg
15 %
(+0.88 kPa) (+0.72 kPa) (+0.39 kPa)

11-4 User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series


11. CO2 MONITORING

Preparing for CO2 Monitoring


NOTE: When using N2O anesthetic gas (nitrous oxide), set the gas
composition on the GAS COMP window. Refer to the “Setting the
Inspiration Composition” section.

Preparation Flowchart
Mainstream Method

1 Select the CO2 sensor kit and airway adapter/nasal adapter.

2 Connect the CO2 sensor kit to the CO2 socket on the monitor.

3 When using a TG-971T4/TG-981T4 CO2 sensor kit, perform zero calibration.

4 Connect the CO2 sensor to the respiration circuit or attach the CO2 sensor to
the patient.

5 Start measurements and change necessary settings.

Types of CO2 Sensor Kits for Mainstream Method


There are three types of CO2 sensor kit for CO2 mainstream monitoring.
Model Method Attachment 11
Semi-
TG-901T4 Used on an intubated patient
quantitative
Semi-
TG-921T4 Attach to the patient nose or used on an intubated patient
quantitative
Used on an intubated patient with YG-211T/213T/214T.
TG-971T4
Quantitative Used on a non-intubated patient with YG-
TG-981T4
232T/242T/272T/282T/227T.

WARNING
Select the airway adapter or nasal adapter taking the patient weight
and ventilation volume into consideration. If an inappropriate airway
adapter or nasal adapter is used, the resistance in the respiration
circuit increases or the measurement value is incorrect.

WARNING
When using the airway adapter or nasal adapter on a patient with
low ventilatory volume, the CO2 may mix in the inspiration due to the
airway adapter’s dead space volume, resulting in inaccurate
measured values or difficulty in detecting apnea. Perform ventilation
taking into consideration the dead space volume.

CAUTION
The CO2 data may be inaccurate when monitoring a patient with an
extremely high respiration rate or irregular respiration. Read the
measured values carefully.

User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series 11-5


11. CO2 MONITORING

CAUTION
When monitoring CO2, make sure that the gas composition is
entered. Otherwise the measurement result may be inaccurate.

CAUTION
When using an anesthetic instrument with a volatile anesthetic
agent, the CO2 measurement may be inaccurate.

CAUTION
The airway adapter/nasal adapter is non-sterilized and disposable.
Use only for a single patient and single use. Failure to follow this
instruction causes cross infection.

NOTE: The measurement may be inaccurate when monitored in the


following conditions. Read the measured values carefully.
• When used in environments with high concentration nitrous
oxide gas.
• When used in environments with sudden temperature changes.
• When used in environments with severe humidity.

TG-901T4 CO2 Sensor Kit


The TG-901T4 CO2 sensor kit measures the partial pressure of the expired CO2
of an intubated patient by the semi-quantitative method. It requires an YG-101T
airway adapter for monitoring CO2.

TG-901T4 CO2 sensor YG-101T airway adapter

Model Weight Dead space volume Code No.


YG-101T 10 kg or more 5 mL R801

11-6 User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series


11. CO2 MONITORING

TG-921T4 CO2 Sensor Kit


The TG-921T4 CO2 sensor kit measures the partial pressure of the expired CO2
of a patient by the semi-quantitative method. This CO2 sensor kit can be used on
both intubated and not intubated patients. It requires a YG-120T, YG-121T or
YG-122T nasal adapter when attached on a patient who is not intubated or YG-
111T airway adapter when attached on an intubated patient for monitoring CO2.

TG-921T4 CO2 sensor YG-111T airway adapter

YG-120T YG-121T YG-122T


(for nasal breathing) (for naso-oral) (for oxygen cannula)
Nasal tube

Holder for
oxygen cannula
Clip Mouth guide
Mouth guide

11
Dead Space
Type of Adapter Model Weight Code No.
Volume
Airway adapter YG-111T 7 kg or more 4 mL R804
YG-120T V921
Nasal adapter YG-121T 10 kg or more 1.2 mL V922
YG-122T V923

User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series 11-7


11. CO2 MONITORING

WARNING
The only oxygen cannula that can be used with YG-122T is
manufactured by HUDSON RCI®. Do not use any other oxygen
cannula. Other oxygen cannulas cannot be attached and oxygen
cannot be delivered to the patient through the nostrils.

WARNING
Check that the oxygen cannula tube is not bent, broken, or blocked
by the nasal tube. If the ends of the oxygen cannula tube turn too far
up or down, it causes insufficient O2 supply or the CO2 value may be
incorrect.

WARNING
• When you use YG-122T together with an oxygen cannula, check
that the oxygen cannula is correctly attached on the patient
by referring to other parameters and by observing the patient
periodically.
• If arterial oxygen partial pressure does not increase, immediately
stop using the oxygen cannula with the CO2 sensor kit and select
another way to supply oxygen.

CAUTION
When using the YG-121T/YG-122T nasal adapter on a patient with
bleeding disorder, poor general medical condition or malnutrition,
observe the patient condition all the time. The mouth guide touches
the mouth and may cause pressure sores.

When Using an Oxygen Cannula


As the graphs show, the expired volume is decreased at the end of expiration.
If too much oxygen is supplied or oxygen is directly delivered to the nose, the
oxygen flow affects the expired gas flow. Therefore, the actual CO2 waveform
will be inaccurate (the solid line in the graph) compared with the typical pattern
(the dashed line).

11-8 User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series


11. CO2 MONITORING

TG-971T4/TG-981T4 CO2 Sensor Kit


Measures the partial pressure of the expired CO2 of an intubated patient by the
quantitative method.
An adapter or cap-ONE mask can be selected to enable measurement with both
intubated and non-intubated patients.
• For intubated patients:  se with the YG-211T, YG-213T or YG-214T
U
airway adapter.
• For non-intubated patients: Use with the YG-232T, YG-242T, YG-272T, YG-
282T or YG-227T cap-ONE mask.

CAUTION
The TG-971T4/TG-981T4 CO2 sensor kit cannot correctly measure
the ETCO2 value and respiration rate during high frequency
oscillation (HFO). Do not diagnose the patient from the ETCO2 Value
and respiration rate.

CAUTION
With the TG-971T4/TG-981T4 CO2 sensor kit, measured value may
be incorrect when the operating temperature changes greatly. In this
case, wait for about 30 minutes to acquire correct measurement.

NOTE: The measurement value itself may be inaccurate under the 11


following conditions.
• When used in environments with a high concentration of N2O
anesthetic gas.
• When used in environments with sudden temperature changes.

• When used in environments with severe humidity.

TG-971T4/TG-981T4 CO2 Sensor Kit


These CO2 sensor kits have the sensor and the measurement circuit for measuring CO2.
TG-971T4 TG-981T4

User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series 11-9


11. CO2 MONITORING

For non-intubated patient: With cap-One mask For intubated patient: With airway adapter

YG-232T YG-242T The airway adapter can be selected from the following
3 types depending on the patient weight and respiratory
volume.

YG-272T YG-227T

YG-211T YG-213T YG-214T

YG-282T

Dead Space
Optional Item Model Patient Weight Code No.
Volume

Airway adapter YG-211T Adult/Child 7 kg or more 4 mL R805

Airway adapter YG-213T Neonates/Infant - 0.5 mL R806

Airway adapter YG-214T Neonates/Infant - 1.8 mL R807

Cap-ONE biteblock YG-227T Adult - - V939A

Cap-ONE mask YG-232T Pediatric 20 to 40 kg 3.5mL V933

Cap-ONE mask YG-242T Infant 7 to 20 kg 2.5mL V935

Cap-ONE mask YG-272T Adult 30 kg or more 7mL V938A

Cap-ONE mask(large) YG-282T Adult 40 kg or more 10mL V938C

11-10 User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series


11. CO2 MONITORING

Connecting the CO2 Sensor Kit to the Monitor


Connect the CO2 sensor kit to the CO2 socket on the monitor.

When connecting the TG-921T4 CO2 sensor kit

Connecting the CO2 Sensor Kit to the Respiration Circuit


Connect the CO2 sensor kit to the patient or respiration circuit by referring to the
CO2 sensor kit manual.

11
Performing Zero Calibration when Using a TG-971T4/TG-981T4
CO2 Sensor Kit
When using the TG-971T4/TG-981T4 CO2 sensor kit, perform zero calibration
in the following conditions.
• When the airway adapter is replaced with a new one.
• When a different type of airway adapter is used.
• When the operating temperature changes.
• When the measurement room is changed.
• Whenever necessary.
Zero calibration can be performed in two ways: calibration with air and
calibration with N2 gas. Both methods are performed on the RESP/CO2 window.
• Calibration with air
Expose the airway adapter to air. Calibrates with about 0.2 mmHg (0.03 kPa)
CO2 in the air.
• Calibration with N2 gas
Flow N2 gas into the airway adapter.
NOTE: The calibrated value is saved in memory in the connector of the
CO2 sensor kit. Once calibrated, you don’t need to calibrate again
when connecting the CO2 sensor kit to the different socket of a
different unit.

User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series 11-11


11. CO2 MONITORING

Calibrating by Air

1 Display the CO2 ZERO CAL window. The TG-971T4/TG-981T4 CO2 sensor
kit must be connected to the monitor for the CO2 ZERO CAL window to be
displayed.
Touch [MENU] key → [RESP/CO2] key → [CO2 ZERO CAL] key.

2 Select AIR CAL under <SELECT CALIBRATION METHOD>. The


“EXPOSE SENSOR TO AIR” message appears.

3 Expose the airway adapter to air and touch the [YES] key to start calibration.

When the “CALIBRATION COMPLETE” message is displayed, the


calibration is complete. The calibrated date and time appears.

4 Reconnect the airway adapter to the respiration circuit. CO2 can be


monitored.

11-12 User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series


11. CO2 MONITORING

Calibrating with N2 Gas


For handling the N2 gas cylinder, refer to the N2 gas manual.

1 Connect the airway adapter to the N2 gas cylinder.

2 Display the CO2 ZERO CAL window. The TG-971T4/TG-981T4 CO2 sensor
kit must be connected to the monitor for the CO2 ZERO CAL window to be
displayed.
Touch [MENU] key → [RESP/CO2] key → [CO2 ZERO CAL] key.

3 Select N2 CAL under <SELECT CALIBRATION METHOD>. The “FLOW


N2 GAS” message appears.

4 Open the N2 gas cylinder so that the N2 gas flows into the airway adapter and
11
touch the [YES] key to start calibration.

When the “CALIBRATION COMPLETE” message is displayed, the


calibration is complete. The calibrated date and time appears.

5 Reconnect the airway adapter to the respiration circuit. CO2 can be


monitored.

User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series 11-13


11. CO2 MONITORING

Monitoring CO2
After completing the preparation, CO2 data and waveform appear on the screen.

CAUTION
When the “CHANGE ADAPTER” or “SENSOR ERROR” message is
displayed, check the CO2 sensor kit and replace it if necessary. CO2
cannot be monitored while the message is displayed.

CAUTION
When using an anesthetic instrument with a volatile anesthetic
agent, the CO2 measurement may be inaccurate.

CO2 Information on the Home Screen


When Using a TG-901T4/TG-921T4 CO2 Sensor Kit
NOTE: This monitor performs calibration automatically at periodic interval
and in the following conditions.
• At the monitor power on
• Patient’s first respiration
• The airway adapter/nasal adapter is removed from the CO2
sensor and connected again
• Signal changed rapidly due to temperature change
During calibration, the CO2 waveform appears as the calibrated waveform, but
the respiration rate and measured value are not affected.

Respiration rate End tidal CO2 CO2 waveform


Scale of CO2 waveform
from CO2

11-14 User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series


11. CO2 MONITORING

When Using a TG-971T4/TG-981T4 CO2 Sensor Kit


NOTE Perform calibration in the following conditions.
• When the airway adapter is replaced with a new one.
• When a different type of airway adapter is used.
• When the operating temperature changes.
• When the measurement room is changed.
• Whenever necessary.

Respiration sync I
11
mark

Respiration rate End tidal CO2 CO2 waveform


from CO2 Scale of CO2 waveform

User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series 11-15


11. CO2 MONITORING

Changing CO2 Settings


Change the settings on the RESP/CO2 window. The following settings can be
changed for CO2 monitoring.
• CO2 waveform sweep speed
• Scale
• Respiration rate, apnea and CO2 alarm settings
• Inspiration composition
• Max hold on or off
The CO2 unit can be set to mmHg or kPa on the SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
screen. Refer to Section 2 of the Administrator’s Guide.
The CO2 data display color can be set on the SYSTEM SETUP window. Refer to
Section 3 of the Administrator’s Guide.

Changing the Scale


The scale can be changed for the CO2 waveform.
The CO2 scale can also be changed on the TREND GRAPH window.

1 Display the CO2 SCALE window.


Touch [MENU] key → [RESP/CO2] key → [CO2 SCALE] key.

2 Select the scale by touching the desired scale key. You can adjust the scale
using the scale slider.

Scale slider

3 Touch the [HOME] key to return to the home screen.

11-16 User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series


11. CO2 MONITORING

Changing the CO2, Respiration Rate and Apnea Alarm Limits

CAUTION
When the alarm limit is set to OFF, there will be no alarm for that
limit. Depending on the setting, the alarm off mark might not be
displayed on the screen. Be careful when you set the alarm limit to
OFF.

You can set the upper and lower CO2, respiration rate and apnea alarm limits on
the RESP/CO2 window. You can set all alarms, including the upper and lower
CO2, respiration rate and apnea alarm limits, on the ALARM LIMITS window
(See the Operator’s Manual or Section 5 of the User’s Guide).
Setting Range
CO2 (E) upper limit: 2 to 99 mmHg in 1 mmHg steps (0.2 to 13.0 kPa in 0.1 kPa
steps), OFF (default setting: OFF)
CO2 (E) lower limit: OFF, 1 to 98 mmHg in 1 mmHg steps (0.1 to 12.9 kPa in
0.1 kPa steps) (default setting: OFF)
CO2 (I) upper limit*: 1 to 99 mmHg in 1 mmHg steps (0.1 to 13.0 kPa in 0.1 kPa
steps), OFF (default setting: ADULT, NEONATE: OFF,
CHILD: 3 mmHg (0.4 kPa))
Respiration rate upper limit: 2 to 150 counts/min in 2 counts/min steps, OFF (default
setting: OFF)
Respiration rate lower limit: OFF, 0 to 148 counts/min in 2 counts/min steps (default
setting: OFF) 11
Apnea upper limit: 5 to 40 seconds in 5-second steps, OFF (default setting: 20)

* CO2 (I) alarm upper limit can be set when using a TG-971T4/TG-981T4 CO2
sensor kit.

1 Display the RESP/CO2 window.


Touch [MENU] key → [RESP/CO2] key.

2 Touch the [CO2 (E)] key to change the end tidal CO2 alarm setting.
Touch the [CO2 (I)] key to change the inspired CO2 alarm setting. This
setting is only available when CO2 is monitored with TG-971T4/TG-981T4
CO2 sensor kit.
Touch the [RR] key to change the respiration rate alarm setting.
Touch the [APNEA] key to change the apnea alarm setting.
Selected parameter

Upper limit slider

Upper limit

Setting bar

Current measured
value

Lower limit slider Lower limit

User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series 11-17


11. CO2 MONITORING

3 Touch and drag the sliders to the desired level on the setting bar. Use the
or key to adjust the setting.
If the upper limit is set to a value above the maximum, the upper limit alarm
is set to OFF. If the lower limit is set to a value below the minimum, the
lower limit alarm is set to OFF.

4 Touch the [HOME] key to return to the home screen.

Setting the Inspiration Composition


When N2O is mixed in the inspiration or when a high concentration of oxygen
is inspired, sensitivity of CO2 absorbing infrared ray is affected, and as a result
measurements cannot be performed correctly. When using anesthetic gas or
a respirator, set the inspiration composition. The monitor corrects the CO2
concentration automatically according to the setting.

CAUTION
When monitoring CO2, make sure that the gas composition is
entered. Otherwise the measurement result may be inaccurate.

CAUTION
When using an anesthetic instrument with a volatile anesthetic
agent, the CO2 measurement may be inaccurate.

1 Display the CO2 GAS COMP window.


Touch [MENU] key → [RESP/CO2] key → [CO2 GAS COMP] key.

2 Set the composition of the inspired gas.


• When not using gas that influences measurement
→ Select AIR.
• When using a respirator or high concentration of oxygen
→ Select O2+AIR and set the O2 gas ratio on the O2 setting bar.
• When using anesthetic gas
→ Select O2+N2O and set the gas ratio on the O2 and N2 setting bar.

11-18 User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series


11. CO2 MONITORING

3 Touch the [HOME] key to return to the home screen.

Changing the CO2 Waveform Sweep Speed


The CO2 waveform sweep speed on the screen can be selected. This setting can
also be changed on the DISPLAY/SOUND window.

1 Display the RESP/CO2 SWEEP SPEED window.


Touch [MENU] key → [RESP/CO2] key → [RESP/CO2 SWEEP SPEED]
key.

11

2 Select the sweep speed.

3 Touch the [HOME] key to return to the home screen.

Changing Duration for Holding ETCO2 Maximum Value


Select the time for holding the maximum ETCO2 value. This setting is effective
only when using the TG-971T4/TG-981T4 CO2 sensor kit. When using the TG-
901T4 or TG-921T4 CO2 sensor kit, this item is automatically set to OFF.

User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series 11-19


11. CO2 MONITORING

Settings
OFF: The maximum value is updated each breath
10 s: The maximum value for latest 10 seconds (default setting)
20 s: The maximum value for latest 20 seconds

OFF
ETCO2 value 60
46
[mmHg] 40 40
35
30 31
20
10 10
Time

10 s
ETCO2 value 60
46
[mmHg] 40 40
35
30
31
20
10 10 10
Time
10 s
10 s
10 s
10 s
10 s
10 s

20 s
ETCO2 value 60
46
[mmHg] 40 40
30 35
31
20
10 10 10
Time
20 s
20 s
20 s
20 s
20 s
20 s

1 Display the MAX HOLD window.


Touch [MENU] key → [RESP/CO2] key → [MAX HOLD] key.

2 Select the time to measure the CO2 value.

3 Touch the [HOME] key to return to the home screen.

11-20 User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series


11. CO2 MONITORING

Inspection of Measuring Accuracy

Daily Inspection of Measuring Accuracy


Perform daily accuracy inspection using your own respiration.
Put the larger end of the airway adapter (side for connecting to the patient’s
mask and tracheal tube) into your mouth and after stabilizing breathing, breathe
in the same way as in the resting state at a rate of 5 seconds per breath (12
breaths/min). Breathing too quickly or taking deep breaths will disable standard
measurements.
The standard ETCO2 concentration is 40 mmHg (5.3 kPa). Check that the CO2
gas concentration display is from 35 to 45 mmHg (4.7 to 6.0 kPa).

Inspection of Measuring Accuracy (Precise Method)

CAUTION
Follow the CAUTION label on the CO2 gas cylinder.

Check the measurement accuracy every half year and whenever you suspect
the monitor is not reading correctly. This procedure does not calibrate the CO2
sensor. It only checks the measurement accuracy. If the measurement accuracy is 11
not appropriate, contact your Nihon Kohden representative.
For details, refer to the Service Manual.

User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series 11-21


11. CO2 MONITORING

11-22 User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series


12 SpO2 Monitoring

General..........................................................................12-2

Preparing for SpO2 Monitoring.......................................12-5


Preparation Flowchart..................................................................12-5
Selecting a Probe.........................................................................12-5
Reusable Probes......................................................................12-5
Connecting Cables and Attaching the Probes..............................12-6
Connecting Cable to the Monitor.............................................12-6
Attaching the Probe to the Patient...........................................12-6

Monitoring SpO2............................................................12-7
12
SpO2 Information on the Home Screen........................................12-7

Changing SpO2 Settings................................................12-8


Changing the Sensitivity...............................................................12-8
Changing the SpO2 and Pulse Rate Alarm Limits........................12-9
Changing the Sync Sound Source.............................................12-10
Selecting Sync Sound Pitch.......................................................12-12
Selecting the Response Mode...................................................12-13
Selecting SpO2 Sensitivity Mode................................................12-14
Displaying Pulse Rate and Pulse-amplitude Index (PI) on the Home
Screen........................................................................................12-14
12. SPO2 MONITORING

General
To monitor SpO2, attach a probe to the patient and connect it to the SpO2 socket
on the left side panel of the monitor.

SQI bar graph


SQI bar graph The SQI bar graph shows the pulse waveform signal quality for SpO2
measurement.

SQI Bar Graph Signal Quality

4 green bars The signal quality is high.

3 green bars There may be some artifact.

The signal quality is reduced due to large artifact. If this


2 yellow bars* state continues for a long time, check the patient and probe
attachment.
The signal quality is very low. Check the patient and probe
1 red bar*
attachment.

0 bar The signal cannot be measured.

* If the SQI bar graph shows 1 or 2 bars, the “LOW QUALITY SIGNAL”
message appears in the screen.

WARNING
SpO2 measurement may be incorrect in the following cases.
• When the patient’s carboxyhemoglobin or methemoglobin
increases abnormally.
• When dye is injected in the blood.
• When using an electrosurgical unit.
• During CPR.
• When measuring at a site with venous pulse.
• When there is body movement.
• When the pulse wave is small (insufficient peripheral circulation).

WARNING
When not monitoring SpO2, disconnect the SpO2 connection cord
from the SpO2 socket. Otherwise, noise from the probe sensor may
interfere and incorrect data is displayed on the screen.

12-2 User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series


12. SPO2 MONITORING

WARNING
Check the circulation condition by observing the skin color at the
measurement site and pulse waveform. Change the measurement
site every 8 hours for disposable probes and every 4 hours for
reusable probes. The skin temperature may increase at the attached
site by 2 or 3 °C (4 or 5 °F) and cause a burn or pressure necrosis.
When using the probe on the following patients, take extreme care
and change the measurement site more frequently according to
symptoms and degree.
• Patient with a fever
• Patient with insufficient peripheral circulation
• Neonate or low birth weight infant with delicate skin

WARNING
• When using the TL-201T finger probe, do not fasten the probe and
cable to the finger by wrapping with tape. This may cause burn,
congestion or pressure necrosis from poor blood circulation.
• When using probes other than the TL-201T finger probe, to avoid
poor circulation, do not wrap the tape too tight. Check the blood
circulation condition by observing the skin color and congestion at
the skin peripheral to the probe attachment site. Even for short-
term monitoring, there may be burn or pressure necrosis from
poor blood circulation, especially on neonates or low birth weight
infants whose skin is delicate. Accurate measurement cannot be
performed on a site with poor peripheral circulation.
12

WARNING
When monitoring SpO2 of a patient who is receiving photodynamic
therapy, the light from the finger probe sensor may cause a burn.
Photodynamic therapy uses a photosensitizing agent that has a side
effect of photosensitivity.

The SpO2 probe manufactured by Nihon Kohden have two wavelengths with
peaks in the range of 650 and 950 nm. The maximum light intensity is less than 5.5
mW/sr.

CAUTION
Turn off the power of mobile phones, small wireless devices and
other devices which produce strong electromagnetic interference
around a patient (except for devices allowed by the hospital
administrator). Radio waves from devices such as mobile phones or
small wireless devices may be mistaken as pulse waves and the
displayed data may be incorrect.

User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series 12-3


12. SPO2 MONITORING

CAUTION
If the attachment site is dirty with blood or bodily fluids, clean the
attachment site before attaching the probe. If there is nail polish on
the attachment site, remove the polish. Otherwise, the amount of
transmitted light decreases, and measured value may be incorrect or
measurement cannot be performed.

CAUTION
Normal external light does not affect monitoring but strong light such
as a surgical light or sunlight may affect monitoring. If affected, cover
the measuring site with a blanket.

CAUTION
While a patient is on medication which causes vasodilation, the
pulse waveform may change and in rare cases the SpO2 value might
not be displayed.

CAUTION
When monitoring SpO2 only (without ECG monitoring), turn on both
the upper and lower limit alarms for PR and SpO2. If the patient’s
pulse is not detected during asystole or other condition, a “CANNOT
DETECT PULSE” or “CHECK PROBE” alarm occurs instead of an
SpO2limit alarm.
Furthermore,if the patient has no pulse, noise from probe movement
could be misjudged as a pulse and cause an incorrect PR or SpO2
value to be displayed.

CAUTION
When monitoring SpO2 only, detection of arrhythmia and asystole is
not available and arrhythmia alarms such as ASYSTOLE, VF or VT
are not available. If the patient requires ECG monitoring, monitor the
ECG.

NOTE: Do not attach the probe to the same limb that is used for NIBP
measurement. The SpO2 measurement may be incorrect.

12-4 User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series


12. SPO2 MONITORING

Preparing for SpO2 Monitoring

Preparation Flowchart
1 Select the probe.

2 Connect the probe to the SpO2 connection cord and connect the SpO2
connection cord to the SpO2 socket on the monitor.

3 Attach the probe to the patient.

4 Monitoring starts. Set necessary settings.

Selecting a Probe
Select the appropriate probe according to the purpose.

CAUTION
Only use the specified probes. Otherwise, SpO2 cannot be
monitored.

CAUTION
Do not use a probe which is deteriorated by aging. Accurate
measurement cannot be performed.
12

Reusable Probes
Model Patient (Weight) Attachment Site SpO2 Connection Cord
Finger Probe TL-201T Adults, children Finger SpO2 Connection Cord
(Weight more than 20 kg) JL-701P

Multi-site Probe TL-220T Adults, infants Finger or toe


(Weight 3 kg or more)

Neonates Instep and sole


(Weight 3 kg or less)

Finger Probe TL-651S Adults, children Finger


(Recommanded thickness of
finger: 9 - 13 mm)

User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series 12-5


12. SPO2 MONITORING

Connecting Cables and Attaching the Probes

Connecting Cable to the Monitor

1 Open the stopper of the SpO2 connection cord and connect the probe
connector firmly.

2 Close the stopper.

SpO2 connection cord 3 Connect the SpO2 connection cord to the SpO2 socket on the monitor.

Probe connection Stopper

When connecting the TL-201T finger probe


The TL-651S finger probe can be directly connected to the SpO2 socket.

Attaching the Probe to the Patient


Refer to the probe manual.

12-6 User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series


12. SPO2 MONITORING

Monitoring SpO2
When the preparation is done properly, the SpO2 value and pulse waveform
appear on the screen.

CAUTION
When the probe is attached on an appropriate site with sufficient
circulation and an error message about probe attachment repeatedly
appears, the probe may be deteriorated. Replace it with a new one.

CAUTION
When a message indicates a faulty probe or faulty SpO2 connection
cord, stop monitoring and replace the probe or SpO2 connection cord
with a new one.

NOTE: In order to maintain sufficient blood circulation, keep the


measurement site warm by covering with a blanket or something
similar. Warming the site is effective, especially for a patient with
a small pulse amplitude.

SpO2 Information on the Home Screen


Pulse rate (appears when sync
sound source is set to SpO2) 12
Pulse sync mark
(appears in SpO2
color synchronizing
with pulse when
sync sound source
is set to SpO2)

SpO2 sensitivity
SpO2 pulse waveform

SpO2

User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series 12-7


12. SPO2 MONITORING

Changing SpO2 Settings


Change settings on the SpO2 window. The following settings can be changed for
SpO2 monitoring.
• Pulse waveform sensitivity
• SpO2 and pulse rate alarm limits
• Sync source
• Sync sound pitch
• Response mode
• Sensitivity mode
The SpO2 data and SpO2 pulse rate display color can be set on the SYSTEM
SETUP window. Refer to Section 3 of the Administrator’s Guide.
The SpO2 pulse waveform sweep speed is the speed set for <SWEEP SPEED>
on the DISPLAY/SOUND window.

Changing the Sensitivity


The sensitivity determines the size of the pulse waveform on both the screen and
recording paper.
The sensitivity can be set manually or automatically. When you select auto
sensitivity, the sensitivity is automatically determined according to the present
SpO2 pulse waveform. When sensitivity is set automatically, “AUTO” appears
beside the sensitivity on the screen.
NOTE: The pulse wave amplitude varies according to the ratio of the
pulsation component to the entire transmitted IR signal. When
the pulsation component ratio is 1 %, the pulse wave amplitude is
about 10 mm at x1 sensitivity on the display.

1 Display the SpO2 window.


Touch [MENU] key → [SpO2] key.

2 Touch the [SENSITIVITY] key. The SENSITIVITY window opens.

12-8 User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series


12. SPO2 MONITORING

3 Select the sensitivity from × 1/8, × 1/4, × 1/2, × 1, × 2, × 4, × 8 or AUTO in


the <SENSITIVITY> box.

4 Touch the key to close the window.

5 Touch the [HOME] key to return to the home screen.

Changing the SpO2 and Pulse Rate Alarm Limits

CAUTION
When the alarm limit is set to OFF, there will be no alarm for that
limit. Be careful when you set the alarm limit to OFF.

You can set the upper and lower SpO2 and heart rate/pulse rate alarm limits on
the SpO2 window. You can set all alarms, including the upper and lower SpO2
and heart rate/pulse rate alarm limits, on the ALARM LIMITS window (See the 12
Operator’s Manual or Section 5 of the User’s Guide). The heart rate/pulse rate
alarm limits can also be changed on the ECG window.
Setting Range
SpO2 upper limit: 51 to 100 %SpO2 in 1 %SpO2 steps, OFF
(default setting: ADULT, CHILD - OFF; NEONATE - 95 %SpO2)
SpO2 lower limit: OFF, 50 to 99 %SpO2 in 1 %SpO2 steps
(default setting: ADULT, CHILD - 90 %SpO2; NEONATE - 85
%SpO2)
HR/PR upper limit: When <SYNC SOURCE> is set to ECG:
16 to 300 beats/min in 1 beat/min steps, OFF
When <SYNC SOURCE> is set to PRESS1 or SpO2:
31 to 300 beats/min in 1 beat/min steps, OFF
(default setting: ADULT - 140, CHILD - 170, NEONATE - 200)
HR/PR lower limit: When <SYNC SOURCE> is set to ECG:
OFF, 15 to 299 beats/min in 1 beat/min steps
When <SYNC SOURCE> is set to PRESS1 or SpO2:
OFF, 30 to 299 beats/min in 1 beat/min steps
(default setting: ADULT - 50, CHILD - 75, NEONATE - 100)

User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series 12-9


12. SPO2 MONITORING

1 Display the SpO2 window.


Touch [MENU] key → [SpO2] key.

2 Touch the [SpO2] key to change the SpO2 alarm setting.


Touch the [HR/PR] key to change the heart rate/pulse rate alarm setting.
Selected parameter

Upper limit slider


Current value
of the selected
parameter Upper limit

Setting bar

Lower limit

Lower limit slider

3 Touch and drag the sliders to the desired level on the setting bar. Use the
or key to adjust the setting.
If the upper limit is set to a value above the maximum, the upper limit alarm
is set to OFF. If the lower limit is set to a value below the minimum, the
lower limit alarm is set to OFF.

4 Touch the key to close the window.

5 Touch the [HOME] key to return to the home screen.

Changing the Sync Sound Source


You can select ECG, SpO2 pulse (SpO2) or arterial blood pressure pulse
(PRESS1) as the sync source. The sync source can also be changed on the ECG
and PRESS windows.
When pulse wave and pressure waveform are irregular because of an IABP,
select ECG.
NOTE • When heart rate is unstable because of an ESU, select SpO2 or
PRESS1.

12-10 User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series


12. SPO2 MONITORING

• When the connection cord of SpO2 or IBP of the arterial blood


pressure is disconnected from the monitor and an alarm occurs
when the sync source is set to SpO2 or PRESS1, the sync
source changes to ECG when the alarm is silenced by pressing
the [Silence Alarms] key. The sync source returns to SpO2 or
PRESS1 when the SpO2 or IBP is monitored again. When using
PRESS1 as the sync source, adjust zero balance.
• PRESS1 is only available for SVM-7503 and SVM-7523.
• When the sensor is detached from the patient and alarm
occurs, and the sync source is set to SpO2 or PRESS1, the
sync source does not change to ECG when the alarm is
silenced, and “- - -” is displayed for PR.
When the sync source is set to ECG and ECG is not measured, there is no sync
sound.
When SpO2 is selected, the pulse rate can be displayed to the left of the heart rate
on the screen and the sync mark synchronizes with the pulse.

1 Display the SpO2 window.


Touch [MENU] key → [SpO2] key.

12

2 Touch the [SYNC SOURCE] key. The SYNC SOURCE window opens.

3 Select the sync source in the <SYNC SOURCE> box.


ECG: QRS
PRESS1: Pulse wave of the highest priority arterial blood pressure
SpO2: SpO2 pulse

4 Touch the key to close the window.

5 Touch the [HOME] key to return to the home screen.

User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series 12-11


12. SPO2 MONITORING

Selecting Sync Sound Pitch


The sync sound can be variable pitch or fixed pitch pips. The fixed pitch is high
pitch as the default, but medium or low pitch can also be set on the SYSTEM
SETUP window (see Section 3 of the Administrator’s Guide). When you select
variable pitch, the pitch of the sync sound changes according to SpO2 value so
that you can recognize the change on the patient from the pitch of the sync sound
without looking at the monitor.
When the sync sound source is set to SpO2 and the SpO2 value is below 81
%SpO2, the low pitch is automatically selected.
When the sync sound source is set to SpO2 and the “CHECK PROBE” or
“DETECTING PULSE” message is displayed on the screen, the sync sound
stops.
When the sync sound source is set to ECG, the sync pitch is set to SpO2 and the
SpO2 cannot be displayed on the screen, the low pitch is automatically selected.

1 Display the SpO2 window.


Touch [MENU] key → [SpO2] key.

2 Touch the [SYNC PITCH] key. The SYNC PITCH window opens.

3 Select the sync sound pitch.


FIXED: The pitch is fixed to the pitch selected on the SYSTEM SETUP window.
PRESS1*: The pitch is high when the BP value is above 120 mmHg. The pitch is low
when the BP value is below 20 mmHg. The pitch changes from high to
low in 20 steps for each 5 mmHg change between 120 and 20 mmHg BP
value.
SpO2: The pitch changes in steps from high to low for each 1 %SpO2 change
in SpO2 value between 100 %SpO2 and 81 %SpO2. When the SpO2 is
selected, the pitch changes according to the SpO2 value acquired from the
SpO2 socket.
* PRESS1 is only available for SVM-7503 and SVM-7523.

12-12 User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series


12. SPO2 MONITORING

4 Touch the key to close the window.

5 Touch the [HOME] key to return to the home screen.

Selecting the Response Mode


There are three response modes. Each response mode uses a different time
to enable accurate measurement according to patient conditions. When
measurement condition is unstable, response becomes slower in all modes. For
details on the response time, refer to “Specifications - SpO2” in the Operator’s
Manual.
FAST: Select this for special applications that require a fast response. “FAST” is
suitable for detecting short apnea.
NORMAL: For normal monitoring.
SLOW: Select this when you need to suppress a rapid change in SpO2.

1 Display the SpO2 window.


Touch [MENU] key → [SpO2] key.

12

2 Touch the [RESPONSE] key. The RESPONSE window opens.

3 Select the mode.

4 Touch the key to close the window.

5 Touch the [HOME] key to return to the home screen.

User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series 12-13


12. SPO2 MONITORING

Selecting SpO2 Sensitivity Mode


Select the sensitivity mode for SpO2 monitoring.

1 Display the SENSITIVITY MODE window.


Touch [MENU] key → [SpO2] key → [SENSITIVITY MODE] key.

2 Select the sensitivity mode.


Select “MAX” when it is difficult to detect pulse, such as when monitoring
a patient with peripheral circulation insufficiency or when an IABP is used.
When “MAX” is selected, “SENS MAX” appears in the SpO2 value area on
the home screen.

NOTE: When "MAX" is selected, a waveform and numeric value for SpO2
may appear even when the probe is detached from the patient.
When not monitoring SpO2, disconnect the SpO2 connection cord
from the unit.

3 Touch the [HOME] key to return to the home screen.

Displaying Pulse Rate and Pulse-amplitude Index (PI) on the


Home Screen
The pulse rate and pulse-amplitude index (PI) display in SpO2 area on the
home screen can be set to ON or OFF on the SpO2 page - PARAMETERS
window - SYSTEM SETUP window. Refer to “SpO2 Page” in Section 2 of the
Administrator’s Guide.
PI (Pulse-amplitude Index)
The Pulse-amplitude Index indicates the percentage of pulsatile signal to non-
pulsatile signal. This index may be affected by an artifact.

12-14 User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series


13 NIBP Monitoring

General..........................................................................13-2

Preparing for NIBP Measurement.................................13-3


Preparation Flowchart..................................................................13-3
Selecting the Cuff.........................................................................13-3
Types of Cuffs..............................................................................13-4
Reusable Cuffs (Adult/Child)................................................... 13-4
Disposable Cuffs (Neonate).................................................... 13-5
Connecting Cables and Attaching the Cuff to the Patient............13-5
Connecting Air Hose and Cuff to the Monitor......................... 13-5
Attaching the Cuff to the Patient............................................. 13-6

Measuring and Monitoring NIBP....................................13-8


Measurement Mode and Interval..................................................13-8 13
Manual Measurement............................................................. 13-8
Auto Measurement.................................................................. 13-9
Auto Measurement on Vital Sign Alarm.................................. 13-9
STAT Measurement................................................................13-10
SIM Mode Measurement........................................................13-10
NIBP Information on the Home Screen......................................13-11
Dimming and Hiding the NIBP Data....................................... 13-11
Displaying Pulse Rate from NIBP.......................................... 13-11
Performing NIBP Measurement.................................................13-11
Manual Measurement............................................................ 13-12
Auto Measurement................................................................. 13-13
Auto Measurement on Vital Sign Alarm................................. 13-14
STAT Measurement................................................................13-15
SIM Mode Measurement........................................................ 13-17

Changing NIBP Settings..............................................13-19


Selecting the Initial Cuff Inflation Pressure.................................13-19
Selecting the Initial Cuff Inflation Pressure Type...................13-19
Setting the Cuff Inflation Pressure.........................................13-19
Changing the NIBP Alarm Limits................................................13-20

Using Venous Puncture Mode.....................................13-22


13. NIBP MONITORING

General
Non-invasive blood pressure is measured by the oscillometric method in which
the cuff is wrapped on the patient arm (or thigh) and connected to the NIBP
socket on the monitor.
Oscillometric method
The NIBP is measured from the change in amplitude pattern of pulsatile
oscillation in cuff pressure as the cuff pressure is reduced from above systolic
to below diastolic pressure. The occlusive-oscillometry method uses this to
determine the systolic, diastolic, and mean arterial pressure.
The systolic pressure is the pressure at which the pulsatile oscillation suddenly
increases, and the diastolic pressure is the pressure at which the pulsatile
oscillation suddenly decreases. The mean arterial pressure is the point where
maximum pulsatile oscillation occurs.
This monitor has four NIBP measurement modes.
• Manual measurement: Measurement is performed once.
• Automatic measurement: Measurement is performed automatically at preset time
intervals. The time interval can be selected.
Automatic measurement can also be performed with vital
sign alarm occurrence.
• STAT measurement: Measurement is performed for 10 minutes (maximum)
continuously.
• SIM mode measurement: Measurement is performed in Staged Interval Mode (SIM).

WARNING
Be careful when measuring NIBP on a patient with known bleeding
disorders or coagulation. After NIBP measurement, there may be dot
hemorrhage, or circulatory disorder by thrombus where the cuff is
attached.

WARNING
NIBP measurement cannot be used with pregnant, including pre-
eclamptic patients. NIBP measurement may be incorrect in the
following cases.
• When using an electrosurgical unit
• When there is body movement
• When the pulse wave is small (insufficient peripheral circulation)
• Too many arrhythmias
• When there is vibration
• When there is a rapid blood pressure change
• During CPR
• When the pulse is too late
• When blood pressure is too low
• When the cuff is wrapped too tight or too loose
• When the size of the cuff is not proper
• When the cuff is wrapped over thick cloth
• When the cuff is deteriorated
• When using with pregnant, including pre-eclamptic patients

13-2 User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series


13. NIBP MONITORING

Preparing for NIBP Measurement

Preparation Flowchart
1 Select the cuff.

2 Connect the cuff to the air hose and connect the air hose to the NIBP socket
on the monitor.

3 Attach the cuff to the patient.

4 Set necessary settings, such as initial cuff inflation pressure.

5 Start measurements.

Selecting the Cuff


Select the appropriate cuff according to the purpose.
The AHA (American Heart Association) recommends that the cuff width be 40%
of the circumference of the upper arm. Refer to the following graph and select
the cuff which suits the patient’s arm.
NOTE • If the range of arm circumference appropriate for the cuff is
prescribed, use within that range.
• To obtain accurate measured values, select a wide cuff which
can be attached to the upper arm or the thigh (calf in the case
of neonates). Measuring with a very narrow cuff may result in
measured values higher than the actual values.
Cuff Width and Arm Circumference 13
Reusable cuffs

Cuff Width and Arm Circumference Circumference range


applicable to AHA standards

Cuff width (cm)


20
For thigh

15 Adults large

Adults standard

10 Adults small

Childern standard

5 Infants

0 10 20 30 40 50 60
Arm circumference (cm)

User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series 13-3


13. NIBP MONITORING

Disposable cuffs
Cuff Width and Arm Circumference Circumference range
applicable to AHA standards

Cuff width (cm)


10

5 Neonates (YP-824S)
Neonates (YP-823S)
Neonates (YP-822S)
Neonates (YP-821S)
Neonates (YP-820S)

0 10 20 30 40 50 60
Arm circumference (cm)

Types of Cuffs

Reusable Cuffs (Adult/Child)


When using the following reusable cuffs, an YN-701S (3.0 m) air hose is
required.
Cuff Width Applicable Circumference (cm) Shape
For infants YP-710T 5 8 to 13
For children Standard YP-711T 7 13 to 18
Width
Small YP-712T 10 18 to 23
For adults Standard YP-723T 13 23 to 33
Large YP-724T 16 33 to 45

Width
For thigh YP-715T 19 45 to 55

CAUTION
The YP-710T/711T/712T/715T reusable cuffs contain natural rubber
latex which may cause allergic reactions.
Natural rubber may cause allergic reaction with symptoms such as
itching, redness, urticaria, swelling, fever, dyspnea, symptoms
similar to asthma, reduced blood pressure and shock. If the patient
shows any of the above symptoms, immediately stop using the cuff
and perform appropriate medical treatment.

13-4 User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series


13. NIBP MONITORING

Disposable Cuffs (Neonate)


Cuff Width (cm) Applicable Circumference (cm) Shape
YP-820S 2 3 to 6
YP-821S 3 4 to 8 Width

Neonates (Non-sterilized) YP-822S 4 6 to 10


YP-823S 4.5 7 to 13
YP-824S 5 8 to 15

Connecting Cables and Attaching the Cuff to the Patient

Connecting Air Hose and Cuff to the Monitor

CAUTION
Firmly connect the air hose to the NIBP socket on the monitor until it
clicks. If not connected properly, the cuff type cannot be identified. At
the start of NIBP measurement, check if the cuff type corresponds to
the type displayed on the monitoring screen.

NOTE: Firmly connect the air hose to the cuff and the monitor. The air
leakage will cause incorrect NIBP data or no data.
The monitor automatically identifies the type of air hose (adult/child or neonate)
when the air hose is connected to the NIBP socket. The cuff inflation pressure is
automatically changed according to the identified air hose type. The air hose type
is displayed on the home screen.
NOTE: The alarm settings are not automatically changed according to
the air hose type. The alarm settings which are appropriate for the
13
patient must be manually set.

1 Connect the cuff to the air hose.


Connecting the Cuff for Adults and Children
Insert the cuff connector joint into the air hose and turn it clockwise to lock it.

Joint

Disconnecting the Cuff for Adults and Children


To disconnect the cuff from the air hose, turn the cuff connector joint
counterclockwise to unlock it and remove it from the air hose.

Joint

User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series 13-5


13. NIBP MONITORING

Connecting the Cuff for Neonates


Insert the cuff connector into the air hose for neonate.

2 Connect the air hose to the NIBP socket on the monitor, and then select
the right patient type in the ADMIT window. For detailed settings, refer to
“Change the Patient Type” in Section 3 of this manual.

When Connecting the YP-723T Cuff for Adults

3 Check that the home screen displays the correct cuff type.
Cuff type

Attaching the Cuff to the Patient


How to Wrap the Cuff

WARNING
Be careful when measuring NIBP on a patient with known bleeding
disorders or coagulation. After NIBP measurement, there may be dot
hemorrhage, or circulatory disorder by thrombus where the cuff is
attached.

CAUTION
Do not wrap the cuff on an arm or thigh which is used for injection.
NIBP measurement on an arm or thigh which is used for injection
may cause reflux of blood and stop injection.

CAUTION
Do not wrap the cuff too tight. It may cause poor blood circulation
and congestion. If the cuff is wrapped too loosely, the NIBP value
may increase.

Wrap the cuff on the patient arm or thigh by referring to the manual provided
with the cuff. When wrapping the cuff around the upper arm, observe the
following points.

13-6 User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series


13. NIBP MONITORING

• The cuff must not wrap around the elbow.


• The cuff should just wrap around the upper arm, not too tightly or too loosely.
A tightly wrapped cuff can cause discomfort to the patient and decreases the
blood pressure reading, and a loosely wrapped cuff prolongs the measurement
time and increases the blood pressure reading. If the cuff is too tight or too
loose, the instrument may automatically stop inflating and stop the measuring
procedure for patient safety.
• The air hose must not be folded.
• In principle, the cuff should be wrapped around a bare upper arm. Thick
clothing can damp the pulsatile oscillation of the cuff pressure. It is still
possible to obtain a measurement if the cuff is wrapped around thin clothing
over the upper arm.

Air hose (must not be folded)

Stretcher (bed)

Cuff Hose and Air Hose


Confirm that the hoses are not folded or squeezed.

CAUTION
When too much pressure is applied to the cuff, or the hose is bent or
squeezed, the "NIBP SAFETY CIRCUIT RUNNING" message
appears on the screen and NIBP monitoring may be stopped. 13
Remove the cause, wait 40 seconds, check that the message
disappears, then measure again.

CAUTION
Do not wrap the cuff too tight. It may cause poor blood circulation
and congestion. If the cuff is wrapped too loosely, the NIBP value
may increase.

Cuff Position (Height of Cuff from Heart Level)


Place the cuffed upper arm (brachium) at the same height as the patient’s heart.
If the cuff is not at the same level as the heart, the weight of the blood affects the
blood pressure reading. The pressure difference per unit height is 0.7 mmHg/cm.
The blood pressure reading decreases when the arm is higher than the heart and
increases when lower.
The best measuring condition is when the patient is lying on his/her back with
arms and legs relaxed. If the cuff position cannot be on the same level as the
heart, the displayed blood pressure reading must be mathematically adjusted.

User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series 13-7


13. NIBP MONITORING

Measuring and Monitoring NIBP


When the preparation is done properly, you can start non-invasive blood pressure
measurement and monitoring.
The monitor automatically identifies the connected cuff type and sets the cuff
inflation pressure.

WARNING
When performing long term measurement at intervals less than 2.5
mins, perform measurements while observing the state of the
patient, blood vessels and limb to ensure adequate circulation.
Congestion may occur at the measurement site. When performing
periodic measurement for a long time, periodically check the
circulation condition.

CAUTION
When too much pressure is applied to the cuff, or the hose is bent or
squeezed, the "NIBP SAFETY CIRCUIT RUNNING" message
appears on the screen and NIBP monitoring may be stopped.
Remove the cause, wait 40 seconds, check that the message
disappears, then measure again.

CAUTION
Before starting STAT or SIM mode measurement, check the
measurement setting (measurement intervals).

NOTE • When measuring patients who are conscious, help the patient
to relax. Measurement may not be accurate if the patient’s arm
is tense or if the patient talks.
• The data for measurement on the thigh tends to be higher than
measurement on the arm.
• Do not apply pressure to the cuff or air hose. NIBP might not be
measured correctly because of the noise or NIBP measurement
may stop due to the NIBP safety circuit running.
• Do not measure NIBP on a patient on whom an IABP is used.
Accurate NIBP measurement cannot be performed due to pulse
waves from the IABP mixing with the patient’s pulse waves.

Measurement Mode and Interval


There are four NIBP measurement modes: manual, auto (periodic), STAT
(continuous) and SIM. To change the STAT and SIM setting, refer to the
Administrator’s Guide.

Manual Measurement
NIBP is measured once whenever the [NIBP Start/Stop] key on the screen is
touched. Manual measurement cannot be performed during the first stage of the
STAT or SIM mode measurement.

13-8 User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series


13. NIBP MONITORING

Auto Measurement
When <START TIME> on the MAIN tab - NIBP page - PARAMETERS
window is set to CLOCK.
The first NIBP measurement is performed when the [NIBP Start/Stop] key on the
screen is touched and auto mode on the home screen is highlighted. The second
measurement is performed when the current time (minutes) in the monitor
reaches the nearest time interval selected.
The second periodic measurement time begins from the next even clock interval.
Example: When the interval is set to 5 minutes
8:02 First measurement (start measurement)
8:05 Second measurement
8:10 Third measurement

If the measurement interval is changed during auto measurement, the next


measurement is performed at the next nearest selected interval. For example,
when the auto measurement is performed at a 5-minute interval and if the
interval is changed to 30 minutes, then the measurement will be performed as
follows.
9:05 (5-minute interval measurement), 9:07 (interval changed to 30 minutes),
9:30 (30-minute interval measurement), 10:00 (30-minute interval measurement)
and so on.
NOTE: The NIBP measurement time of the NIBP TABLE window is the
time the measurement is completed.
When <START TIME> on the MAIN tab - NIBP page - PARAMETERS
window is set to PERIOD.
The first NIBP measurement is performed when the [NIBP Start/Stop] key on the
screen is touched and auto mode on the home screen is highlighted. The second
measurement is performed when the time which is set on the MEASUREMENT
13
INTERVAL window elapses.
Example: When the interval is set to 5 minutes
8:02 First measurement (start measurement)
8:07 Second measurement
8:12 Third measurement

If the measurement interval is changed during auto measurement, the next


measurement is performed at the next selected interval. For example, when
the auto measurement is performed at a 5-minute interval and if the interval is
changed to 30 minutes, then the measurement will be performed as follows.
9:05 (5-minute interval measurement), 9:07 (interval changed to 30 minutes),
9:37 (30-minute interval measurement), 10:07 (30-minute interval measurement)
and so on.
NOTE: The NIBP measurement time of the NIBP TABLE window is the
time the measurement is completed.

Auto Measurement on Vital Sign Alarm


When <NIBP MEAS ON VITAL ALARM> on the NIBP page of the
PARAMETERS window on the SYSTEM SETUP window is set to on,
measurements are performed when a vital sign alarm occurs to check the NIBP
value. Refer to “PARAMETERS Window” in Section 3 of the Administrator’s
Guide.

User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series 13-9


13. NIBP MONITORING

STAT Measurement
Measurements are performed continuously according to the measurement
program set for STAT measurement on the SYSTEM SETUP window. The
program is divided into two stages. In the first stage, NIBP is measured
continuously or at 1-minute interval for 5 or 10 minutes. In the second stage,
NIBP is measured at a different interval (manual or 1, 2, 2.5, 5, 10, 15, 30
minutes, usually, longer interval than the first stage). Manual measurement
cannot be performed during first stage measurement. The settings on the
SYSTEM SETUP window can only be set by the administrator who has the
password to enter the page.

SIM Mode Measurement

CAUTION
Before starting STAT or SIM mode measurement, check the
measurement setting (measurement intervals).

CAUTION
For safety during lumbar anesthesia, NIBP SIM mode measurement
is recommended by medical policy in Japan and the factory default
settings are the recommended settings. When changing these initial
settings, make sure that the changed setting is appropriate for the
patient by referring to the manual of the anesthetic agent.

SIM mode program is for monitoring blood pressure during regional anesthesia,
such as lumbar block, subarachnoid block and epidual anesthesia.
Measurements are performed continuously according to the measurement
program set for SIM measurement on the SYSTEM SETUP window. The
program is divided into two stages. In the first stage, NIBP is measured at
1-minute, 2-minute or 2.5-minute interval for 5, 10 or 15 minutes. In the second
stage, NIBP is measured at a different interval (2, 2.5 or 5 minutes, usually
longer interval than the first stage). Manual measurement cannot be performed
during first stage measurement. The settings on the SYSTEM SETUP window
can only be set by the administrator who has the password to enter the page.

13-10 User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series


13. NIBP MONITORING

NIBP Information on the Home Screen

Cuff type

NIBP SYS/DIA (MAP)


Measurement time/
Cuff inflation pressure
during measurement

Measurement
mode/interval

Dimming and Hiding the NIBP Data


When the time set at <TIME UNTIL DATA IS OLD> on the SYSTEM SETUP
window elapses after the last measurement, the NIBP data on the home screen is
dimmed or hidden. Whether to dim or hide the old data can be selected at <OLD
DATA DISPLAY> on the SYSTEM SETUP window. To change the SYSTEM
SETUP settings, refer to Section 3 of the Administrator’s Guide.

13

Setting: DIM Setting: HIDE

Displaying Pulse Rate from NIBP


You can display pulse rate from NIBP by setting the <NIBP-PR DISPLAY>
on the MAIN tab - NIBP page - PARAMETERS window of the SYSTEM
SETUP window to ON. For details, refer to “NIBP Page” in Section 3 of the
Administrator’s Guide.

Pulse rate from


NIBP

Performing NIBP Measurement


NOTE: After NIBP measurement, the next measurement cannot start until
the cuff pressure is less than 10 mmHg (2 mmHg in the Neonate
mode) for more than 3 seconds.

User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series 13-11


13. NIBP MONITORING

Manual Measurement

1 Touch the [NIBP Interval] key to open the MEASUREMENT INTERVAL


window and change the interval to “MANUAL”.

The measurement modes displayed on the MEASUREMENT


INTERVAL window are selected on the SYSTEM SETUP window.
Refer to the Administrator’s Guide.
Or,
Touch the [MEASUREMENT INTERVAL] key on the NIBP window to
open the MEASUREMENT INTERVAL window and change the interval to
“MANUAL”.

Measurement
mode “MANUAL”

2 Touch the [NIBP Start/Stop] key to start measurement. During measurement,


the cuff inflation pressure appears.

Cuff inflation pressure

When measurement is complete, the measured data appears on the screen.


When <COMPLETION SOUND> in the SYSTEM SETUP window is set to
NK1 or NK2, a sound is generated when NIBP measurement is complete. For
details on the completion sound, refer to Section 3 of the Administrator’s Guide.
To stop measurement during measurement, touch the [NIBP Start/Stop] key. The
cuff is deflated.

13-12 User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series


13. NIBP MONITORING

Auto Measurement

WARNING
When performing long term measurement at intervals less than 2.5
mins, perform measurements while observing the state of the
patient, blood vessels and limb to ensure adequate circulation.
Congestion may occur at the measurement site. When performing
periodic measurement for a long time, periodically check the
circulation condition.

1 Touch the [NIBP Interval] key to open the MEASUREMENT INTERVAL


window to select the interval.

The measurement modes displayed on the MEASUREMENT


INTERVAL window are selected on the SYSTEM SETUP window.
Refer to the Administrator’s Guide.
Or,
Touch the [MEASUREMENT INTERVAL] key on the NIBP window to 13
open the MEASUREMENT INTERVAL window and select the interval.

Measurement interval

User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series 13-13


13. NIBP MONITORING

2 Touch the [NIBP Start/Stop] key to start measurement. During measurement,


the cuff inflation pressure appears.
If the auto mode is not highlighted on the home screen, it means that the auto
measurement is not yet started.
When measurement is complete, the measured data appears on the screen.

Time bar indicating


the interval between
measurements

When <COMPLETION SOUND> in the SYSTEM SETUP window is set


to NK1 or NK2, a sound is generated when NIBP measurement is complete.
For details on the completion sound, refer to Section 3 of the Administrator’s
Guide.

3 When the interval elapses, the second measurement automatically starts.


To stop one measurement in auto mode, touch the [NIBP Start/Stop] key.
The cuff is deflated. To stop auto measurement, change the measurement
mode to “MANUAL”.
To perform a manual measurement in this mode, touch the [NIBP Start/Stop]
key between auto measurements.
If the measurement interval is changed during auto measurement, the next
measurement is performed at the next nearest selected interval.

Auto Measurement on Vital Sign Alarm


When <NIBP MEAS ON VITAL ALARM> is set to ON, NIBP is automatically
measured when a vital sign alarm occurs. Refer to the “NIBP Page” in Section 3
of the Administrator’s Guide.
Measured parameters are displayed with an “A” on the NIBP TABLE window.

13-14 User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series


13. NIBP MONITORING

STAT Measurement

WARNING
When performing long term measurement at intervals less than 2.5
mins, perform measurements while observing the state of the
patient, blood vessels and limb to ensure adequate circulation.
Congestion may occur at the measurement site. When performing
periodic measurement for a long time, periodically check the
circulation condition.

CAUTION
Before starting STAT or SIM mode measurement, check the
measurement setting (measurement intervals).

1 Before STAT measurement, check the measurement setting on the STAT tab
- NIBP page - PARAMETERS window - SYSTEM SETUP window.
For details, refer to Section 3 of the Administrator’s Guide.

13

2 Touch the [NIBP Interval] key to open the MEASUREMENT INTERVAL


window to change the interval to “STAT”.

The measurement modes displayed on the MEASUREMENT


INTERVAL window are selected on the SYSTEM SETUP window.
Refer to the Administrator’s Guide.

User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series 13-15


13. NIBP MONITORING

Or,
Touch the [MEASUREMENT INTERVAL] key on the NIBP window to
open the MEASUREMENT INTERVAL window and change the interval to
“STAT”.

Measurement mode “STAT”

3 Touch the [NIBP Start/Stop] key to start measurement in the first stage.
During measurement, the cuff inflation pressure appears.
When measurement is complete, the measured data appears on the screen
and another measurement starts.
When <COMPLETION SOUND> in the SYSTEM SETUP window is set
to NK1 or NK2, a sound is generated when NIBP measurement is complete.
For details on the completion sound, refer to Section 3 of the Administrator’s
Guide.
Manual measurement is not available during the first stage of STAT
measurement.

4 When the first stage is completed, measurement in the second stage starts.
To stop STAT measurement in the first stage, touch the [NIBP Start/Stop] key.
The cuff is deflated.
To stop STAT measurement in the second stage, change the measurement mode
to “MANUAL”.
The periodic measurement can be stopped by touching the [NIBP Interval] key to
display the NIBP INTERVAL window and touching the [OFF] key on the NIBP
INTERVAL window during measurement.
To perform a manual measurement between auto measurements in the second
stage, touch the [NIBP Start/Stop] key.

13-16 User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series


13. NIBP MONITORING

SIM Mode Measurement

WARNING
When performing long term measurement at intervals less than 2.5
mins, perform measurements while observing the state of the
patient, blood vessels and limb to ensure adequate circulation.
Congestion may occur at the measurement site. When performing
periodic measurement for a long time, periodically check the
circulation condition.

CAUTION
Before starting STAT or SIM mode measurement, check the
measurement setting (measurement intervals).

1 Before SIM measurement, check the measurement setting on the SIM tab -
NIBP page - PARAMETERS window - SYSTEM SETUP window.
For details, refer to the Administrator’s Guide.

13

2 Touch the [NIBP Interval] key to open the NIBP INTERVALS window to
change the interval to “SIM”.

The measurement modes displayed on the MEASUREMENT


INTERVAL window are selected on the SYSTEM SETUP window.
Refer to the Administrator’s Guide.

User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series 13-17


13. NIBP MONITORING

Or,
Touch the [MEASUREMENT INTERVAL] key on the NIBP window to
open the MEASUREMENT INTERVAL window and change the interval to
“SIM”.

Measurement mode “SIM”

3 Touch the [NIBP Start/Stop] key to start measurement in the first stage.
During measurement, the cuff inflation pressure appears.
When measurement is complete, the measured data appears on the screen
and another measurement starts.
When <COMPLETION SOUND> in the SYSTEM SETUP window is set
to NK1 or NK2, a sound is generated when NIBP measurement is complete.
For details on the completion sound, refer to Section 3 of the Administrator’s
Guide.
Manual measurement is not available during the first stage of SIM mode
measurement.

4 When the first stage is completed, measurement in the second stage starts.
To stop SIM measurement in the first stage, touch the [NIBP Start/Stop] key. The
cuff is deflated.
To stop SIM measurement in the second stage, change the measurement mode to
“MANUAL”.
The periodic measurement can be stopped by touching the [NIBP Interval] key to
display the NIBP INTERVAL window and touching the [OFF] key on the NIBP
INTERVAL window during measurement.
To perform a manual measurement between auto measurements in the second
stage, touch the [NIBP Start/Stop] key.

13-18 User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series


13. NIBP MONITORING

Changing NIBP Settings


Change settings on the NIBP window. The following settings can be changed for
monitoring NIBP.
• Initial cuff pressure type
• Initial cuff pressure
• Measurement mode and interval
• NIBP alarm limits
• Venous puncture (When the Venous puncture is set to ON on the SYSTEM
SETUP window.)
The following items can be set on the SYSTEM SETUP window. Refer to
Section 3 of the Administrator’s Guide.
• Measurement end sound on/off
• Interval mode for auto measurement
• Measurement interval which can be called up on the MEASUREMENT
INTERVAL window
• Measurement mode after the monitor power is off for more than 30 minutes or
the monitor is initialized
• Dim or hide the old measurement data
• Time after NIBP measurement for the NIBP data to be dimmed or hidden
• Measurement program for STAT and SIM modes
• Venous puncture mode on/off and cuff inflation pressure for venous puncture
• NIBP measurement on vital sign alarm occurrence on/off
• Display NIBP pulse rate on/off 13
• NIBP data display color
The NIBP unit (mmHg or kPa) is the same as the pressure unit. The pressure
unit is set on the SYSTEM CONFIGURATION screen. Refer to Section 2 of the
Administrator’s Guide.

Selecting the Initial Cuff Inflation Pressure

Selecting the Initial Cuff Inflation Pressure Type


When the patient type is changed in ADMIT window, the initial cuff inflation
pressure is automatically set. Refer to “Change the Patient Type” in Section 3 for
more details.

Setting the Cuff Inflation Pressure


Select the cuff inflation pressure for the first measurement. After the first
measurement, the cuff inflation pressure is the systolic value of the previous
measurement plus 30 mmHg.
To change the initial cuff inflation pressure for neonate, the air hose for neonate
must be connected to the NIBP socket on the monitor.

User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series 13-19


13. NIBP MONITORING

Setting Range
Patient Type Default Setting
(5 mmHg/step, 1 kPa/step)
ADULT 100 to 280 mmHg, 13.0 to 37.0 kPa 180 mmHg, 24.0 kPa
CHILD 100 to 280 mmHg, 13.0 to 37.0 kPa 140 mmHg, 18.5 kPa
NEONATE 70 to 145 mmHg, 9.00 to 19.0 kPa 100 mmHg, 13.5 kPa

1 Display the NIBP window.


Touch [MENU] key → [NIBP] key.

2 Select the patient type on the INITIAL CUFF PRESSURE TYPE window.
Refer to the previous procedure.

3 Touch the [INITIAL CUFF PRESSURE] key. The INITIAL CUFF


PRESSURE window opens.

Slider

Patient type
Cuff inflation
pressure

Setting bar

4 Touch and drag the slider to the desired level on the setting bar. Use the
or key to adjust the setting.

5 Touch the key to close the window.

6 Touch the [HOME] key to return to the home screen.

Changing the NIBP Alarm Limits

CAUTION
When the alarm limit is set to OFF, there will be no alarm for that
limit. Be careful when you set the alarm limit to OFF.

13-20 User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series


13. NIBP MONITORING

You can set the upper and lower systolic, diastolic and MAP NIBP alarm limits
on the NIBP window. You can set all alarms, including the upper and lower NIBP
alarm limits, on the ALARM LIMITS window (See the Operator’s Manual or
Section 5 of the User’s Guide).
Setting Range
Upper limit: 15 to 260 mmHg in 5 mmHg steps (2.0 to 34.5 kPa in 0.5 kPa steps), OFF
(default setting: Systolic: ADULT - 180 mmHg (24.0 kPa), CHILD - 140
mmHg (18.5 kPa), NEONATE - 100 mmHg (13.5 kPa)), Diastolic: OFF,
MAP: OFF
Lower limit: OFF, 10 to 255 mmHg in 5 mmHg steps (1.5 to 34.0 kPa in 0.5 kPa steps)
(default setting: Systolic: ADULT - 80 mmHg (10.5 kPa), CHILD - 65
mmHg (8.5 kPa), NEONATE - 50 mmHg (6.5 kPa)), Diastolic: OFF, MAP:
OFF

1 Display the NIBP window.


Touch [MENU] key → [NIBP] key.

2 Touch the [SYS] key to change the systolic alarm setting.


Touch the [DIA] key to change the diastolic alarm setting. 13
Touch the [MAP] key to change the mean alarm setting.
Selected parameter

Upper limit
Upper limit slider
Current value
of the selected
parameter Lower limit

Lower limit slider

3 Touch and drag the slider to the desired level on the setting bar. Use the
or key to adjust the setting.
If the upper limit is set to a value above the maximum, the upper limit alarm
is set to OFF. If the lower limit is set to a value below the minimum, the
lower limit alarm is set to OFF.

4 Touch the key to close the window.

5 Touch the [HOME] key to return to the home screen.

User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series 13-21


13. NIBP MONITORING

Using Venous Puncture Mode


To aid in inserting a venous line, you can use venous puncture mode to inflate the
cuff to a preset pressure in order to prevent venous backflow. Venous backflow
causes swelling of the veins and makes it difficult to insert a venous line.
In venous puncture mode, the cuff automatically deflates 2 minutes after inflation
in ADULT/CHILD mode or 70 seconds after inflation in NEONATE mode. The
cuff can also be deflated by the operator at any time.
To use venous puncture mode, venous puncture mode must be set to ON and
the target cuff pressure must be set on the SYSTEM SETUP window. Refer to
Section 3 of the Administrator’s Guide.

CAUTION
Do not perform a venous puncture on the same arm where NIBP is
measured. This may cause an infusion backflow or internal
hemorrhage at the puncture.

NOTE: Venous puncture mode is available in the following modes:


• Manual measurement mode
• Auto (periodic) measurement mode (not available during
measurement and not available when waiting for next
measurement)
• STAT (continuous) measurement mode (not available during
measurement)
• SIM measurement mode (Not available during measurement
and not available when waiting for next measurement)

1 Display the NIBP window.


Touch [MENU] key → [NIBP] key.

13-22 User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series


13. NIBP MONITORING

2 Touch the [VENOUS PUNCTURE] key. The VENOUS PUNCTURE


window opens.

3 Touch the [START] key on the VENOUS PUNCTURE window. The cuff
starts inflating and the remaining time until cuff deflation is shown in the
<REMAINING TIME> box.
The cuff inflation can be stopped at any time by touching the [STOP] key on
the VENOUS PUNCTURE window or by displaying another window.

4 When using the venous puncture mode is finished, touch the [HOME] key to
return to the home screen.

13

User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series 13-23


14 IBP Monitoring

General..........................................................................14-2

Preparing for Blood Pressure Monitoring......................14-2


Preparation Flowchart..................................................................14-2
Blood Pressure Transducers....................................................14-3
IBP Connection Cords.............................................................14-3
Installing the Blood Pressure Measuring Device.................... 14-4
Connecting Cables to the Monitor........................................... 14-4
Assembling the Transducer..................................................... 14-4
Adjusting Zero Balance................................................................14-6
Adjusting Zero Balance........................................................... 14-6
Memorizing the Zero Balance Values......................................14-7

Monitoring IBP...............................................................14-8
IBP Information on the Home Screen...........................................14-8
14
Changing IBP Settings..................................................14-9
Changing the IBP and Pulse Rate Alarm Limits...........................14-9
Changing the Scale....................................................................14-11
Changing the Sync Sound Source.............................................14-12
Selecting Sync Sound Pitch.......................................................14-13
Adjusting Zero Balance..............................................................14-15
Selecting the Data Display Mode on the Home Screen.............14-16
14. IBP MONITORING

General
Invasive blood pressure and intracranial pressure (ICP) are measured and
monitored by connecting the blood pressure measuring device to the units.

Preparing for Blood Pressure Monitoring

Preparation Flowchart
1 Select the blood pressure measuring device.

2 Install the blood pressure measuring device, connect the blood pressure
transducer to the IBP connection cord, and connect the IBP connection cord
to the PRESS socket on the monitor. For details, refer to the instruction
manual provided with the blood pressure transducer and measuring kit.

3 Insert the catheter into the patient.

4 Perform zero balance adjustment.

5 Change necessary settings.

6 Start measurement (Start monitoring).


After zero balance adjustment, you can start IBP measurement and
monitoring.

WARNING
All parts, except for transducers, must be non conductive. Otherwise,
the discharged energy may cause electrical shock to the operator
during defibrillation.

CAUTION
Check that there are no scratches on the catheter balloon before
use.

CAUTION
Do not reuse disposable parts and accessories.

14-2 User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series


14. IBP MONITORING

Blood Pressure Transducers


Select the appropriate blood pressure measuring device according to the purpose.
* These parts have not been checked for compliance with the MDD (Medical
Device Directive). For EC member countries, Shanghai Kohden recommends
the use of parts that comply with MDD.
Becton Dickinson Disposable Blood Pressure Transducers (DX Series)
Monitoring Kit DX IBP Connection
Other Parts Fixing Device
Series Cord
DX-100*
DX-200*
DX-300*
DX-312* —
G-TBG2
DX-360*
JP-752P G-TMM
DX-360R*
G-UMM
DX-360TT*
Safe needle TA-BPN
DX-360SD* + arterial blood
sampler QS-90

Edwards Lifesciences (Baxter) Disposable Blood Pressure Transducers


(TruWave)
Edwards Lifesciences (Baxter) blood pressure transducers are available direct
from Edwards Lifesciences (Baxter) (www.edwards.com) or their suppliers
Monitor Kit IBP Connection Cord Fixing Device
MN12030US (TW)*
MN12030UW (TW)*
59-UH4
MN12030UT (TW)* JP-753P
59-DTS-C
MP-5100 (TW)*
MP-5200 (TW)*
14

IBP Connection Cords


The IBP connection cord connector has a memory chip for saving site label and
zero balance adjustment values.
JP-752P: For Becton Dickinson blood pressure transducers
JP-753P: For Edwards Lifesciences (Baxter) blood pressure transducers

JP-752P JP-753P

User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series 14-3


14. IBP MONITORING

Installing the Blood Pressure Measuring Device


The following describes installing the DX-360 Becton Dickinson disposable
blood pressure transducer. When using other blood pressure transducers and
measuring kits, refer to the respective instruction manuals.
Typical Configuration Example
Extension tube 30 cm

Micro drip with filter Extension tube 120 cm

Roller clamp

Infusion tube 150 cm

IBP connection cord

Connecting Cables to the Monitor

1 Connect the blood pressure transducer to the IBP connection cord.

2 Connect the IBP connection cord to the PRESS socket on the monitor.
NOTE: When connecting the IBP connection cord to the monitor after
assembling the transducer and filling the tubes with saline
solutions, make sure that the connector is not wet.

Assembling the Transducer


NOTE • The DX series disposable transducers are sterilized by EOG.
Keep them clean after opening.
• Check that connectors and caps are firmly connected and the
3-way stopcock are directed to the correct way.
• The 3-way stopcocks and blood pressure tube openings are
protected from contamination by the white aerated caps. Keep
these white caps on until the solution is filled in completely.
After filling the solution, replace the white caps with the yellow
sealing caps which are in the separate bag.

1 Inject 1 to 2 units of heparin into 1 mL sterilized physiological saline


solution.
NOTE: Do not mix the solution yet.

14-4 User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series


14. IBP MONITORING

2 Insert the needle at the tip of the micro-drip into the hole on the
physiological saline pack.

3 Pressurize the physiological saline pack with your hand by pressing the flush
cap to remove air from the pack.

4 When the solution in the micro-drip chamber is about 1/3 full (the stainless
needle is in the solution), turn the physiological saline pack upside down and
mix the physiological saline solution and heparin.

5 Place the saline pack in the pressure bag and hang the pressure bag on the
stand.

6 Press the flush cap to completely fill the tube with saline solution.
NOTE: Tap the bottom part of the micro-drip to remove air bubbles from
under the filter.

7 Fill in the transducer with the saline solution. Remove air bubbles by
pressing the flush cap at above the saline pack, then bringing the flush cap
down.
If the air bubbles cannot be removed from the transducer:
i) Hold the transducer higher than the saline pack to flow the saline solution
back into the saline pack and fill the transducer again.
ii) Tap the transducer lightly and flush the transducer slowly. Do not tap too
hard because the air bubbles may break into small bubbles which are
difficult to remove.

14
iii) Check that there are no air bubbles in the transducer, tubes and 3-way
stopcocks.

8 Replace the white aerated caps with the yellow sealing caps.

9 Pressurize the pressure bag to 300 mmHg (40.0 kPa). The solution in the
micro-chip chamber is about a third to half full.
At this pressure, the drip rate should be 2 to 4 drops/min.

User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series 14-5


14. IBP MONITORING

10 Check all connections and that there is no leakage in the circuit.


11 After about 30 minutes, check the pressure of the pressure bag and drip rate.
Also check that there is no leakage in the circuit.

Adjusting Zero Balance


NOTE: There is no alarm for 30 seconds after adjusting zero balance.
Adjust zero balance in the following cases. Zero balance adjustment is important
for accurate IBP measurement.
• Before starting measurement
• When the patient moved so that the height of the heart changed
• When the height of the blood pressure transducer changes
• When changes in the measured value are expected due to measurements over
a long period of time or due to changes in the ambient temperature (check the
pressure when exposed to air)
• IBP connection cord or transducer is changed
When the zero balance is not adjusted, the “ZERO IMBALANCE” message is
displayed beside each IBP value.
The zero balance is adjusted individually for one pressure line. Touch the [ZERO
CAL] key on the ZERO CALIBRATION window. The [ZERO CAL] key can
also be assigned to one of the function keys.
When using the optional JP-940P IBP Connection Box, the zero balance keys on
the box can be used for each line.

Adjusting Zero Balance

1 When zero balance is not adjusted, the following window appears.

2 Touch the [YES] key to adjust zero balance. When the [YES] key is touched,
ZERO CALIBRATION window appears. Adjust zero balance by doing the
following steps.
When the [NO] key is touched, the monitor starts monitoring IBP by using
the zero balance value memorized in the connector of the IBP connection
cord and the “ZERO IMBALANCE” messages disappear. The IBP values
appear on the screen. If necessary, adjust zero balance by doing the
following steps.

3 Move the dome up or down so that the 3-way stopcock on the transducer is
at the level of the right atrium of the patient and open the air release opening
of the 3-way stopcock to air.

14-6 User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series


14. IBP MONITORING

Heart

When measuring the intracranial pressure, adjust the 3-way stopcock of the
catheter to the level of the ventricle and open the air release opening of the
3-way stopcock to air.

4 Perform zero balance adjustment.


i) Display the ZERO CALIBRATION window.
Touch [MENU] key → [PRESS] key → [ZERO CALIBRATION] key.
ii) Touch the [ZERO CAL] key.

14

When the “ZEROING COMPLETE” message is displayed, zero balance


adjustment is completed.

5 Close the 3-way stopcock.


After adjusting zero balance and closing the 3-way stopcock, IBP is ready
to be measured. The IBP value and blood pressure waveform appear on the
screen.

Memorizing the Zero Balance Values


The zero values are saved in memory in the connector of the IBP connection
cord when zero balance is performed. Therefore, you don’t need to adjust the
zero balance again when connecting the IBP connection cord to the different
socket.

User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series 14-7


14. IBP MONITORING

Monitoring IBP
When the 3-way stopcock is closed after zero balance, you can start IBP
monitoring.

IBP Information on the Home Screen


The blood pressure waveform and scale correspond to the color of the IBP values
displayed.

Pulse rate (appears


when sync sound
source is set to IBP waveforms
PRESS)

IBP values
Systolic/Diastolic
Scale for IBP
(Mean) or Mean
waveforms

14-8 User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series


14. IBP MONITORING

Changing IBP Settings


Change settings on the IBP window. The following settings can be changed for
monitoring IBP.
• Scale
• IBP alarm limits
• Adjust zero balance. Refer to the “Adjusting Zero Balance” section.
• Numeric data display mode
• Sync source
• Sync sound pitch
The pressure unit (mmHg or kPa) can be set on the SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION screen. Refer to Section 2 of the Administrator’s Guide.
The noise filter, IBP calculation mode and IBP data display color can be set on
the SYSTEM SETUP window. Refer to Section 3 of the Administrator’s Guide.
The IBP waveform sweep speed can be selected on the DISPLAY/SOUND
window. Refer to Section 3.

Changing the IBP and Pulse Rate Alarm Limits

CAUTION
When the alarm limit is set to OFF, there will be no alarm for that
limit. Depending on the setting, the alarm off mark might not be
displayed on the screen. Be careful when you set the alarm limit to
OFF.

You can set the upper and lower systolic, diastolic and mean IBP alarm limits
and pulse rate alarm limits of the blood pressure on the PRESS window. You 14
can set all alarms, including the upper and lower IBP alarm limits and pulse rate
alarm limits, on the ALARM LIMITS window (See the Operator’s Manual or
Section 5 of the User’s Guide). The pulse rate alarm limits can also be changed
on the SpO2 window.

Setting Range
IBP upper limit: –48 to 300 mmHg in 2 mmHg steps (–6.0 to 40.0 kPa in 0.5
kPa steps), OFF
(default setting: SYS: OFF
DIA: OFF
MEAN: OFF)
IBP lower limit: OFF, –50 to 298 mmHg in 2 mmHg steps (–6.5 to 39.5 kPa in
0.5 kPa steps)
(default setting: SYS: OFF
DIA: OFF
MEAN: OFF)

User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series 14-9


14. IBP MONITORING

HR/PR upper limit: When <SYNC SOURCE> is set to ECG:


16 to 300 beats/min in 1 beat/min steps, OFF
When <SYNC SOURCE> is set to PRESS1 or SpO2:
31 to 300 beats/min in 1 beat/min steps, OFF
(default setting: ADULT-140, CHILD-170, NEONATE-200)
HR/PR lower limit: When <SYNC SOURCE> is set to ECG:
OFF, 15 to 299 beats/min in 1 beat/min steps
When <SYNC SOURCE> is set to PRESS1 or SpO2:
OFF, 30 to 299 beats/min in 1 beat/min steps
(default setting: ADULT-50, CHILD-75, NEONATE-100)

1 Display the PRESS window.


Touch [MENU] key → [PRESS] key.

2 Touch the [SYS] key to change the systolic alarm setting.


Touch the [DIA] key to change the diastolic alarm setting.
Touch the [MEAN] key to change the mean alarm setting.
Touch the [HR/PR] key to change the heart rate/pulse rate alarm setting.
Selected parameter

Upper limit slider

Upper limit
Current value
of the selected
parameter

Lower limit

Lower limit slider

3 Touch and drag the slider to the desired level on the setting bar. Use the
or key to adjust the setting.
If the upper limit is set to a value above the maximum, the upper limit alarm
is set to OFF. If the lower limit is set to a value below the minimum, the
lower limit alarm is set to OFF.

4 Touch the [HOME] key to return to the home screen.

14-10 User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series


14. IBP MONITORING

Changing the Scale


The scale can be changed for easy monitoring of the blood pressure waveform.

1 Display the SCALE window.


Touch [MENU] key → [PRESS] key → [SCALE] key.

2 Select the scale by touching the desired scale key. Use the sliders to adjust
the scale.
Or, touch the [ADJUST] key to automatically select to the appropriate scale
for the displayed waveform.

14

3 Touch the [HOME] key to return to the home screen.

User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series 14-11


14. IBP MONITORING

Changing the Sync Sound Source


You can select ECG, SpO2 pulse (SpO2) or arterial blood pressure pulse
(PRESS1) as the sync source. The sync source can also be changed on the ECG
and SpO2 windows.
When pulse wave and pressure waveform are irregular because of an IABP,
select ECG.
NOTE • When heart rate is unstable because of an ESU, select SpO2 or
PRESS1.
• When the connection cord of SpO2 or IBP of the arterial blood
pressure is disconnected from the monitor and an alarm occurs
when the sync source is set to SpO2 or PRESS1, the sync
source changes to ECG when the alarm is silenced by touching
the [Silence Alarms] key. The sync source returns to SpO2 or
PRESS1 when the SpO2 or IBP is monitored again. When using
PRESS1 as the sync source, adjust zero balance.
• When the sensor is detached from the patient and alarm
occurs, and the sync source is set to SpO2 or PRESS1, the
sync source does not change to ECG when the alarm is
silenced, and “- - -” is displayed for PR.
When the sync source is set to ECG and ECG is not measured, there is no sync
sound.
When SpO2 or PRESS1 is selected, the pulse rate is displayed to the left of the
heart rate on the screen and the sync mark synchronizes with the pulse.

1 Display the SYNC SOURCE window.


Touch [MENU] key → [PRESS] key → [SYNC SOURCE] key.

14-12 User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series


14. IBP MONITORING

2 Select the sync source.


ECG: QRS
PRESS1: Pulse wave of the arterial blood pressure
SpO2: SpO2 pulse

3 Touch the [HOME] key to return to the home screen.

Selecting Sync Sound Pitch


The sync sound can be variable pitch or fixed pitch pips. The fixed pitch is high
pitch as the default, but medium or low pitch can also be set on the SYSTEM
SETUP window (see Section 3 of the Administrator’s Guide). When you select
variable pitch, the pitch of the sync sound changes according to SpO2 value or
systolic BP value of the arterial blood pressure so that you can recognize the
change on the patient from the pitch of the sync sound without looking at the
monitor. The sync pitch can also be changed on the ECG and SpO2 windows.
When the sync sound source is set to SpO2 and the SpO2 value is below 81
%SpO2, the low pitch is automatically selected.
When the sync sound source is set to SpO2 and the “CHECK PROBE” or
“DETECTING PULSE” message is displayed on the screen, the sync sound
stops.
14
When the sync sound source is set to ECG or PRESS1, the sync pitch is set
to SpO2 and the SpO2 cannot be displayed on the screen, the low pitch is
automatically selected.
When the sync sound source is set to ECG or SpO2, the sync pitch is set to
PRESS1 and the IBP cannot be displayed on the screen, the low pitch is
automatically selected.
When the sync sound source is set to ECG or SpO2 and the IBP connection cord
is disconnected, the low pitch is automatically selected. After connecting the IBP
connection cord, adjust zero balance.

User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series 14-13


14. IBP MONITORING

1 Display the SYNC PITCH window.


Touch [MENU] key → [PRESS] key → [SYNC PITCH] key.

2 Select the sync sound pitch.


FIXED: The pitch is fixed to the pitch selected on the SYSTEM SETUP
window.
PRESS1: The pitch is high when the BP value is above 120 mmHg. The
pitch is low when the BP value is below 20 mmHg. The pitch
changes from high to low in 20 steps for each 5 mmHg change
between 120 and 20 mmHg BP value. The BP value of the highest
priority arterial blood pressure is used.
SpO2: The pitch changes in 20 steps from high to low for each 1 %SpO2
change in SpO2 value between 100 %SpO2 and 81 %SpO2.

3 Touch the [HOME] key to return to the home screen.

14-14 User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series


14. IBP MONITORING

Adjusting Zero Balance


NOTE: There is no alarm for 30 seconds after adjusting zero balance.
When the measurement value is abnormal, the numeric value on
the screen is highlighted.
Adjust zero balance in the following cases. Zero balance adjustment is important
for accurate IBP measurement.
• Before starting measurement
• When the patient moved so that the height of the heart changed
• When the height of the blood pressure transducer changes
• When changes in the measured value are expected due to measurements over
a long period of time or due to changes in the ambient temperature (check the
pressure when exposed to air)
• IBP connection cord or transducer is changed
When the zero balance is not adjusted, the “ZERO IMBALANCE” message is
displayed beside each IBP value.
The zero balance is adjusted individually for one pressure line. Touch the [ZERO
CAL] key on the ZERO CALIBRATION window. The [ZERO CAL] key can
also be assigned to a function key.

Adjusting Zero Balance

1 When zero balance is not adjusted, the value is displayed as “---”.

14

2 Display the ZERO CALIBRATION window.


Touch [MENU] key → [PRESS] key → [ZERO CALIBRATION] key.

Touch the [ZERO CALIBRATION] key, the ZERO CALIBRATION


window appears. Adjust zero balance by doing the following steps.

User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series 14-15


14. IBP MONITORING

3 Move the dome up or down to the appropriate position.

4 To adjust zero balance individually


Touch the [ZERO CAL] key on the ZERO CALIBRATION window.
When the “ZEROING COMPLETE” message is displayed, zero balance
adjustment is completed.

5 Close the 3-way stopcock.

Selecting the Data Display Mode on the Home Screen


The displaying mode of the IBP/ICP values can be selected for the home screen.
SYS/DIA/(MEAN): Displays the systolic blood pressure (SYS), diastolic blood pressure
(DIA) and the averaged blood pressure (MEAN).
MEAN: Displays only the averaged blood pressure.

1 Display the NUMERIC DISPLAY window.


Touch [MENU] key → [PRESS] key → [NUMERIC DISPLAY] key.

2 Select display mode.

3 Touch the [HOME] key to return to the home screen.

14-16 User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series


15 Temperature
Monitoring

General..........................................................................15-2

Preparing for Temperature Monitoring...........................15-3


Preparation Flowchart..................................................................15-3
Selecting the Probe......................................................................15-3
Reusable Probes..................................................................... 15-3
Disposable Probes.................................................................. 15-4
Connecting Cables and Attaching the Probe................................15-4
Connecting Cable to the Monitor............................................ 15-4
Attaching the Probe to the Patient.......................................... 15-5
Using the Insulation Pad......................................................... 15-5

Monitoring Temperature.................................................15-6
Temperature Information on the Home Screen............................15-6

Changing Temperature Settings....................................15-7


Changing the Temperature Alarm Limits......................................15-7
15
15. Temperature Monitoring

General
To monitor temperature, attach the probe to the patient and connect the probe to
the TEMP socket on the monitor.
NOTE: The monitor simulates the temperature signal of 27 °C and 37 °C
inside the monitor. Monitoring this simulated signal periodically,
the monitor self-diagnoses the temperature signal processor part
of the monitor. When the monitor could not cover the 0 to 45°C
measurement range, a "MPU MODULE ERROR" message is
displayed.

15-2 User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series


15. Temperature Monitoring

Preparing for Temperature Monitoring

Preparation Flowchart
1 Select the probe.

2 Connect the probe to the TEMP socket on the monitor.

3 Attach the probe to the patient.

4 Start monitoring and change necessary settings.

Selecting the Probe


Select the appropriate probe according to the purpose.

CAUTION
Select the appropriate probe for the patient. Using adult probes on
premature infants and children may injure the mucous membrane.

CAUTION
The insulation pad may irritate the skin. In long term monitoring,
change the attachment site to prevent irritation.

Reusable Probes
Thermistor Probe Purpose
401J*

For adult rectum/


esophagus
401J comes with a probe cover**
15

402J*

For child rectum/


esophagus

409J comes with an insulation pad**

409J*

For body surface

* These thermistor probes are available direct ** These parts have not been
from YSI, Yellow Springs Instrument Inc., checked for compliance with the
Yellow Springs Ohio 45387, USA; Phone +1 MDD (Medical Device Directive).
937-767- 7241. For EC member countries,
Shanghai Kohden recommends
the use of parts that comply with
MDD.

User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series 15-3


15. Temperature Monitoring

Disposable Probes
The following probes can be used on this monitor. To use the disposable probes,
the 5-15801 extension cable is required.
The disposable probes and the extension cable are available direct from Kendall
Healthcare Products Company (www.kendallhq.com) or their suppliers.

CAUTION
Do not reuse disposable probes on other patients.

Disposable Probe Thickness Purpose


Sonatemp 5-13212* 12F For esophagus
5-13218* 18F
5-13224* 24F
Sheritemp 5-15610* 18F For esophagus/
rectum
5-16201* — For body surface 5-15801 extension cable
5-26101* — For tympanic
membrane
Foley 5-18808* 8F For bladder
catheter
5-18810* 10F
5-18812* 12F
5-18814* 14F
5-18816* 16F
5-18818* 18F
* These parts have not been checked for compliance with
the MDD (Medical Device Directive). For EC member
countries, Shanghai Kohden recommends the use of
parts that comply with MDD.

Connecting Cables and Attaching the Probe

Connecting Cable to the Monitor


Connect the probe to the TEMP socket.
When using the disposable probe, connect the extension cable between the probe
and TEMP socket.

When connecting the 409J reusable probe for the body surface

15-4 User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series


15. Temperature Monitoring

Attaching the Probe to the Patient


Attach the probe to the patient by referring to the manual provided with the
probe.

CAUTION
Select the appropriate probe for the patient. Using adult probes on
premature infants and children may injure the mucous membrane.

NOTE: When the measuring site is exposed directly to air, the


temperature may be lower than normal. It takes about 20 to 30
minutes to reach the equilibrium temperature after attaching the
sensor.

Using the Insulation Pad


The pad prevents the environmental temperature from affecting the sensor
temperature and also prevents internal body heat from escaping at the attached
site so that a stable temperature is obtained.

15

User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series 15-5


15. Temperature Monitoring

Monitoring Temperature
After completing the preparation, temperature data appears on the screen.

Temperature Information on the Home Screen

Temperatures

15-6 User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series


15. Temperature Monitoring

Changing Temperature Settings


Change settings on the TEMP window. The temperature alarm limits can be
changed for monitoring temperature.
The temperature unit can be set to °C or °F on the SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
screen. Refer to Section 2 of the Administrator’s Guide.
The temperature data display color can be set on the SYSTEM SETUP window.
Refer to Section 3 of the Administrator’s Guide.

Changing the Temperature Alarm Limits

CAUTION
When the alarm limit is set to OFF, there will be no alarm for that
limit. Be careful when you set the alarm limit to OFF.

You can set the upper and lower temperature alarm limits on the TEMP window.
You can set all alarms, including the upper and lower temperature alarm limits,
on the ALARM LIMITS window (See the Operator’s Manual or Section 5 of the
User’s Guide).
Setting Range
You can set different limits for TEMP1 and TEMP 2.
TEMP1/TEMP2 upper limit: 0.1 to 45.0 °C in 0.1 °C steps (33 to 113 °F in 1 °F steps),
OFF (default setting: 38.0 °C (100 °F))
TEMP1/TEMP2 lower limit: OFF, 0.0 to 44.9 °C in 0.1 °C steps (32 to 112 °F in 1 °F
steps) (default setting: OFF)

1 Display the TEMP window.


Touch [MENU] key → [TEMP] key.
15

User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series 15-7


15. Temperature Monitoring

2 Touch the [TEMP1] or [TEMP2] key to set the alarm limit.


Selected parameter

Current value Upper limit slider


of the selected
Upper limit
parameter

Lower limit

Lower limit slider

3 Touch and drag the slider to the desired level on the setting bar. Use the
or key to adjust the setting.
If the upper limit is set to a value above the maximum, the upper limit alarm
is set to OFF. If the lower limit is set to a value below the minimum, the
lower limit alarm is set to OFF.

4 Touch the key to return to close the window.

5 Touch the [HOME] key to return to the home screen.

15-8 User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series


16 Drug

General..........................................................................16-2

Preparation....................................................................16-3
Preparation Flowchart..................................................................16-3

Displaying the DRUG Window......................................16-6

Selecting the Drug.........................................................16-8

Assigning a Drug Name and Dosage Unit to DRUG A to


D....................................................................................16-9

Changing the Settings................................................. 16-11


Changing the Drug Amount, Solution Amount, Dosage, Flow Rate

and Weight.................................................................................16-11
Changing the Dose Step............................................................16-12
Unit and Setting Range..............................................................16-12

16
16. Drug

General
On the DRUG window, you can calculate the flow rates and dosages for
medication titrations. The flow rate is calculated from the following equation.
The dosage can also be calculated when the flow rate is known.
Dosage x Patient Weight x Solution Amount
Flow rate =
Drug Amount

16-2 User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series


16. Drug

Preparation

Preparation Flowchart
There are three windows for the drug calculation. On the DOSE window, you can
see the table of the selected drug titration. The drug name and unit are selected
on the DRUG window. On the SETTING window, you can change drug amount
(AMOUNT), solution amount (VOLUME), dosage (DOSE), flow rate (SAMPLE
RATE), patient weight and dose step. The settings on the DRUG and SETTING
windows are used for the drug calculation and you can see the calculation result
on the DOSE window. The dosage and flow rate calculated from the setting on
the SETTING window are highlighted in blue.

Drug name
selected on
the DRUG Titration
window table

Set on the
SETTING
window
Value calculated from the Select the dose step
settings on the SETTING
window

NOTE • When using the DRUG window for the first time after shipment
or after settings are initialized, you must set the drug names
and other settings.
• When the patient weight is changed on the ADMIT page of the
ADMIT window, the titration is automatically recalculated with
the new weight.
17 drugs and drug amount, solution amount, dosage and dose step for each drug 16
are preset on the monitor. The dosage and flow rate are calculated from the
equations listed in the “Flow Rate Equations” section. You can set four other
drugs on the DRUG window and change the settings on the EDIT window.

User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series 16-3


16. Drug

Drug Titration Initial Settings


Drug Solution
Drug Name Dosage Step
Amount Amount
AMRINONE 500 mg 5.00 µg/kg/min
AMINOPHYLLINE 500 mg 0.10 mg/kg/h
BRETYLIUM 2000 mg 1.00 mg/min
0.10
DOBUTAMINE 250 mg 250 mL 2.50 µg/kg/min
DOPAMINE 800 mg 2.00 µg/kg/min
EPINEPHRINE 4 mg 1.00 µg/min
HEPARIN 25000 units 1000.00 units/h 50
INSULIN 100 units 100 mL 1.00 units/h
ISOPROTERENOL 2 mg 1.00 µg/kg/min
LIDOCAINE 2000 mg 2.00 mg/min
NITROGLYCERIN 50 mg 100.00 µg/min
0.10
NITROPRUSSIDE 50 mg 0.50 µg/kg/min
250 mL
NOREPINEPHRINE 4 mg 2.00 µg/min
PHENYLEPHRINE 300 mg 100.00 µg/min
PROCAINAMIDE 2000 mg 2.00 mg/min
STREPTOKINASE 750000 IU 30000.00 IU/h 5000
TPA 100 mg 200 mL 20.00 mg/h
0.10
DRUG A to D 500 mg 250 mL 1.00 µg/kg/min

Flow Rate Equations


Dosage Unit Drug Name Equation
Dosage (mg/h) x Solution amount (mL)
mg/h AMINOPHYLLINE Flow rate (mL/h) =
Drug amount (mg) x 1000

BRETYLIUM
Dosage (mg/min) x Solution amount (mL) x 60
mg/min LIDOCAINE Flow rate (mL/h) =
Drug amount (mg)
PROCAINAMIDE

EPINEPHRINE
ISOPROTERENOL Dosage (μg/min) x Solution amount (mL) x 60
μg/min Flow rate (mL/h) =
NOREPINEPHRINE Drug amount (mg) x 1000
PHENYLEPHRINE
AMRINONE
DOPAMINE
μg/kg/min DOBUTAMINE Dosage (μg/kg/min) x Weight (kg) x Solution amount (mL) x 60
Flow rate (mL/h) =
Drug amount (mg) x 1000
NITROGLYCERINE
NITROPRUSSIDE
HEPARIN Dosage (units/h) x Solution amount (mL)
units/h Flow rate (mL/h) =
INSULIN Drug amount (units)
Dosage (IU/h) x Solution amount (mL)
IU/h STREPTOKINASE Flow rate (mL/h) =
Drug amount (IU)

16-4 User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series


16. Drug

For DRUG A to D, when using the same dosage unit as above, the same equation
is used. When using other units, refer to the table below.
Dosage Unit Equation
Dosage (mg/kg/min) x Weight (kg) x Solution amount (mL) x 60
mg/kg/min Flow rate (mL/h) =
Drug amount (mg)

Dosage (mg/kg/h) x Weight (kg) x Solution amount (mL)


mg/kg/h Flow rate (mL/h) =
Drug amount (mg)

Dosage (μg/h) x Weight (kg) x Solution amount (mL)


μg/h Flow rate (mL/h) =
Drug amount (mg) x 1000

Dosage (μg/kg/h) x Weight (kg) x Solution amount (mL)


μg/kg/h Flow rate (mL/h) =
Drug amount (mg) x 1000

Dosage (units/kg/h) x Weight (kg) x Solution amount (mL)


units/kg/h Flow rate (mL/h) =
Drug amount (units)

Dosage (IU/kg/h) x Weight (kg) x Solution amount (mL)


IU/kg/h Flow rate (mL/h) =
Drug amount (IU)

16

User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series 16-5


16. Drug

Displaying the DRUG Window

1 Press the [MENU] key to display the MENU window.

2 Touch the [DRUG] key. The DRUG window appears.


When DRUG is assigned to one of the function keys at the upper left of the
screen, touching the DRUG function key also opens the DRUG window.

Select a drug.

Display EDIT window for entering drug name and dose unit.

3 To display the SETTINGS window, touch the SETTINGS tab.


Touch a key to enter value.

Use the numeric keypad to enter value. Touch


the [ENT] key to register the entered value.

16-6 User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series


16. Drug

To display the DOSE window, touch the DOSE tab.

4 Press the [HOME] key to return to the home screen.

16

User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series 16-7


16. Drug

Selecting the Drug

1 Display the DRUG window.


Press the [MENU] key → [DRUG] key → DRUG tab.
When DRUG is assigned to one of the function keys, touching the DRUG
function key also opens the DRUG window.

Selected drug
name.

2 Select the drug by touching the drug name key. When the drug is selected,
drug amount, solution amount (BASE VOLUME), dosage (DOSE) and step
(DOSE STEP) set for that drug and concentration and flow rate (SAMPLE
RATE) which are automatically calculated appear on the window.
NOTE • DOPAMINE, DOBUTAMINE, NITROGLYCERIN and
NITROPRUSSIDE need patient weight to calculate the flow
rate. For these drugs, enter the patient weight on the ADMIT
page of the ADMIT window or the SETTINGS window of the
DRUG window.
• For the DRUG A to D, assign the drug name and set the unit on
the DRUG window and set the drug amount, solution amount,
dosage and step on the SETTINGS window.

16-8 User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series


16. Drug

Assigning a Drug Name and Dosage Unit to DRUG A to D

When using a drug other than the 17 preset drugs, you can assign a drug name
and dosage unit to DRUG A to D. when the dosage unit is set, the flow rate
unit is automatically set. When using this function, you must also set the drug
amount, solution amount (BASE VOLUME), dosage (DOSE) and step (DOSE
STEP) so that the dosage and flow rate (SAMPLE RATE) can be calculated.

1 Display the DRUG NAME window.


Press the [MENU] key → [DRUG] key → DRUG tab.
When DRUG is assigned to one of the function keys, touching the DRUG
function key also opens the DRUG window.

2 Select [DRUG A], [DRUG B], [DRUG C] or [DRUG D] key to assign a


drug name.

3 Touch the [EDIT] key. The keyboard for entering drug name appears.

Cursor

16
Delete key

Alphanumeric

ENT key

Moves cursor

Space key

4 Enter the drug name. Up to 16 alphanumeric characters can be entered.


Touch the [ENT] key to register the entered name.

User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series 16-9


16. Drug

5 Select the unit. When the dosage unit is set, the flow rate unit is
automatically set as follows.
Dosage Unit Drug Amount Unit
mg/h
mg/min
mg/kg/h
mg/kg/min
mg
μg/h
μg/min
μg/kg/h
μg/kg/min
units/h units
IU/h IU

16-10 User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series


16. Drug

Changing the Settings


The following items can be changed for the drug calculation. When the settings
are changed, the dosage and flow rate are automatically recalculated.
• Drug amount
• Solution amount (Base volume)
• Dosage (Dose)
• Flow rate (Sample rate)
• Weight
• Step (Dose step)
NOTE • Enter the data in the units displayed on the window.
• When using the drug which is assigned to DRUG A to DRUG D,
you must set the unit on the DRUG window before changing the
setting on the SETTINGS window.

Changing the Drug Amount, Solution Amount, Dosage, Flow


Rate and Weight
1 Display the SETTINGS window.
Press the [MENU] key → [DRUG] key → SETTINGS tab.
Select setting item.

16

For entering number.

2 Select the item you want to change the setting for by touching the item name
key.

3 Change the setting.


Use the numeric keypad on the window, and then touch the [ENT] key.

User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series 16-11


16. Drug

Changing the Dose Step


1 Display the DOSE window.
Press the [MENU] key → [DRUG] key → DOSE tab.

2 Select the setting from <DOSE STEP> box.

Unit and Setting Range


Drug Amount, Dosage and Step
Drug Amount Dosage Step
Drug Name
Unit Setting Range Unit Setting Range Setting Range
AMRINONE μg/kg/min
AMINOPHYLLINE mg/h
BRETYLIUM mg mg/min
0.01, 0.05, 0.10, 1.00, 10.00
DOBUTAMINE μg/kg/min
DOPAMINE μg/kg/min
EPINEPHRINE μg/min
units
HEPARIN units/h 10, 50, 100, 500
INSULIN units/kg/h
ISOPROTERENOL μg/min
0.01 to 1500000 0.01 to 1500000
LIDOCAINE mg/min
NITROGLYCERIN μg/kg/min
0.01, 0.05, 0.10, 1.00, 10.00
NITROPRUSSIDE mg μg/kg/min
NOREPINEPHRINE μg/min
PHENYLEPHRINE μg/min
PROCAINAMIDE mg/min
ISOREPTERENOL IU/h
5000, 10000, 50000
STREPTOKINASE IU IU/kg/h
TPA mg mg/h 0.01, 0.05, 0.10, 1.00, 10.00

16-12 User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series


16. Drug

For DRUG A to DRUG D


Dosage Drug Amount Step
Unit Setting Range Unit Setting Range Setting Range
mg/h
mg/min
mg/kg/h
mg/kg/min 0.01, 0.05, 0.10, 1.00,
mg
μg/h 10.00

μg/min
0.01 to 1500000 0.01 to 1500000
μg/kg/h
μg/kg/min
units/h
units 10, 50, 100, 500
units/kg/h
IU/h
IU 5000, 10000, 50000
IU/kg/h

Solution Amount, Flow Rate and Weight


Item Unit Drug Amount Unit
Solution Amount mL 1 to 1000
Flow Rate mL/h 0.1 to 1000
Weight kg 0 to 449.9

16

User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series 16-13


17 Reference

Clock Accuracy..............................................................17-2

Periodic Replacement Schedule...................................17-3

Repair Parts Availability Policy......................................17-3

17
17. Reference

Clock Accuracy
At an operating temperature of 25 °C, the accuracy of the clock IC of this
monitor is about ± 3 minutes 30 seconds per month.
At storage temperatures between –20 and +60 °C, the accuracy of the clock IC of
this monitor is about ± 6 minutes per month.
Periodically check that the time in the upper right corner of the monitor screen is
correct.
To change the time setting, refer to “Changing Date and Time” in Section 3.
NOTE: When the date or time is changed during monitoring, the date and
time of all stored data is also changed and may not match the
date and time on the printout.

17-2 User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series


17. Reference

Periodic Replacement Schedule


To maintain the performance of the instrument, the following parts must be
periodically replaced.
Description Code No. Expected Life Span
SVM-7500 Series Bedside Monitor
Battery pack SB-752P Approx. 1 year
WS-752P Recorder Module (option)
Approx. 370 rolls of
recording paper
RG-750X PAPER DRIVE After 370 rolls of recording
Thermal array head
UNIT paper, the thermal array
head is deteriorated and the
recording becomes thin.
Approx. 9,000 rolls
of recording paper
(continuous recording)
RG-750X PAPER DRIVE After 9.000 rolls of
Motor
UNIT recording paper, the paper
drive motor is deteriorated
and cannot feed the
recording paper.
Approx. 6 years
RG-750X PAPER DRIVE When the platen roller
Platen roller, Ø 8
UNIT is deteriorated, the paper
cannot be fed.
Must be replaced with a
new one when the RG-
REC GUIDANCE PANEL 6124-905897
750X PAPER DRIVE
UNIT is replaced.

Repair Parts Availability Policy


Shanghai Kohden Corporation (SKC) shall stock repair parts (parts necessary to
maintain the performance of the instrument) for a period of 8 years from the date
of delivery. In that period SKC or its authorized agents will repair the instrument.
This period may be shorter than 8 years if the board or part necessary for the
17
faulty section is not available.

User’s Guide SVM-7500 Series 17-3

You might also like